Phaser 8500 8550 Service Manual Ver3

Phaser 8400/8500/8550 Color Printer
Service Manual
Warning The following servicing instructions are for use by qualified service personnel only. To avoid personal injury, do not perform any servicing other than that contained in the operating instructions, unless you are qualified to do so. December, 2005 721P58550
Copyright 2005 Xerox Corporation. All Rights Reserved. Unpublished rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United States. Contents of this publication may not be reproduced in any form without permission of Xerox Corporation. Copyright protection claimed includes all forms of matters of copyrightable materials and information now allowed by statutory or judicial law or hereinafter granted, including without limitation, material generated from the software programs which are displayed on the screen such as styles, templates, icons, screen displays, looks, etc. XEROX, The Document Company, the digital X, CentreWare, FinePoint, infoSMART, Made For Each Other, PagePack, Phaser, PhaserSMART, TekColor, and Walk-Up are trademarks of Xerox Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Acrobat, Adobe Reader, Adobe Type Manager, ATM, Illustrator, PageMaker, Photoshop, PostScript, Adobe Brilliant Screens, Adobe Garamond, Adobe Jenson, Birch, Carta, IntelliSelect, Mythos, Quake, and Tekton are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries. Apple, AppleTalk, EtherTalk, LaserWriter, LocalTalk, Macintosh, Mac OS, TrueType, Apple Chancery, Chicago, Geneva, Monaco, New York , and QuickDraw are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. HP-GL, HP-UX, and PCLare trademarks of Hewlett-Packard Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. IBM and AIX are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation in the United States and/ or other countries. Windows, Windows NT, Windows Server, and Wingdings are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Novell, NetWare, NDPS, NDS, Novell Directory Services , IPX, and Novell Distributed Print Servicesare trademarks of Novell, Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries. SunSM, Sun Microsystems, and Solaris are trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries. SWOP is a trademark of SWOP, Inc. UNIX is a trademark in the United States and other countries, licensed exclusively through X/Open Company Limited. As an ENERGY STAR partner, Xerox Corporation has determined that this product with an ES Option meets the ENERGY STAR guidelines for energy efficiency. The ENERGY STAR name and logo are registered U.S. marks.
PANTONE Colors generated may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Publications for accurate color. PANTONE and other Pantone, Inc. trademarks are the property of Pantone, Inc. Pantone, Inc., 2000.
User Safety Summary

Terms in Manual
Caution Conditions that can result in damage to the product. Warning Conditions that can result in personal injury or loss of life. Power source: For 110 VAC printers, do not apply more than 130 volts RMS between the supply conductors or between either supply conductor and ground. Use only the specified power cord and connector. For 220 VAC printers, do not apply more than 250 volts RMS between the supply conductors or between either supply conductor and ground. Use only the specified power cord and connector. Refer to a qualified service technician for changes to the cord or connector. Operation of product: Avoid electric shock by contacting a qualified service technician to replace fuses inside the product. Do not operate without the covers and panels properly installed. Do not operate in an atmosphere of explosive gases. Warning Turning the power off using the On/Off switch does not de-energize the printer. You must remove the power cord to disconnect the printer from the mains. Keep the power cord accessible for removal in case of an emergency. Safety instructions: Read all installation instructions carefully before you plug the product into a power source. Terms on Product Warning A personal injury hazard exists that may not be apparent. For example, a panel may cover the hazardous area. Also applies to a hazard to property including the product itself. Warning Personal injury hazard exists in the area where you see the sign. Care of product: Disconnect the power plug by pulling the plug, not the cord. Disconnect the power plug if the power cord or plug is frayed or otherwise damaged, if you spill anything into the case, if product is exposed to any excess moisture, if product is dropped or damaged, if you suspect that the product needs servicing or repair, and whenever you clean the product.
Service Manual
Ground the product: Plug the three-wire power cord (with grounding prong) into grounded AC outlets only. If necessary, contact a licensed electrician to install a properly grounded outlet. Symbols as marked on product: DANGER high voltage:
Protective ground (earth) terminal:
Use caution. Refer to the manual(s) for information:
WARNING: If the product loses the ground connection, usage of knobs and controls (and other conductive parts) can cause an electrical shock. Electrical product may be hazardous if misused.
Service Safety Summary

For qualified service personnel only: Refer also to the preceding Users Safety Summary. Do not service alone: Do not perform internal service or adjustment of this product unless another person capable of rendering first aid or resuscitation is present. Use care when servicing with power on: Dangerous voltages may exist at several points in this product. To avoid personal injury, do not touch exposed connections and components while power is on. Disconnect power before removing the power supply shield, soldering, or replacing components. Do not wear jewelry: Remove jewelry prior to servicing. Rings, necklaces, and other metallic objects could come into contact with dangerous voltages and currents. Power source: This product is intended to operate from a power source that will not apply more than 250 volts rms between the supply conductors or between either supply conductor and ground. A protective ground connection by way of the grounding conductor in the power cord is essential for safe operation.
ii
Regulatory Specifications
United States
Xerox has tested this product to electromagnetic emission and immunity standards. These standards are designed to mitigate interference caused or received by this product in a typical office environment.
United States (FCC Regulations)

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy. If it is not installed and used in accordance with these instructions, it may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiver. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/television technician for help.
Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by Xerox could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. To ensure compliance with Part 15 of the FCC rules, use shielded interface cables.
Canada (Regulations)
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. Cet appareil numrique de la classe B est conforme la norme NMB-003 du Canada.
European Union (Declaration of Conformity)

Xerox Corporation declares, under our sole responsibility, that the product to which this declaration relates is in conformity with the following standards and other normative documents:
Service Manual
iii
Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC as amended

EN 60950:2000
Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive 89/336/EEC as amended

EN 55022:1998+A1:2000 +A2:2003 EN 55024:1998+A1:2000 +A2:2003 EN 61000-3-2:2000 EN 61000-3-3:1995+A1:2000
Radio & Telecommunications Terminal Equipment Directive 1999/5/EC as amended

EN 300 330-2 V1.1.1 EN 300 440-2 V1.1.1 EN 301 489-3 V1.3.1
This product, if used properly in accordance with the user's instructions, is neither dangerous for the consumer nor for the environment. A signed copy of the Declaration of Conformity for this product can be obtained from Xerox.
iv
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Precautions

Some semiconductor components, and the respective sub-assemblies that contain them, are vulnerable to damage by Electrostatic discharge (ESD). These components include Integrated Circuits (ICs). Large-Scale Integrated circuits (LSIs), field-effect transistors and other semiconductor chip components. The following techniques will reduce the occurrence of component damage caused by static electricity. Be sure the power is off to the chassis or circuit board, and observe all other safety precautions.
Immediately before handling any semiconductor components assemblies, drain the electrostatic charge from your body. This can be accomplished by touching an earth ground source or by wearing a wrist strap device connected to an earth ground source. Wearing a wrist strap will also prevent accumulation of additional bodily static charges. Be sure to remove the wrist strap before applying power to the unit under test to avoid potential shock. After removing a static sensitivity assembly from its anti-static bag, place it on a grounded conductive surface. If the anti-static bag is conductive, you may ground the bag and use it as a conductive surface. Do not use freon-propelled chemicals. These can generate electrical charges sufficient to damage some devices. Do not remove a replacement component or electrical sub-assembly from its protective package until you are ready to install it. Immediately before removing the protective material from the leads of a replacement device, touch the protective material to the chassis or circuit assembly into which the device will be installed. Minimize body motions when handling unpacked replacement devices. Motion such as your clothes brushing together, or lifting a foot from a carpeted floor can generate enough static electricity to damage an electro-statically sensitive device. Handle ICs and EPROMs carefully to avoid bending pins. Pay attention to the direction of parts when mounting or inserting them on Printed Circuit Boards (PCBs).
Service Manual
Contents
User Safety Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i Regulatory Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . v
1 General Information
Printer Introduction and Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Printer Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 Control Panel Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 LED Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Control Panel Feature Descriptions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Menu Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 Control Panel Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 Parts of the Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7 Front View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7 Right Side View with Printer Interfaces. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7 Rear View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8 Routine Maintenance Items and Consumables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 Printer Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10 Physical Dimensions and Clearances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10 Functional Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11 Electrical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11 Environmental Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11 Media and Tray Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
2 Theory of Operation
Main Printer Subsystems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Printer Subsystem Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Process Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 Media Path Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Ink Loader. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Printhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Drum Maintenance System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 Purge System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 Drum Assembly And Transfix System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16 Electronics Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19 I/O Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22 Print Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23 Drum Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24 Printing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24 Paper Pick for Tray 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25 Paper Pick for Trays 2 - 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26 Transfixing and Exiting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
Service Manual
Duplex Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transfix and Print Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Printer Self-Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Printhead Maintenance Cycle (Eliminate Light Stripes) . . . . . . . Paper Preheater Cleaning (Remove Print Smears). . . . . . . . . . . Transfix Roller Oiling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drum Cleaning - Chase Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuration Card Personality Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-30 2-31 2-33 2-33 2-34 2-34 2-34 2-35
3 Error Messages and Codes

Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Power-Up Error Messages and LED Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 BIST Error Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 POST Error Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 PEST Error Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 Fault Code Error Message Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 Fault Code Error Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 Interpreting Fault Codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 1,000.4x Error - 525-Sheet Feeder Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10 2,0XX.4x Error - I/O Circuit Board Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11 3,0XX.6x - IPC Program Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12 4,0XX.4x Errors - Process Control System Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13 5,0XX.4x Errors - Y-Axis Sub-System Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16 6,0XX.4x Errors - X-Axis Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18 7,0XX.4x Errors - Process Motor Gearbox Faults. . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19 8,0XX.xx Error - Wiper/Media Path Gearbox Faults . . . . . . . . . . 3-24 9,0XX.xx Errors - Ink Loader Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26 11,0XX.xx Errors - Electronics Module Interface Fault . . . . . . . . 3-27 13,0XX.xx Errors - Thermal Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29 19,0XX.xx Errors - Printhead Calibration faults.. . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36 31,0XX.4x Errors - Mechanical Initialization Jam. . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37 33,0XX.xx Errors - Tray Manager Device Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39 34,0XX.xx Errors - Printhead NVRAM Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39 36,000.40 Errors - Drum Maintenance Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40 37,0XX.xx Errors - PEST Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41 Jam Codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55 Jam Code Definition Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57
4 General Troubleshooting
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hidden Service Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Service Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Service Diagnostics Mode Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Service Diagnostics Menu Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 4-2 4-4 4-5 4-6
Check Menu Definition Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12 Check / Activators Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13 Check Shafts Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17 Check Paper Path Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20 Check Drive Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35 Check Drum Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42 Check Motors Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48 Check Misc Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53 Electronics Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59 Printer Power-Up Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59 Mechanical Initialization (8400) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60 Mechanical Initialization (8500/8550). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-62 Miscellaneous Electrical Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-65 Verifying Power Supply Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-75 Measuring AC Power Supply Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-75 Measuring DC Power Supply Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-76 Ensuring Ground Integrity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-77 Testing Motor and Solenoid Resistances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78 Paper Path and Media-Based Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-79 Media-Based Problems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-79 Paper-Pick Errors - Trays 2, 3, and 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-79 Paper-Pick Errors - Tray 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-80 Preheater and Transfix Jams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-80 Checking the Process and Media Path Drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-81 Media Skews Passing Through the Paper Path. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-81 Operating System and Application Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-82 Testing Communications Ports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-82 Network Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-84 Obtaining Serial Back Channel Trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-85
5 Print-Quality Troubleshooting
Print-Quality Problems Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Random Light Stripes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 Predominate Light Stripes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 Smudges or Smears . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 Printing Too Light or Too Dark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 Not Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 Color is Uneven or Color is Wrong . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Streaks or Lines Down the Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 Scratches or Marks Parallel to the Long Axis of Printing, Particularly with Film . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 White Portion of Print is Colored . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15 Fuzzy Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17 Ghosting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20 Poor Small Text Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22 Vertical Lines Appear Wavy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Service Manual
Oil Streaks on Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Incomplete Image Transfer to Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ink Smears on First Printed Side of Duplex Print . . . . . . . . . . . . Repeating Print Defects on Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . White Stripes (Pinstripes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wrinkling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Image Is Offset or Cut-Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Poor Ink Adhesion, Poor Image Durability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analyzing Service Test Prints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test Print Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-24 5-26 5-28 5-29 5-30 5-31 5-32 5-32 5-33 5-33
6 Adjustments and Calibrations

Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Wiper Alignment Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Printer Component Homing Positions and Indicators . . . . . . . . . 6-4 Wiper Assembly Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 Homing the Head Tilt Gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Homing the Process Gear Drive Train . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8 Printer Calibrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10 Wiper Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10 Jet Substitution Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10 Enabling Jet Substitution Mode (8400) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11 Enabling Jet Substitution Mode (8500/8550) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11 Disabling Jet Substitution Mode (8400) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12 Disabling Jet Substitution Mode (8500/8550) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12 Resetting NVRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
7 Cleaning and Maintenance

Service Cleaning Maintenance Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pick Roller Cleaning Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maintenance Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 7-2 7-4 7-5 7-5 7-6 7-6
8 Service Parts Disassembly

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standard Orientation of the Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Notes on Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front Door (Tray 1) Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control Panel Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front (Control) Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Right Side Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2 8-2 8-3 8-4 8-5 8-6 8-6 8-6
Left Side Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7 Exit Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7 Ink Loader Assembly and Door. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8 Imaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9 Y-Axis Belt, Y-Axis Tension Spring, and Y-Axis Motor Assembly . 8-9 Printhead Assembly, Right and Left Printhead Restraints. . . . . . 8-12 Head Tilt Solenoid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18 X-Axis Bias Spring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19 Printhead Wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20 Media Release Blade Carriage Assembly and Transfix Roller . . . 8-22 Paper Preheater and Deskew Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23 Duplex Roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25 Transfix Load Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26 Transfix Camshaft Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-31 Drum Maintenance Camshaft Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32 Drum Maintenance Pivot Plate Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-33 Drum Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34 Purge Pressure Pump. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-39 Paper Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-40 Exit Module Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-40 Paper Guides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-41 Take Away Roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-44 Pick Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-45 Media Tray Lift Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-47 Motors, Gears, Solenoids, Clutches, and Fans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-48 Media Drive Gearbox with Two Clutches and Solenoid . . . . . . . . 8-48 Tray 1 Pick Solenoid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-49 Preheater Lift Solenoid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-50 Process Drive Motor and Gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-51 X-Axis Motor Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-53 Head Tilt Compound Gear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-54 Electronics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-55 Electronics Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-55 Wave Amp Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-56 I/O Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-57 Drum Heater Relay Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-58 NVRAM Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-59 DIMM Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-60 Hard Drive Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-61
9 Parts Lists
Serial Number Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Using the Parts List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 Imaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6 Paper Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Service Manual
Motors, Gears, Solenoids, Clutches, and Fans. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Circuit Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sensors and Flags (Actuators). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Xerox Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-10 9-12 9-14 9-16
10 Wiring Diagrams
Main Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 Main Wiring Diagram (Continued). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 Right-Side Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 Right-Side Wiring Diagram (Continued) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5 Left-Side Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6 Left-Side Wiring Diagram (Continued) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7 Inside Front Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8 Inside Top Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9 Inside Top - Printhead Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
Appendix
Menu Map (8400) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2 Menu Map (8500/8550) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4 Media Margin Specification Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-6 Paper Weight Equivalence Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-7 On-site Printhead Troubleshooting Checklist (8400) . . . . . . . . . . A-8 On-site Printhead Troubleshooting Checklist (8500/8550) . . . . A-13
Index
General Information
In this chapter...

Printer Introduction and Overview Printer Configurations Control Panel Configuration Parts of the Printer Routine Maintenance Items and Consumables Printer Specifications
Section
Printer Introduction and Overview

The Xerox Phaser 8400/8500/8550 Color Printer Service Manual is the primary document used for repairing, maintaining, and troubleshooting the printer. To ensure understanding of this product, complete the Xerox Phaser 8400/8500/8550 Color Printer Service Training and self-study guide.
Back Left
Right
Front
s8500-002
1-2
Printer Configurations
The Configuration Card holds configuration information that enables or disables built-in features as described below. The first table shows the configuration for the 8400 series. The second table shows the configuration for the 8500 series.
Phaser 8400-Series Printer Configurations Features
Maximum Print Speed Memory (Std/Max) Hard Drive PostScript Fonts PCL Fonts Japanese Fonts* Job Pipelining Automatic 2-Sided Printing 100-Sheet Tray 1 525-Sheet Tray 2 525-Sheet Feeder Tray 3 525-Sheet Feeder Tray 4 USB, Parallel Connection 10/100 Ethernet Connection
8400B
24 128/512 MB No 137 81 No No No Standard Standard Optional Optional Standard No
8400BD
24 256/512 MB No 137 81 No Yes Standard Standard Standard Optional Optional Standard No
8400N
24 128/512 MB Optional** 137 81 Optional No No Standard Standard Optional Optional Standard Standard
8400DP
24 256/512 MB Optional** 137 81 Optional Yes Standard Standard Standard Optional Optional Standard Standard
8400DX
24 256/512 MB Standard 137 81 Optional Yes Standard Standard Standard Standard Optional Standard Standard
*Japanese fonts are provided for applicable countries per special licensing requirements. ** The following features are not included in this configuration: proof print, saved print, secure print, and collation.
General Information
1-3
Phaser 8500/8550 Series Printer Configurations Phaser Features

Maximum Print Speed Memory (Std/Max) Hard Drive PostScript Fonts PCL Fonts Job Pipelining Automatic 2-Sided Printing 100-Sheet Tray 1 525-Sheet Tray 2 525-Sheet Feeder Tray 3 525-Sheet Feeder Tray 4 USB Connection 10/100 Ethernet Connection
8500N
24ppm 128MB/ 1GB Optional** 137 81 No No Standard Standard No No Standard Yes
8500DN
24ppm 128MB/ 1GB Optional** 137 81 No Yes Standard Standard No No Standard Yes
8550DP
30ppm 256MB/ 1GB Optional** 137 81 Yes Yes Standard Standard No No Standard Yes
8550DT
30ppm 256MB/ 1GB Optional** 137 81 Yes Yes Standard Standard Yes No Standard Yes
8550DX
30ppm 512MB/ 1GB Standard 137 81 Yes Yes Standard Standard Yes Yes Standard Yes
** The following features are not included in the Phaser 8400-series printers, but are included with the Phaser 8500/8550 printers with a hard drive: proof print, saved print, secure print, personal print, and font storage.
1-4
Control Panel Configuration

The Control Panel consists of one tricolor LED, a display window, and six functional buttons. These buttons navigate the menu system, perform functions, and select modes of operation for the printer.
LED Indicators
Green = Ready to Print
Flashing Green = Receiving, Processing Data, Printing or Power Saver Mode Flashing Red = Error
Flashing Amber = Warning
Control Panel Feature Descriptions

1 3
Phaser 8500
READY TO PRINT
Walk-Up Features Information Paper Tray Setup Printer Setup Troubleshooting
s8500-003
Status Indicator LED: Green: Ready to print. Yellow: Warning condition, printer continues to print. Red: Startup sequence or error condition. Blinking: Printer is busy or warming up. Graphic display indicates status messages and menus. Cancel button Cancels the current print job. Back button Returns to the previous menu item.
Up Arrow button Scrolls upward through the menus.
2 3 4
6 7 8
Down Arrow button Scrolls downward through the menus. OK button Accepts the selected setting. Help (?) or Information button Displays a help message with information about the printer, such as printer status, error messages, and maintenance information.
General Information
1-5
Menu Maps
The Customer Menu Map helps you navigate the Control Panel menus. The Menu Maps are provided in the appendix section of this manual, see page A-2. To print the Menu Map: 1. On the Control Panel, select Information, and then press the OK button. 2. Select Menu Map, and then press the OK button to print. The service diagnostic menu map is detailed in Section 4, see "Service Diagnostics" on page 4-4 for more information.
Control Panel Shortcuts

Mode or Menu Item
Service Tools Menu
Shortcut
On the Control Panel, press the Down Arrow button and select Troubleshooting and press OK. Then, press the Down Arrow button to select Service Tools and then press OK. (Phaser 8400) Hold the Back and Info button at power up (for about 30 seconds). (Phaser 8500/8550) Wait until Control Panel screen turns black, and then press and hold Back and Help buttons until the message Beginning Service Mode displays. Press and hold the Cancel button, and then press the Help button. Press and hold the Cancel button, and then press the Back button. (Phaser 8400 only) To add Jet Substitution Mode to the Print Quality Problems menu: From the Print Quality Problems menu: press and hold the Up Arrow button, and then press the Back button . Phaser 8500/8550 have Jet Substitution in the main menu system (under Eliminate Light Stripes). Printer goes to the ready state without waiting for thermal temperatures to reach the proper operating values. On power-up, when the Xerox splash screen displays, press and release the Up Arrow button, then press the Down Arrow button. If the printer detects ink on the drum, the display indicates a warming-up status.
Service (Internal) Diagnostics
Set Control Panel language Bypass protected menus Jet Substitution Mode
FTTR (Fast Time To Ready)
1-6
Parts of the Printer

This section shows the main external components of the printer, including interfaces, the electronics module, and the internal sensors.
Front View
1. Optional 525-Sheet Feeder Tray 4
6 5 7 8 9 10
2. Optional 525-Sheet Feeder Tray 3 3. Stan. 525-Sheet Feeder Tray 2 4. 100-Sheet Multi-Purpose Tray 1 5. Control Panel 6. Exit cover release
4 11 3 12 2 1
7. Front cover release 8. Exit cover 9. Ink loader/top cover 10.Legal/A4 output tray extension 11.Interface cover 12.Side door
s8500-004
Right Side View with Printer Interfaces

1. Maintenance kit
4 5 6 7 8
2. Waste tray 3. Power cord connection 4. Power switch 5. Parallel port connection (8400 series only) 6. USB connection 7. Configuration card 8. Ethernet 10/100 Base-T connection
s8500-005
General Information
1-7
Rear View
The rear view consists of the printers main electronics and power supply, which are enclosed in a metal case called the Electronics Module. The rear panel allows access to the Electronics module, RAM, and NVRAM chips. The printers hard drive is also mounted on the rear panel. When installing a new electronic module in the printer, the following components need to be transferred from the old board.
2
1
3 1
s8500-006
1. Hard drive (optional)
3. Configuration card (Installed from the side under the interface cover.) 4. NVRAM (configuration card handles NVRAM differences between 8400 and 8500 series).
2. Memory (RAM) DIMM 1 and DIMM 2
1-8
Routine Maintenance Items and Consumables
3
1 2 3 4
1
s8500-007
Routine Maintenance Items

1. Maintenance kit 2. Waste tray
Consumable
3. Ink
Routine Maintenance: Extended Capacity Maintenance Kit (8400 and 8550 only) Startup Maintenance Kit 30,000 cycles (0-20% coverage) 20,000-30,000 (20-100% coverage) (8500/8550) 10,000 cycles for black and white, 5500 cycles for color. (8400) 10,000 cycles regardless of colors used. Empty every 7 purges.
Consumable: Ink (8400) 1140 prints per stick* (8500/8550) 1080 prints per stick*
Waste Tray
*Consumable capacity is based on 5% coverage per color on plain A4 paper.
General Information
1-9
Printer Specifications
Physical Dimensions and Clearances
Print Engine Only Width: Depth: Height: Weight: Optional 525-Sheet Feeder Width: Depth: Height: Weight: Minimum Clearances Left side and rear - 102 mm (4 in.) Right side - 394 mm (15.5 in.) Front - Unrestricted Top - 559 mm (22 in.) printer only Bottom - No obstruction between mounting surface and printer Min. install width - 711 mm (28 in.) Value 422 mm (16.6 in.) 514 mm (20.24 in.) 368 mm (14.48 in.) 26.8 kg (59 lb.) Value 422 mm (16.6 in.) 514 mm (20.24 in.) 132 mm (5.2 in.) 5.4 kg (12 lb.) Supplemental Information Required for airflow. Required for maintenance kit and waste tray access, and airflow. Required for media tray and jam access. Required for inkload and jam access. Required for airflow. Requires placing printer at an angle to remove waste tray.
A. Absolute Minimum
6.0 4.0 6.0 4.0 4.0
B. Recommended Minimum
15.5
24.0
28.0
35.5 Front
Note: All dimensions in inches
1-10
Functional Specifications
Characteristic
Printing Process Color Medium Solid-ink Yellow, cyan, magenta, and black ink sticks, each shape-coded. The printer uses the subtractive color system to produce the colors red, green, and blue. (8400) Fast Color (300x300 dpi), Standard (300x450 dpi), Enhanced (563x400 dpi), High Resolution/Photo (525x2400) (8500/8550) Fast Color (225 x 400 dpi), Standard (300x450 dpi), Enhanced (525 x 400 dpi), High Resolution/Photo (525x2400) 24 ppm (8400 and 8500 series) 30 ppm (8550 series) As low as 6 seconds 12 minutes (8400), 15 minutes (8500/8550) 4 minutes
Specification
Operating Modes and Resolutions
Maximum Operating Printing Speed First-Print-Out (in seconds, Letter/A4) Warm-Up Time: From Off (cold start) From Power Saver
Electrical Specifications
Characteristic Specification 115 Volt
Primary line voltages Primary line voltage frequency range Power consumption 90 - 140 VAC 47 - 63 Hz 1250 W (peak) - 1000 typical 180 W (idle) 230 W (average during printing) 43 W
230 Volt
180 - 264 VAC 47 - 63 Hz 1250 W (peak) 1000 typical 180 W (idle) 230 W (average during printing) 43 W
ENERGY STAR
Environmental Specifications
Nominal Operating Environment
Temperature Humidity 10 - 32 C (50 - 90 F) operating 20 - 25 C (68 - 77 F) Best jam performance 10% - 80% RH Non-Condensing operating
General Information
1-11
Media and Tray Specifications

Single-sided Only
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
Paper Size
Letter (8.5 x 11 in.) or A4 (210 x 297 mm)
Paper Type
Plain Paper or Letterhead Transparency Card Stock
Paper Weight/Media Type

60120 g/m2 (1632 lb. Bond) 121220 g/m2 (3259 lb. Bond) Phaser Professional Solid Ink Transparencies 100120 g/m2 (3744 lb. Cover) 121220 g/m2 (4480 lb. Cover)
l l l l
Labels Special
Phaser Color Printing Labels Phaser Professional Solid Ink Business Cards Phaser Professional Solid Ink High Resolution Photo Paper Phaser Premium Postcards Phaser Weatherproof Paper Phaser Trifold Brochures
Legal (8.5 x 14 in.) Executive (7.25 x 10.5 in.) or A5 (148 x 210 mm) Statement (5.5 x 8.5 in.) US Folio (8.5 x 13 in.) A6 (105 x 148 mm) B5 ISO (176 x 250 mm) B5 JIS (182 x 257 mm)
60120 g/m2 (1632 lb. Bond) 60120 g/m2 (1632 lb. Bond) 121220 g/m (3259 lb. Bond)
2
60120 g/m2 (1632 lb. Bond) 60120 g/m2 (1632 lb. Bond) 60120 g/m2 (1632 lb. Bond) 60120 g/m2 (1632 lb. Bond) 60120 g/m2 (1632 lb. Bond)
l l l l l
l l
1-12
2-Sided (Duplex)
Tray 1 Only
Any Tray
Paper Size
Index Cards (3 x 5 in.) Custom
Paper Type
Paper Weight/Media Type
l NOTE: Print custom size media from Tray 1 only. Maximum: 216 mm wide x 355 mm long (8.5 in. wide x 14 in. long) Minimum: 75 mm wide x 127 mm long (3 in. wide x 5 in. long) Minimum: 139.7 mm wide x 210 mm long (5.5 in. wide x 8.3 in. long) l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
l l
Envelopes
Any Tray
#10 Commercial (4.12 x 9.5 in.) DL (110 x 220 mm) C5 (162 x 229 mm) #5-1/2 (Baronial 4.375 x 5.75 in.) #6-3/4 (3.625 x 6.5 in.) Monarch (3.87 x 7.5 in.) Brochure (6 x 9 in.) A7 (5.25 x 7.25 in.) Choukei 3 Gou (120 x 235 mm) Choukei 4 Gou (90 x 205 mm)
l l l l l l l l l l
Tray 1 Only
NOTE: Some wrinkling and embossing may occur when printing envelopes. See Printing on the User Documentation CD-ROM for information on how to minimize these occurrences. NOTE: 2-sided printing can only be used for paper with widths greater than 5.5 in. (139.7 mm) and lengths greater than 8.3 in. (210.82 mm).
General Information
1-13
Single-sided Only
2-Sided (Duplex)
Tray 1 Only
Any Tray
Theory of Operation
In this chapter...

Main Printer Subsystems Print Process Printer Self-Maintenance Configuration Card Personality Parameters
Section
Main Printer Subsystems

Transfix System Drum Duplex Print Path Printhead Ink Loader
*Power Supply *Main Board *Hard Drive *Configuration Card *Power Control Board Paper Preheater (and Deskew) Drum Maintenance Kit Ink Waste Tray Wave Amp *Part of the Electronics Module
s8500-008
Paper/Media Tray
Wiper Assembly
Printer Subsystem Overview

The printer is made up of eight major subsystems, which are described in this section:

Process Drive Media Path Drive Ink Loader Printhead Drum Maintenance System Purge System Drum Assembly and Transfix Assembly Electronics Module
2-2
The Process Drive: is Transmits torque to two main camshaft assemblies. One camshaft assembly controls the transfix roller loading, and the other controls the drum maintenance system and printhead tilt system. The Media Path Drive: Controls each roller in the paper transport system. The paper transport system consists of a drive motor, a gearbox assembly and three solenoids. The media path drive motor also controls the movement of the wiper assembly and the headlock mechanism through a gear train and solenoid on the exit module. The Ink Loader: Melts the solid ink as ink is required by the printhead. The melted ink drops into the ink reservoirs of the printhead underneath the ink loader. The Printhead: Interfaces with the electronics of the printer to jet ink onto the drum surface to create an image. The print head includes 1236 interleaved jets (309 of each primary color) to provide the ability to electronically turn off a weak or missing jet to restore image quality. The Drum Maintenance System: Creates a thin intermediate liquid transfer surface, a layer of silicone oil, on the surface of the drum prior to printing. The oil keeps the ink from sticking to the drums surface and facilitates its transfer to the sheet of paper or transparency film. The Purge System: Uses air pressure and a wiper blade to remove any debris or air bubbles that may be obstructing the printhead nozzles. The Drum Assembly and Transfix System: Form the key portion of where imaging takes place. The image is first printed as a "mirror" image on the rotating drum. A sheet of warmed media feeds from the preheater and passes between the drum and the transfix roller. The process gear train then loads the transfix system and presses the paper to the drum to adhere the image as the drum spins in the transfix direction. The Electronics Subsystem: includes the Electronics Module (also known as the E-can); which contains the main board, the image processor board, the power control board, and the power supply board. Distributed in the print engine are: the Wave Amplifier board, Input/Output board, and Drum Heater Relay board.
Theory of Operation
2-3
Process Drive
The process drive is an open loop system that transmits torque to two main camshaft assemblies. One camshaft assembly controls the transfix roller loading, and the other controls the drum maintenance system and printhead tilt system. A small DC servomotor powers the process drive gearbox to rotate the gears to specific positions during the printing process. The process drive is able to actuate each camshaft system independently through the use of the swing arm in the gear train. The rotational direction of the motor controls the operation of the transfix and drum maintenance system. When the process motor rotates in one direction, the swing gear engages the lower gears. When the motor rotates in the opposite direction, the upper gears are engaged. Since the system is open loop, special attention to the home position of the process drive gears and the mating camshaft gears is critical. The process drive gearbox is mechanically keyed upon installation via gear orientations. These gear orientations allow the printer subsystems to self-home during operation. If either the gearbox or cam gears is out of home during installation, the printer does not function properly.
Process drive
Swing gear Imaging Transfix Transfix Camshaft
Process Motor Gear Process Motor Gear Drum Maintenance Camshaft Drum Maintenance
s8500-009
2-4
Media Path Drive

The media path drive gearbox and motor assembly controls each roller in the paper transport system. A gear train located behind the motor connects it to the exit rollers, which are built into the exit module. Gear trains located within the media path drive assembly, along with two clutches and a solenoid, allow the motor to control the pick, take away, duplex, and deskew rollers. A unique swing gear allows the pick roller and take away roller to rotate in the same direction regardless of the direction the motor is rotating.
Motor Media path drive
Swing gear
Duplex Roller
Deskew Roller
Takeaway Roller
Pick Roller
s8500-010
Theory of Operation
2-5
Ink Loader
The ink loader consists of four parallel channels with an ink melting element at the end of each channel. Coil springs exert pressure on four ink sticks to load one unique color in each channel. When the printhead requires ink, the melting element of the appropriate color melts the end of the ink stick. The melted ink drips into the ink reservoirs of the printhead underneath. Sensors in the ink loader alert the customer to install more ink sticks before the printer completely consumes the current sticks. If the ink level sensors inside the printhead detect that the printhead has run out of ink, but the ink low/out sensors are not activated, the Control Panel reports an Ink Jam error. The Phaser 8400 features a single Ink-Out sensor, which activates when there is no ink stick in any of the four ink channels. This condition activates the sensor flag. The 8500/8550 features an Ink-Out sensor in each ink stick channel. Each sensor determines if the individual channel is empty. The sensors also determine the count of the ink sticks as they pass by the Ink-Out sensor flag.
Ink Loader Door
Ink Stick
Ink Melt Units
Ink Low Sensor (1 Sensor for 8400) Ink Out Sensors (4 Sensors, One For Each Color For 8500/8550) Printhead
s8500-011
2-6
Printhead
The printhead is the heart of the printer, spanning nearly the length of the drum. Using its 1236 jet nozzles (309 jets for each primary color), with a horizontal motion of slightly less than 5 mm (0.2 inches), the printhead can print the entire image on the rotating drum. The printhead provides one size ink drop, which is used for all printquality modes.
Reservoir Drum
Printhead
Head Driver Board
Jet Stack
Purge Tube
s8500-012
Theory of Operation
2-7
Printhead Ink Loader Black Level Sense Probe Funnel Filter Purge Valve Ink Cyan Magenta Yellow
s8500-013
The printheads jet stack is fabricated from a stack of chemically etched steel plates which are brazed together to form the jet array. Channels formed by the stacked plates route ink past the 1236 individual, piezo-electric crystal-driven diaphragms, which force the ink in droplets out the 1236 corresponding nozzles. Looking at the printhead face, the nozzles are arranged in 12 rows, in color order KYKYKYCMCMCM, where K = black, Y = yellow, C = cyan, and M = magenta. During the printing process, the printhead would only have to travel approximately 14 pixels horizontally to provide complete coverage. However, the printhead travels much further, depending on print resolution, to interlace each jet with the output of neighboring jets. The jet array bonds to a cast aluminum ink reservoir, which supplies the molten ink to the jet array. Heaters in the reservoir and the jet array maintain the ink at a printing temperature of about 140 degrees centigrade.
2-8
X-Axis Hook X-Axis Shaft Tension Spring
Printhead X-Axis Shaft Nose Cone Gear X-Axis Motor
Drum
s8500-014
X-Axis or lateral movement of the printhead is accomplished using a stepper motor driving a fine-thread screw system. The printhead, mounted to the X-Axis shaft, moves laterally across the surface of the drum. To find the printhead home position, the X-Axis system drives the printhead in an open-loop. The printhead is driven against the left printer frame for a few seconds, and then reversed a set distance. A tension spring links to the printheads left shaft and provides a preloaded tension to allow the printhead to move smoothly.
Theory of Operation
2-9
Printhead Tilt
The printhead is able to rotate into four basic positions: 1. Printhead lock / ship position (19.5 degrees): The printhead restraint pins are resting against the right and left locks. In this position, the printhead tilt arm/ follower is free of the tilt cam, and the head is secured for shipping. 2. Wipe position (12 degrees): The printhead tilt arm/follower is engaged with the tilt cam, and the head overload spring contact is engaged with the overload spring-plate to provide the correct force for the wiper. 3. Standby position (20.9 degrees): Allows the wiper to clear the printhead in order to be in the start wipe printhead position, and also allow the printhead locks to pivot and lock or unlock the printhead. In this position, the printhead tilt arm/ follower is engaged at the standby position of the tilt cam. 4. Print position (0 degrees): The printhead is forward and resting against the right and left head-to-drum buttons. The head-to-drum buttons define the space between the jet stack and the drum. The tilt cam tilts the head into the basic four positions listed above. The cam has five special features and associated functions: 1. The cam is combined with a missing tooth gear that allows the cam to be inactive in the print position, which frees the process drive to perform other printer operations. 2. The cam has a latching feature to unlatch and latch the missing tooth gear to engage the printhead tilt drive train. 3. The cam profile has a standby dwell (the portion of the cam that has a constant radius), that holds the printhead back in the standby position. 4. The cam profile has a wipe dwell the holds the printhead back in the wipe position. 5. The cam profile increases the power consumption at a specific phase of rotation. This allows the software to identify a power consumption footprint that alerts the printer to a fault when the head is locked in error. The printhead is tilted away from the drum and locked for shipping. The printhead is locked if the head lock indicator is above the level of the output tray. When the printhead is locked in the shipping position there are three key restraining elements: 1. The printhead is restrained from rotating from the shipping position by pins extending from both ends of the printhead into a pocket. These pockets are defined by dampening pads that limit motion to the lockarms that pivot into the lock position, limiting forward motion toward the drum. The wiper carriage holds the locks in the lock position, which are normally spring-loaded in the unlocked position. 2. The printhead is restrained at the X-Axis shafts by the right and left head restraints that limit motion at both ends of the printhead. 3. The printhead is limited to the nominal motion of 1.7 mm in the X-Axis (left / right side motion when the printhead is back and locked) by the right lock and the left home stop on the left side frame.
2-10
Printhead Restraint Drum
DM Cam Gear Printhead
Tilt Gear (Engaged)
Tilt Gear
s8500-015
In the print position (0 degrees), the printhead is forward and rests against the right and left head-to-drum buttons. The head-to-drum buttons define the space between the jet stack and the drum. When the process drive is activated, it drives the drum maintenance camshaft to engage the tilt gear train. The tilt cam tilts the printhead into the print position. The cam is combined with a missing tooth gear that allows the cam to be inactive in the print position, freeing the process drive to perform other printer operations. The cam has a latching mechanism to unlatch and latch the missing tooth gear to engage the printhead tilt drive train. The cams latching mechanism also holds the tilt gear in place. A leaf spring applies constant pressure to engage the gear when the latching mechanism is released. The arm of the latching mechanism is inside the frame; the rest is visible, outside the frame. Arrows located on the latching mechanism and on the frame indicate when the printhead is in print position. When the arrows on the latching mechanism and frame align, the printhead is in the print position and the tilt gear disengages from the process drive. Phaser 8500/8550 printers have a new solenoid that is actuated and deactuated when the tilt cam gear rotates to the respective engaged and disengaged positions.
Theory of Operation
2-11
The latching mechanism is actuated by a small movement of the wiper coupled with the head-tilt solenoid. The action of the solenoid ensures that the head-tilt gear engages the tilt drive gear. Through a follower gear, the compound gear drives the tilt cam gear clockwise. A cam follower, mounted on the lower end of the tilt arm, follows the rotating tilt cam gear and tilts the printhead. After one revolution of the tilt gear, the latching mechanism is pulled back into position by the return spring in the 8400, and by the tilt gear solenoid in the 8500/8550. As viewed from the left side of the printer, when the arrows do not align, the tilt gear is engaged.
Head Tilt Compond Gear
Tilt Gear Engaged
Tilt Drive Gear

s8500-133
To accommodate printhead maintenance, the printhead can be tilted back away from the drum. This creates room for the wiper to be moved into position in front of the printhead faceplate. The process drive drives the gears to the tilt compound gear train. The drum maintenance camshaft drives the gear train to tilt the printhead.
2-12
Drum Maintenance System

The drum maintenance system creates a thin intermediate liquid transfer surface, a layer of silicone oil, on the surface of the drum prior to printing. The oil keeps the ink from sticking to the drums surface and facilitates its transfer to the sheet of paper or transparency film. The oil is contained in porous foam rollers made from rolled paper/ fiber material. Prior to each print, the process motor drives a cam to raise the pivot plate, which raises the oil roller against the rotating drum. The same cam raises the compliant wiper blade to assure that the oil film is smooth and even across the drums surface. The process drive rotates in one direction. This rotates the drum maintenance camshaft and raises the drum maintenance system to the drum. The process drive then rotates in the opposite direction to lower the drum maintenance system. The blade removes oil and drains it back into the maintenance kit drawer through a felt filter. The oil roller can then reuse the oil. As the drum completes one rotation, the rotating cam lowers the oil roller and then lowers the blade. The drum has a floating deadband; the narrow section of the drum containing excess oil and other debris. The oil bar is left on the drum surface when the blade is removed from the drum. This oil bar location is controlled to keep it outside of the print area. An EEPROM chip, built-in to the maintenance kit, stores the number of oiling cycles performed by the drum maintenance system. The EEPROM stores the number of prints remaining to track consumable life. At printer startup, four oiling cycles are performed to condition the drum.
Drum Oil on Drum Blade
Drum Maintenance Camshaft
Maintenance Roller Drum Maintenance Pivot Plate

s8500-016
Theory of Operation
2-13
Purge System
Proper printhead operation is dependant on the correct operation of the Purge System. The purge system uses air pressure and a wiper blade to purge any debris or air bubbles that may be obstructing the printhead nozzles. The waste ink that is expelled during the purge is funneled into the waste tray. Following the purge, a wipe operation is performed on the faceplate using the wiper blade. After the wipe, a cleaning page is printed.
Wiper Blade
2.5 sec
Printhead
Purge Tube
Purge Pump
s8500-017
To perform a printhead maintenance cycle, the printhead is first tilted away from the drum, to allow the wiper assembly to pass by. The wiper blade is then raised in front of the printhead. Wiper movement is governed by the media path drive, by engaging a clutch on the exit shaft of the printer. The purge pump applies pressure to the ink reservoir for approximately 2.5 seconds. Valves in the reservoir seal when pressure is applied. The pressurization ejects a small amount of ink from the jets. Following the pressure purge, the printhead is tilted into the wiper assembly and the wipe cycle begins. The pump runs again with the solenoid for approximately 30 seconds, creating a neutral balance between pressure and ink. The wiper blade lowers and wipes excess ink from the jets into the ink waste tray. A proper purge will layer the length of the waste tray with a single layer of ink about 20 mm wide.
2-14
The level of the ink in the reservoir is kept at a constant level. If the pressure purge tubing is pinched, the printhead may not purge properly. In addition, because the purge tubing also acts as a vent to atmosphere when not purging, a more serious failure may occur if the ink overfills. Overfilling may trap air in the reservoir, which would prevent the melted ink from entering the reservoir. Warning When servicing the printer be careful of the purge system as it passes the printhead. If a damaged wiper blade of the purge system catches on the printhead, it could propel hot liquid ink upward into your face.
30 Sec Printhead
Purge Tube Solenoid Valve
Purge Pump (Open During Wiper Action)
Wiper Assembly
Printhead
Drum
Wiper
s8500-018
Theory of Operation
2-15
Drum Assembly And Transfix System

The drum assembly and transfix system form the key portion of the printer where imaging takes place. The drum assembly and transfix system are separate, yet interrelated. This section discusses the drum assembly. The next section provides more detail on the transfix system. In operation, the image to be printed on paper is first printed on the rapidly rotating drum. The paper preheater heats a sheet of paper or transparency film to prepare it for the image transfer process. The heated paper is then passed between the drum (now rotating much more slowly) and the transfix roller. The pressure between the drum and the transfix roller transfers the image to the sheet of paper. An encoder disk and sensor on the left end of the drum monitors the drums speed and position.
Paper Preheater
Pa pe r
Transfix Roller
Pa th
Drum Drum Heater

s8500-019
The drum heater heats the surface of the drum to about 60o C (140o F) for imaging. The drum heater does not rotate. The heater is inside the drum, and is controlled by the drum heater relay board. The drum heater consists of two resistive heater coils that operate in series for 220 V and in parallel for 110 V operation. The drum heater relay board controls the series/parallel operation. A temperature sensor in contact with the drum surface monitors the drum temperature. The main board interprets the sensors signal and turns on the drum heater and drum fan to heat the drum, or turns on the drum fan alone to cool the drum.
2-16
A closed-loop servomotor drives the drum assembly. Through a single reduction belt drive, the servomotor rotates the drum at a high speed for imaging and a constant low speed for image transfer to paper. The Y-Axis uses an active tension system to allow the pulley to float while the spring actively adjusts the tension. Note The drum rotates in different directions for each process.

Transfix CW Maintenance CCW Printing CCW
Single Reduction Belt Drive Pulley Drum Temperature Sensor CW Fan CCW
Air Direction Y-Axis Motor Tension Spring Y-Axis Encoder 8400 8500/8550
s8500-020
Warning Always keep your fingers away from the drum drive system; it uses a closed-loop servo drive system, which is inherently dangerous. Since the motor speeds up if it senses the drum drive system slowing down, fingers caught in the drum belts and gears can be severely injured.
Theory of Operation
2-17
Transfix System
The transfix roller applies pressure to the back side of the paper as it moves between the transfix roller and drum. This pressure transfers the image from the drum to the paper. A set of springs determines how much pressure the transfix roller applies in the load module against the drum. The pressure must be uniform across the length of the transfix roller to avoid paper wrinkles and light spots on the prints. After the transfix roller engages, the drum rotates to advance the paper during the transfix process. The drum continues to advance the paper until the transfix roller disengages. The action of the process drive lifts and lowers the transfix roller. The upper gears of the process drive move to rotate the transfix camshaft to bring the transfix roller into contact with the drum. The gears reverse to rotate the transfix roller back to its original position, except when printing from Tray 1 or on envelopes. The transfix load springs and double lever arms increase the force when the camshaft engages. Warning Never attempt to adjust or increase the transfix pressure on the springs.
s8500-021
2-18
Electronics Module
The electronics module includes the main board, the power control board, and the power supply. The electronics module is a Field Replaceable Unit (FRU) assembly.
Main Board
The main board performs the image processing functions. Communication ports on the board receive the print job image data and convert it to drive signals for the printhead. The main board also contains the mechanical process controller, which commands the function of the power control board. The main board sends signals through the power control board to the wave amp board, which amplifies the signal that drives the jets on the printhead. The main board supports Non-Volatile RAM (NVRAM), memory, the hard drive, input/output ports, and the configuration card. NVRAM: The NVRAM memory device, located on the main board, stores Control Panel defaults, network settings, calibration data, copy counts, usage profile data, and the printer serial number, which is also referred to as the Engine Tracking Number (ETN). When the electronics module is replaced, the NVRAM must be transferred to the main board in the replacement electronics module. Memory: For Phaser 8400 printers, the main board supports two PC 133 compatible SO-DIMM SDRAM memory modules (128 to 256 MB). Phaser 8500/8550 printers support SIMMs instead of DIMMs. Supported sizes are 128, 256, and 512 MB. Printers ship with a minimum of 128 MB and support a maximum of 1024 MB Hard Drive Support: A hard drive IDE cable plugs into the main board from the hard drive board. A separate power cable must plug into the power control board from the hard drive board to provide signals and power for the hard drive board. Input/Output Ports: In the Phaser 8400, the main board provides support for Ethernet (not supported on the B and BD printer configurations), Parallel, and USB 2.0 external I/O interfaces. For the 8500/8550, the main board provides support for Ethernet (all printer configurations), and USB 2.0 external I/O interfaces. The 8500/ 8550 configurations do not include parallel interfaces.
Configuration Card
The configuration card is a thumbnail-sized device that plugs into the side of the electronics module. This device stores printer information and interacts with the printer's NVRAM chip. The configuration card supports the transfer of printer model and network configuration information from a failed printer to a replacement printer. When replacing the electronics module, you must transfer the configuration card to the replacement electronics module. Information stored on the configuration card includes the feature value, ethernet address, and personality parameters. The card reads a combination of feature values and the printer hardware capabilities; this will determine the printer model configuration.You can migrate the configuration card from one printer to another to
Theory of Operation
2-19
transfer the printer configuration. Feature value and ethernet address are configured at the factory, and are read only. The feature value is fixed in the configuration card and does not change. Ethernet address is stored only on the configuration card and cannot be rewritten. The Ethernet address is not written to the NVRAM chip. Personality parameters are a subset of network configuration parameters, which are populated to the configuration card when the customer configures the printer. The personality parameters are copied (shadowed), from the main board's NVRAM chip to the configuration card during the normal operation of the printer. When the configuration card is inserted into a new printer, the personality parameters on the configuration card are written into the NVRAM chip of the new printer. When a printer is powered on, if it contains the configuration card of another printer, the personality parameters copy automatically to the NVRAM chip. When removing the configuration card for the Phaser 8400, the printer reboots as a B (non-networking) configuration. Refer to the Configuration Card Personality Parameters section at the end of this chapter for a detailed list of shadowed personality parameters.
Power Control Board

The power control board distributes drive voltages to operate the printers various motors, solenoids, and clutches. The power control board also provides the interface that returns information from the printer's sensors to the main board. The sensors track mechanical and thermal functions, such as the position and temperature of the printhead. The power control board also generates regulated +/- 12 V and 5 V from unregulated +/-15 V power.
Power Supply
There are no field adjustments necessary on the power supply. In general, the power supply has two main sections: the AC section and the DC section. In the AC section, power routes to 10 triacs. Under main board logic control, the triacs supply AC power to the 10 heaters in the printer. Two fuses provide current protection to the triacs. Fuse F2 and F3 protect the power supply from a shorted triac from a defective heater. If the F2 or F3 fuses blow, it is best to replace the electronics module (and, of course, the defective heater), rather than the fuse. With the fuse replaced but the triac shorted, AC power may be applied to the heater. However, each time the main board turns on a triac to activate a heater, it is turned on for only a fraction of a second. The main board must constantly readdress each heater it wants to control. If the print engine firmware should fail, the heaters would automatically shut off. Thermal fuses also protect the printer. A thermal fuse opens in the unlikely event of a runaway heater following a hardware failure. The drum and the paper preheater thermal fuses are located on the paper preheater. Additional thermal fuses are located on the printhead and on the ink melting elements.
2-20
The DC power supply generates + 3.3 V, +/- 15 V, and +/- 50 V. These voltages provide direct or regulated voltage values to various circuits in the printer. The power control board regulates +/- 15 V to +/- 12 and other voltages. The main board also has regulators providing + 5 V, + 2.5 V, and + 1.8 V. The power supply outputs + 3.3 V in ENERGY STAR mode. Fuse F1 provides protection for the switching power supply in the DC section. Warning Do not touch the power supply; AC line voltages are present. The power switch does not disconnect power from the printer. The power switch signals the supply and the printer logic to begin a shutdown sequence.
F3 F2 S1
AC Line Line Gnd Ref Neutral AC Neutral
D r u m H 8
P r e h t
I n k 4 H 1 3
I n k 3
I n k 2
I n k 1
r e s 2
r e s 1
js r
js I
H 9
H 1 2
H 1 1
H 1 0 H 4
AC Line
AC Neutral Serial Control Interface +3.3 V H13 H12 H11 H10 H9 H8 H4 H3 H2 H1
Low Switcher
H 3 H 2 H 1 Vcc
uProcessor
REG
+15 V -15 V +50 V -50 V
Vss
s8500-022
Theory of Operation
2-21
I/O Board
The I/O Board acts as the eyes, ears, and hands for the electronics module. All sensor and switch readings are input into the I/O Board. The I/O Board then translates these states into encoded information that it sends over a serial data bus (I/O Board data cable) to the electronics module. The electronic module has no direct connection to sensors, switches, or solenoids. In order to activate a clutch or solenoid, the electronic module sends a command to the I/O Board, which processes the command and activates the appropriate device.
Sensors
Sensors throughout all the major subsystems provide indicators of vital print operations. The following graphic identifies the location of the printers sensors.
Ink Out (x1 for 8400; x4 for 8500/8550) Ink Low Strip Sensor Exit Door Sensor Paper Exit Sensor Drum Temperature Sensor Drum Position Encoder
Preheater Sensor Front Door Sensor Deskew Sensor Tray Empty Sensor (Also in Trays 3 & 4) Pick Sensor (525-sheet Feeder)
Tray Paper Size Sensor Board
Tray Lift Sensor (Also in Trays 3 & 4)

s8500-023
2-22
Print Process
Once the printer processes an image and creates a printing bitmap, the print cycle begins. Sensors maintain correct operating temperatures for the printhead and drum. Sensors also monitor ink levels in the reservoirs. If necessary, the ink loader adds ink. At the ready state, the print process consists of the following steps:

Drum Preparation Printing Paper Pick Transfixing and Exiting Warning Keep your fingers away from the Y-Axis drum rotation drive system; the closed-loop servo drive system is inherently dangerous. Fingers caught in the belts and gears will result in serious injuries.
Theory of Operation
2-23
Drum Preparation
To prepare the drum, the drum maintenance system applies a thin coating of silicone to the surface of the drum. The process drive first rotates the drum maintenance camshaft. As the drum rotates, the cams on the ends of the camshaft push against followers on each side of the drum maintenance system, forcing the oil roller and blade against the drum. The saturated roller evenly distributes oil on the drum as it rotates.
Drum Oil on Drum Blade
Drum Maintenance Camshaft
Maintenance Roller Drum Maintenance Pivot Plate

s8500-016
Printing
To print, the drum begins to rotates at a speed dependent upon print resolution. As the drum reaches the correct speed, the jets begin to fire to deposit the image on the oiled portion of the drum. As the jets fire, the printhead moves from right to left to complete the image on the drum. When printing, the printer performs a six-jet interlace, in which each jet lays down a particular number of pixel columns, depending on the print resolution. Each jet lays down one pixel column for each drum rotation, which varies from eight to 16 rotations, depending on the print resolution. Interlacing averages out the variability between jets as it interlaces each jet with other jets. In some test prints, the printhead moves to the right and lays down 309 parallel bands of ink. Each band is composed of 15 pixel columns of dots from an individual jet. Jet substitution allows a better performing jet to be used in place of a missing or poorly performing neighboring jet. When the printer is in the jet substitution mode, the printhead makes a second, right to left movement to deposit the pixel columns of the substituted jets. See "Jet Substitution Mode" on page 6-10.
2-24
Paper Pick for Tray 1

To pick a sheet of paper, the Tray 1 solenoid is fired, and the drive gear rotates slightly to engage with the drive train. A bias force from the lift plate against a rotating cam causes the roller to rotate enough so the missing tooth gear engages the drive train. This allows the lift plate and paper stack to rotate against the pick roller. The pick roller then rotates to pick the paper. A separator pad assembly prevents multiple sheets from being picked by the pick roller. Key differences in the Tray 1 pick process include:

Optimized lift plate force to support heavier paper. 100-sheet capacity. Pick roller to create the buckle for the deskew process. Pick roller drive to disengage when the door is opened and closed. Pivoting separator pad to prevent it from binding.
Drive Gear
Cam Pick Roller
Spring Loaded Lift Plate
Separator Pad
s8500-024
Theory of Operation
2-25
Paper Pick for Trays 2 - 4

Note Trays 3 and 4 are 525-Sheet Feeders. For Trays 2 through 4, the paper pick process is different than the pick process used by Tray 1. To pick a sheet of paper, the media path drive starts, and the pick clutch engages, which turns the pick roller and the nudger roller. The nudge roller advances one sheet of paper forward into the pick nip. The retard roller prevents two sheets from advancing. The sheet of paper continues past the take away rollers until the sheet completes the deskew process. When using the optional 525-sheet feeder, paper is pre-picked from the tray and staged in the paper path while the printer is printing previous pages. The deskew process uses a reverse/buckle deskew for all three paper paths. The paper is driven against the non-rotating rollers, which are reversing during simplex, causing a buckle in the paper ensuring the leading edge is straighten to prevent skewing. The deskew rollers do not reverse during duplex printing.
Strip Sensor
Exit Sensor
Preheat Exit Sensor
Deskew Roller
Deskew Sensor Pick Roller Nudger Roller
Retard Roller
s8500-025
2-26
Transfixing and Exiting

Transfixing and exiting consists of four major functions: 1. Staging the paper for rendezvous with the image on the drum and transfix roller nip. 2. Loading the transfix roller and engaging the drum stripper blade assembly. 3. Stripping the paper from the drum. 4. Exiting the paper from the printer, or exiting the paper for (2-sided) duplex printing. Tripping the preheat exit sensor (see previous illustration) sets up a series of events, which take place on a predetermined schedule. Paper is transported through the preheater to thermally prepare it for transfixing. The preheat sensor detects the papers presence, and accurately references the leading edge of the paper with the image on the drum. Based on the timing information from the paper preheater, the leading edge of the media is advanced to the transfix nip. Once the paper is stopped in the transfix nip, the process motor gears move to rotate the transfix camshaft to bring the transfix roller into contact with the drum (see illustrations on following pages). The transfix roller nip applies the load necessary to transfer the image to the paper from the drum. At the point where the transfix roller loads, but before the drum begins to rotate, the paper stripper solenoid engages. The paper stripper solenoid energizes the paper stripper. The solenoid mounts on the upper inner duplex guide and activates the strip solenoid lever, which in turn rotates the stripper carriage until it hits the transfix ground pins. This action causes the stripper blade to drop onto the deadband of the drum. After the transfix roller and the stripper engage, the drum rotates to advance the paper and transfix the image. The stripper blade catches the leading edge of the sheet of paper and separates it from the drum. After the leading edge of the paper is beyond the stripper blade, the stripper solenoid de-energizes. When the solenoid is de-energized, the solenoid return spring provides a force to move the solenoid plunger out of the solenoid coil which rotates the stripper carriage back to its ready position. Once the entire image is transferred, the drum stops rotating and the process drive lifts the transfix roller. The media path drive now rotates the exit rollers in the correct direction to pull the paper out. However, the deskew clutch is de energized so the deskew rollers are not driven during transfix. The exit rollers deposit the paper into the output tray, ending the print cycle.
Theory of Operation
2-27
Transfer Roller Transfix Load Arm Transfix Load Module
Transfix Load Spring
Transfix Cam Drum Process Drive Transfix Cam Transfix Roller Gear Swing Arm Gear
s8500-026
2-28
Release Blade
Strip Solenoid
Transfix Roller Preheat Sensor
Exit Sensor
Strip Sensor
Paper Preheater
s8500-027
Theory of Operation
2-29
Duplex Printing
When duplex printing, the exit rollers pull the paper to a predetermined location, such that the trailing edge of the paper is adjacent to the exit rollers. Then, the exit rollers pull the paper back into the duplex path. The paper deskews against a non-rotating deskew nip. From this point on, the print is processed through the paper preheater and transfix system to the exit tray in the same manner as a single-sided print. Phaser 8500/8550 printers include a preheater lift solenoid that increases the physical spacing between the preheater plates when printing the second side of duplex prints. The increased spacing prevents the paper from rubbing as hard against the plates, which can cause smearing to occur. Since the Phaser 8500/8550 preheater operates at a higher temperature than the Phaser 8400, the solenoid is not needed on Phaser 8400 printers.
Exit Sensor Strip Sensor Preheat Sensor
Duplex Roller
Deskew Sensor Exit Roller
Preheater Lift Solenoid (Phaser 8500/8550 Only) Duplex Roller
s8500-028
2-30
Transfix and Print Speeds

Transfix Speeds
Characteristic
Fast Color
Setpoint, Paper Media

Standard Enhanced High Res/ Photo 7 ips (8400) 10 ips (8500) 5 ips (8400) 10 ips (8500) 7 ips
Peak Transfix Speed, Simplex tray feed Peak Transfix Speed, Duplex Peak Transfix Speed, Legal Peak Transfix Speed, Tray 1 First Sheet Transfix Speed
20 ips (8400) 25 ips (8500) 5 ips (8400) 10 ips (8500) 20 ips
17 ips (8400) 25 ips (8500) 5 ips (8400 10 ips (8500) 17 ips
13 ips (8400) 20 ips (8500) 5 ips (8400 10 ips (8500) 13 ips
13 ips
7 ips
7 ips
7 ips
7 ips
7 ips
7 ips
7 ips
Setpoint, OHP Media

Peak Transfix Speed 5 ips
Approximate Print Speeds (8400 Series)

Tray (Source) / Resolution Tray 1
Fast Color (300x300 dpi) Standard (300x450 dpi) Enhanced (563x400 dpi) High Res/Photo (525 x 2400) PCL 600 x 300 Mode PCL 600 x 600 Mode 10 pages per minute (ppm) 9 ppm 8 ppm 6 ppm 10 sides per minute (spm) 9 spm 4 spm 3 spm
Simplex, A4 Paper
Auto Duplex, A4 Paper
6.5 ppm 3 ppm
Tray 2 - 4
Fast Color (300 x 300 dpi) Standard (300 x 450 dpi) Enhanced (563 x 400 dpi) 24 ppm 18 ppm 12 ppm 15 spm 13 spm 11 spm
Theory of Operation
2-31
Approximate Print Speeds (8400 Series) (Continued)

Tray (Source) / Resolution
High Res/Photo (525x2400) PCL 600 x 300 Mode PCL 600 x 600 Mode
Simplex, A4 Paper
7 ppm 13 ppm 6 ppm

7 spm
Approximate Print Speeds (8500/8550 Series)

Tray (Source) / Resolution Tray 1
Fast Color (225 x 400 dpi) Standard (300 x 450 dpi) Enhanced (525 x 450 dpi) High Res/Photo (525 x 2400 dpi) PCL 600 x 300 Mode PCL 600 x 600 Mode 12 pages per minute (ppm) 9 ppm 6 ppm 3.5 ppm 8.5 sides per minute (spm) 7 spm 5 spm 3 spm
Simplex, A4 Paper
6.5 ppm 3 ppm
Trays 2 - 4
Fast Color (225 x 300 dpi) Standard (300 x 450 dpi) Enhanced (525 x 450 dpi) High Res/Photo (525 x 2400 dpi) PCL 600 x 300 Mode PCL 600 x 600 Mode 30 ppm 24 ppm 16 ppm 10 ppm 17 spm 14 spm 10 spm 6 spm
16 ppm 8ppm
2-32
Printer Self-Maintenance
To maintain peak operation, reliability, and print quality, the printer has several automatic or semi-automatic maintenance functions. These functions may be started automatically after a certain number of prints or during printer startup, or they may be started by the customer if a print-quality defect is noted.

Printhead Maintenance Cycle (Eliminate Light Stripes) Paper Preheater Cleaning (Remove Print Smears) Transfix Roller Oiling Drum Cleaning (Chase Page)
Printhead Maintenance Cycle (Eliminate Light Stripes)

The printhead maintenance cleaning cycle removes bubbles or foreign matter that cause a printhead jet to malfunction. Three basic actions take place during a cleaning cycle:

Purging Wiping Printing the Cleaning Page
There is one basic type of cleaning cycle performed by the purge system. The first customer purge and the manufacturing purge consist of two basic cleaning cycles performed sequentially. A cleaning cycle is performed when the printer is first powered on, if the ink reservoir has cooled to the point that a cleaning cycle is triggered. A cleaning cycle is not performed when the printer is coming out of standby mode. Refer to the purge system topic in this chapter for more detail on the printhead maintenance cycle. Warning When servicing the printer be careful of the purge system as it passes the printhead. If a damaged wiper blade of the purge system catches on the printhead, it could propel hot liquid ink upward into your face.
Theory of Operation
2-33
Paper Preheater Cleaning (Remove Print Smears)

This customer-initiated cleaning procedure is selected by choosing Remove Print Smears on the Control Panels Print Quality Problems menu. This procedure cleans ink out of the paper preheater that may have been deposited there. Heavierweight, high-grade quality paper works best for this procedure. Ink can also be deposited if a jammed print, with ink on it, was pulled backwards through the paper preheater. In the paper preheater cleaning cycle, these events take place: 1. The customer selects the Remove Print Smears menu item. 2. The printer overheats the paper preheater to about 110o C, softening ink trapped inside the paper preheater. Ordinarily the paper preheater runs at temperatures of between 60o C and 70o C for paper or transparency film printing. 3. The printer picks and passes approximately 12-24 sheets of paper through the print path. The first few sheets absorb and remove ink from the paper preheater. The printer continues to pass sheets of paper though to cool the preheater until normal operating temperature is reached. If duplex capability is enabled, 5 sheets of paper go through the simplex paper path and up to 20 sheets go through the duplex paper path. 4. The printer returns to the Print Quality Problems menu. Because of the higher paper temperatures involved, this function can also be used to clean the drum surface of ink deposits caused by a contaminated blade on the drum maintenance system.
Transfix Roller Oiling

Oiling the transfix roller prevents ink from sticking to it. Every 50 prints, the printer performs a transfix roller oiling cycle. During this cycle, oil is applied to the drum as it would be during a print cycle. The transfix roller then lowers against the drum and the drum rotates, transferring some of the oil to the transfix roller. Finally, the transfix roller raises to its standby position.
Drum Cleaning - Chase Page

The printer performs a drum cleaning with a chase page automatically anytime a paper jam occurs. The chase page transfers any image, which may not be complete, off the drum. The printer then attempts to reprint the print that jammed. The chase page is processed the same as a regular print, except that the drum is not oiled and no image is printed on the drum (since an image is already printed on the drum).
2-34
Configuration Card Personality Parameters

Configuration Card Shadowed Personality Parameters
NCL Subject
N/A version not NCL parameter NEST NEST NEST NEST IP IP IP IP IP IP IP IP IP IP IP IP DNS RESOLVER DNS RESOLVER DNS RESOLVER NBNS (WINS) NBNS (WINS) NBNS (WINS) NBNS (WINS) Ethernet HTTP
NCL Item
version (of the layout of personality parameters) Base Printer Name SysAdmin Contact Printer Location Asset Identifier Host Name Domain Name Network Mask IP Address Default Gateway BOOTP/DHCP DDNS SMTP Server IP Source TCP/IP AutoIP DHCP Vendor Class ID Primary Name Server IP Address Secondary Name Server IP Address MulticastDNS Enable WINS Note Type Primary WINS Server Secondary WINS Server Speed On
Size (bytes)
4
48 128 (truncated from 256) 128 (truncated from 256) 128 (truncated from 256) 64 256 4 4 4 1 1 256 1 1 1 48 4 4 1 1 1 4 4 1 1
Theory of Operation
2-35
Configuration Card Shadowed Personality Parameters (Continued)

NCL Subject
HTTP HTTP HTTP HTTP HTTP HTTP HTTP HTTP HTTP Notify IPP IPP IPP FTP Security AppSocket AppSocket LPR LPR FTP FTP IPP IPP MIME MIME EtherTalk EtherTalk PSERVER
NCL Item
Information Forwarding SMTP Server Automatic Legal Settings Admin_Password Admin_Username KeyUser_Password KeyUser_Username Admin_HostAccessList KeyUser_HostAccessList On Authentication Scheme IPP user name IPP password Login Password Print Hosts On Enabled On Enabled On Enabled On Enabled On Enabled On Enabled On
Size (bytes)
1 1 1 11 11 11 11 256 256 1 1 11 11 33 256 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2-36
Configuration Card Shadowed Personality Parameters (Continued)

NCL Subject
PSERVER PSERVER_IPX
NCL Item
Enabled Enabled
Size (bytes)
1 1
Notes: 1. Parallel and USB, On and Enabled parameters have not been identified as personality parameters. They are not tied to networking. 2. NCL = Nest Configuration Library
Theory of Operation
2-37
Error Messages and Codes

In this chapter...

Introduction Power-Up Error Messages and LED Codes BIST Error Reporting POST Error Reporting PEST Error Reporting Fault Code Error Message Troubleshooting Jam Codes
Section
Introduction
This section covers troubleshooting procedures utilizing Control Panel error messages and codes. Some procedures require running service diagnostic test functions to verify that a specific printer component is operating correctly. For information on Service Diagnostics and all internal printer test functions see"Service Diagnostics Mode Menu" on page 4-5. For troubleshooting printer problems not associate with, or displaying, an error code or message, such as startup or power on, media, paper path, print-quality or image problems, and electrical failures, see "General Troubleshooting" on page 4-1 or "Print-Quality Troubleshooting" on page 5-1. Check the main menu for current data and historical error data.

Status Page Usage Profile Fault History Diagnostic History
3-2
Power-Up Error Messages and LED Codes

The printer has three sets of tests that are run when first powered on:

Built-In Self Tests (BIST) Power On Self Tests (POST) Print Engine Self Tests (PEST)
Note BIST and POST errors are not stored in the fault history logs.
BIST Error Reporting

BIST verifies basic electronics module CPU operation and reports failures by utilizing the rear interface panel PS and PE LEDs. These tests occur immediately at power-up, before POST tests are run or the Control Panel is initialized. The following table defines the blink patterns associated with a failure. BIST Error Reporting Blink Pattern Definition Table
PE LED
Off or 1 Blink, and then off
PS LED
Off or 1 Blink, and then off
Description
The power supply could not remain regulated when DC power was applied so it was shut down. Follow the troubleshooting procedures for electrical shorts (see Miscellaneous Electrical Troubleshooting on page 65) and check the power supply fuses. Initialization failure. The printer is held in reset mode. This can be caused by an electronics module fault or a +3.3 V power supply regulation failure (see "Miscellaneous Electrical Troubleshooting" on page 4-65). See also, "Verifying Power Supply Operation" on page 4-75. Boot loader memory test failure. Ensure the printers RAM chips are properly seated and that the correct RAM type for this printer is installed. CPU bridge and/or PCI bus is not communicating. Reboot the printer, if the error still occurs, replace the electronics module. ROM not responding. Reboot the printer, if the error still occurs, replace the electronics module.
On Solid (dimly)
On Solid (dimly)
Off
PS and Control Panel 1/2 sec. blink Rapid blinking Rapid blinking
1 2
Service Manual
3-3
BIST Error Reporting Blink Pattern Definition Table (Continued)

PE LED
3
PS LED
Rapid blinking
Description
Printer hangs during code initialization. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Unplug all cables from the electronics module. Plug in the power cable. Power on the electronics module (system). If the problem still occurs, reseat the RAM DIMMs. Replace the electronics module. For disassembly, see "Electronics Module" on page 8-55. For replacement, go to the Parts List on page 9-3.
POST Error Reporting

POST checks the communication paths within the electronics module and to other various printer components. POST testing initializes the Control Panel, and in most cases if an error occurs, a text message is displayed on the Control Panel along with an LED blink code flashing on all three LEDs (Control Panel LED, PS LED and PE LED). If initialization of the Control Panel fails, POST errors will still report using the LED blink patterns. The sum of the flashes equal the error code. If the code has more than 5 flashes, there is a brief pause between each set of 5 flashes to make them easier to count. After all flashes occur within the code, there is a long pause and then the flash pattern repeats. Soft POST errors, that do not prevent the printer from powering up completely, are displayed on the Control Panel for 5 seconds, and then the printer continues through the remainder of POST. There are no rear panel LED codes associated with soft errors. Most soft errors will cause the printer to print a Startup Page with the error message on it. Note Before replacing the electronics module for any POST errors, do the following: 1. Unplug all wiring and/or cables to the electronics module. 2. Plug in the AC power cable and power on the printer electronics module. 3. If the error blink pattern is now different from the original error reported before Step 1, the problem may not be in the electronics module, (see "Miscellaneous Electrical Troubleshooting" on page 4-65).
3-4
POST Error Reporting Blink Pattern Definition Table

8400 Control Panel Error Code
01.01 02.01 02.02 03.01 03.02 03.03 03.04 04.01
PS, PE and Control Panel LEDs (for 8400)

Flutter then 01 blinks Flutter then 02 blinks Flutter then 02 blinks Flutter only Flutter then 03 blinks Flutter only. Flutter then 03 blinks Flutter and then 04 blinks Flutter and then 04 blinks Flutter and then 04 blinks Flutter and then 04 blinks Flutter and then 05 blinks Flutter only N/A
POST Error Type

Hard Hard Hard Soft Hard Soft Hard Hard
Description
Bad error code. Failed machine check. Printer panic. ID read failure. Mismatch. Version mismatch. Access failure. ID read failure.
8500/ 8550 Control Panel Error Code

21.1 19.1 19.2 31.1 31.2 31.3 31.4 23.1
04.02
Hard
ID mismatch.
23.2
04.03
Hard
TMVL mismatch, write/read failed.
23.3
04.04
Hard
TMVH mismatch, write/read failed.
23.4
05.01
Hard
Communications error. PLD I/O Board serial, link down/bad parity. Communications error. PLD I/O Board serial, mismatch. IDE drive general failure. Reseat IDE cable and power cable. If problem persists, replace the IDE drive. The printer will work without the IDE drive. Control Panel link is invalid or bad parity. Control Panel version mismatch.
32.1
05.02 6.08
Soft Soft
32.2 6.808
07.01 07.02
Flutter only Flutter only
Soft Soft
16.1 16.2
Service Manual
3-5
POST Error Reporting Blink Pattern Definition Table (Continued)

08.01 09.01 10.01

Flutter only Flutter only Flutter and then 10 blinks Flutter only Flutter and then 11 blinks Flutter and then 11 blinks Flutter and then 11 blinks Flutter and then 11 blinks Flutter only
POST Error Type

Soft Soft Hard
Description
Control Panel failed to initialize, POST soft error. Control Panel data path failure, bad data returned. PLD power control link down.

16.3 16.4 33.1
10.02 11.01
Soft Hard
PLD power control link invalid, mismatch error. EEPROM read failure. 1. 2. Check EEPROM orientation. Replace EEPROM.
33.2 12.1
11.02
Hard
EEPROM write failure. 1. 2. Check EEPROM orientation. Replace EEPROM.
12.2
11.03
Hard
EEPROM re-read failure. 1. 2. Check EEPROM orientation. Replace EEPROM.
12.3
11.04
Hard
EEPROM data failure, mismatch error. 1. 2. Check EEPROM orientation. Replace EEPROM.
12.4
12.xx
Soft
Configuration card test failure. 1. 2. Check card orientation. Reseat then replace the configuration card.
NOTE: Printer will work as a base model (without networking) without the configuration card (8400 only). 13.01 Flutter and then 13 blinks Flutter and then 13 blinks Flutter and then 14 blinks Hard PHY reset failure, reset stuck low. 2.1
13.02
Hard
PHY ID error, mismatch error.
2.2
14.xx
Hard
USB ASIC test errors, N2280 netchip read, write, and mismatch errors, POST hard errors.
19.1
3-6

15.01

Flutter and then 15 blinks Flutter and then 15 blinks Flutter and then 15 blinks Flutter and then 15 blinks Flutter and then 15 blinks Flutter and then 15 blinks Flutter and then 15 blinks Flutter and then 15 blinks Flutter and then 15 blinks Flutter and then 15 blinks Flutter and then 15 blinks Flutter only Flutter only Flutter only
POST Error Type

Hard
Description
CPU interrupt error, spurious CPU interrupts. CPU interrupt error, missing CPU interrupts. CPU interrupt error, IRQ spurious assertion. CPU interrupt error, timer no assertion.

19.3
15.02
Hard
19.4
15.03
Hard
19.5
15.04
Hard
19.6
15.05
Hard
CPU interrupt error, spurious assertion.
19.7
15.06
Hard
CPU interrupt error, no assertion.
19.8
15.07
Hard
19.11
15.08
Hard
19.12
15.09
Hard
19.13
15.10
Hard
15.11
Hard
CPU interrupt error, IRQ spurious assertion. Real time clock read failure. Real-time clock write failure. Real-time clock re-read failure. 11.1 11.2 11.3
16.01 16.02 16.03
Soft Soft Soft
Service Manual
3-7

16.04

Flutter only
POST Error Type

Soft Soft
Description
Real-time clock does not tick. Trickle charge failure Memory test, less than 128 MB of RAM detected. This is the minimum RAM required. Add more RAM. Reseat the RAM SODIMM(s), then replace the RAM SODIMM(s). IPCB ID read failure.

11.4 11.5 13.1
17.01
Flutter and then 17 blinks
Hard
18.01
Flutter and then 18 blinks Flutter and then 18 blinks Flutter and then 18 blinks Flutter only Flutter and then 19 blinks
Hard
18.02
Hard
IPCB ID mismatch.
18.03
Hard
IPCB PCI configuration failure.
18.04 19.01
Soft Hard
IPCB version mismatch. Check and reseat cables. Replace hard drive, if necessary.
PEST Error Reporting

PEST tests occur after POST tests have been run and PostScript has been initialized. PEST checks the connections and operation of various printer components. Error codes for PEST tests are displayed on the Control Panel and are all in the 37,XXX.xx series. For troubleshooting PEST error codes, "37,0XX.xx Errors - PEST Faults" on page 3-41.
3-8
Fault Code Error Message Troubleshooting

Fault Code Error Reporting
Fault codes are saved to NVRAM and can be retrieved from the printers fault history. All procedures that ask for a test to be run are referencing tests from within the hidden service diagnostics menu. For more information on service diagnostics tests, their results, and how to enter into diagnostic mode, see "Service Diagnostics" on page 4-4. In normal customer mode, the printer will reboot each time an error occurs. If three of the same errors occur within 72 hours, or 1000 pages, the fault will be displayed on the printers Control Panel.
Interpreting Fault Codes

Failing system (XX,yyy.zz) Failing subsystem (xx,YYY.zz) Checksum (xx,yyy.zZ Type of problem (xx,yyy.Zx) Print engine copy count when the error occurred (xx,yyy.zz:123)
(xx,yyy.4x) Device faults are indicated by a 4 in the tenths place of the fault code. This indicates a hardware problem. The most common device faults troubleshooting procedures are documented in this section. (xx,yyy.6x) Program faults are indicated by a 6 in the tenths place of the fault code. Unfortunately, there are too many program faults to enumerate them all and most program faults will not mean anything unless you are intimately familiar with the code base. Some of the more common program faults are documented in this section. (xx,yyy.7z) CPU exceptions are indicated by a 7 in the tenths place of the fault code. The error code indicates both the PowerPC exception number and the region of firmware that was executing when the exception occurred: Engine, PostScript, Network, or Operating System. Note A CPU exception can either be caused by hardware or firmware error. Refer to the infoSMART Knowledge Base for descriptions of the most common faults.
Service Manual
3-9
1,000.4x Error - 525-Sheet Feeder Faults

1,001.46: The upper 525-sheet feeder had an overcurrent condition. The lift motor or clutch may be shorted. 1,002.47: The lower 525-sheet feeder had an overcurrent condition. The lift motor or clutch may be shorted. Troubleshooting Procedure for 525-Sheet Feeder
Step 1 Questions or Actions
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Unplug all connectors to the optional 525 sheet feeder. Remove the feeder and inspect the connector. Replace any damaged connectors either on the 525-sheet feeder or engine. Reseat and reconnect the 525-sheet feeder to the printer. Did this correct the problem? Inspect the pick rollers in the 525-sheet feeder tray(s). Are the pick rollers damaged, dirty, or not moving freely? Run the Tray [3]/[4] Pick Clutch test. Does the pick clutch operate correctly? Run the Tray [3]/[4] Lift Motor test. Does the lift motor operate correctly? Check the wiring from the 525-sheet feeder to the Electronics Module (J390). Is the wiring defective? Replace the wiring and go to Step 3. Go to Step 5. Go to Step 4. Replace the 525-sheet feeder. Replace the 525-sheet feeder. Replace the 525-sheet feeder. Replace the pick assembly. Go to Step 3.
Yes
Complete.
No
Go to Step 2.
1. 2.
1. 2.
1. 2.
1. 2.
1,0XX.6x Errors: 525-Sheet Feeder program faults a. Reseat the printer onto the 525-sheet feeder. b. Ensure ground integrity for the printer (see "Ensuring Ground Integrity" on page 4-77). c. Reset NVRAM. d. Replace the 525-sheet feeder.
3-10
2,0XX.4x Error - I/O Circuit Board Fault

2,001.47: The print engine cannot detect the presence of the I/O circuit board. Troubleshooting Procedure for I/O Board
Step 1 2 Questions or Actions
1. 1. 2. 3. Are all wiring connections to and from the I/O Board properly seated? Reseat the connections. Power on the printer. Did the error reoccur? Test the wiring from the I/O board J840 to the power control board J800. Replace the I/O Board.
Yes
Go to Step 3. Go to Step 3.
No
Go to Step 2. Complete.
1.
2,0XX.6x Errors - I/O Board Program Faults

2,001.69: The electronics module failed to initialize. 2,002.61: This fault code indicates a problem with the printer program. The engine firmware was unable to initialize the queues used for inter-task communication. 2,003.62: This fault code indicates a problem with the printer program. The engine firmware was unable to start the service diagnostics tasks. 2,004.63: Failure to start the print engine in suspend mode. 2,005.64: This fault code indicates a problem with the printer program. ROM could not be opened for reading (idiags). 2,006.65: This fault code indicates a problem with the printer program. ROM could not be loaded (idiags). 2,007.66: This fault code indicates a problem with the printer program (idiags) entry point cannot be found. a. Reset NVRAM and retest. b. Ensure ground integrity for the printer (see "Ensuring Ground Integrity" on page 4-77). c. Replace the EEPROM chip. d. Reboot the printer. 2,008.67: Configuration card is missing. 2,009.68: Configuration card is bad. 2,010.69: Configuration card is blank. 2,011.61: Configuration card is for the wrong product. 2,012.62: Configuration card is an invalid model. a. Turn off printer. b. Verify that configuration card is correct card for printer.
Service Manual
3-11
c. Insert or replace configuration card. d. Turn on printer. e. If problem continues, replace the electronics module.
3,0XX.6x - IPC Program Faults

There is a communication problem between the engine and PostScript regions. a. Reset NVRAM, and then retest. b. Replace the EEPROM chip.
3-12
4,0XX.4x Errors - Process Control System Fault

4,017.47: This fault code indicates a problem with the process control system. The ambient temperature is considered too cold to warm up the printer (less than 10o C). 4,018.48: This fault code indicates a problem with the process control system. The printhead temperature dropped below the head cleaning needed threshold. 4,020.41: This fault code indicates a problem with the process control system. Declared when the printer is booted in FTTR (Fast Time to Ready) mode and the head/wiper contact flag is set in NVRAM. The printer cannot run in FTTR mode with the head/wiper in contact because it would be unwise to separate the two when the printer is cold (could tear wiper.) Service requested that this be a device fault in order to alert the service person to this condition. 4,021.42: This fault code indicates a problem with the process control system. Declared when the printer is booted in FTTR mode and the drum is dirty. Cleaning the drum when very cold could increase the chance of gluing media to the drum surface around the stripper fingers. Service requested that this be a device fault in order to alert the service person to this condition. Troubleshooting Procedure for Process Control System
Step 1 Questions and Actions
1. Verify the temperature of the room where the printer is located (see "Environmental Specifications" on page 1-11). Is the room temperature too cold for proper operation of the sytem? Ensure the printer is acclimated to the room temperature. Did this correct the problem? Run the Monitor Heaters tests with all heaters ON. Are the heaters operating correctly and within specification? Inspect the wiring harness to the failed heater. Is the wiring harness damaged or not working properly? Replace the electronics module. Go to Step 3.
Yes
Complete.
No
Go to Step 2.
2. 3. 4.
1. 2.
1. 2.
Replace the wiring harness to the failed heater.
Replace the problem component.
Service Manual
3-13
4,024.42: This fault code indicates a problem with the wiper. The wiper is not aligned properly and engaged the headtilt while in the waste lock position. Troubleshooting Procedure for 4,024 Error Code
1. Ensure the process drive system is correctly homed as described in "Homing the Process Gear Drive Train" on page 6-8. Run the Check Wiper Alignment test. Did the test fail?
Yes
Is the problem fixed? Perform the Wiper Alignment Procedure and test again. Go to Step 3 if the test fails again. Go to Step 4.
No
Go to Step 2.
1. 2.
Go to Step 3.
3 4
1. 2. 1. 2.
Run the Wiper Drive test. Did the test fail? Inspect the wiper drive system and wiper lock system. Look for ink in the belts. Is the wipe system operating correctly? Inspect the head maintenance clutch. Is there the presence of oil or contamination?
Go to Step 6.
Go to Step 5.
Replace the problem component. Go to Step 6.
1. 2.
Clean the interior of the system and replace clutch if necessary. Replace in the following order: Exit module Media drive gearbox Wiper blade

1. 2.
Run the Head Maintenance Clutch test. Is the head maintenance clutch operating correctly?
Replace the head maintenance clutch.
4,025.46: This fault code indicates a problem with the process control system. Cannot successfully home the drum transfix mechanism. Troubleshooting Procedure for 4,025 Error Code
1. 2. 3. Check for obstructions around the printhead. Look for ink shards in gears of the tilt drive. If the printhead is obstructed, remove any obstruction from the system and reboot. Did this fix the problem? Ensure the wiring around the printhead is routed properly. Is the wiring blocking the printhead? Re-route all wiring to the printhead. Go to Step 3.
Yes
Complete.
No
Go to Step 2.
1. 2.
3-14
Troubleshooting Procedure for 4,025 Error Code (Continued)

1. 2. Remove the waste tray and printhead and look for ink build-up in the printer. Is there ink build-up anywhere in the printer?
Yes
Clean any ink or debris which may be restricting movement of the drive train or printhead. Replace the process gearbox.
No
Go to Step 4.
1. 2.
Check the process gearbox for damage. Ensure the gears are correctly aligned (see "Homing the Process Gear Drive Train" on page 6-8). Is the process gearbox damaged? Check the X-axis motor connector for damage. Run the X-axis Motor test to check the X-axis motor current. Did the test fail? Run the Tilt Drive test. Did the test fail?
Go to Step 5.
3.
1. 2. 3.
Replace the Xaxis motor.
Go to Step 6.
1. 2.
Replace the process gearbox.
4,0XX.6x Process Control Software Fault

a. Reset NVRAM and then retest. b. Ensure ground integrity for the printer (see "Ensuring Ground Integrity" on page 4-77). c. Replace the EEPROM chip. d. Reboot the printer.
Service Manual
3-15
5,0XX.4x Errors - Y-Axis Sub-System Fault

5,001.41: The drum turned one full revolution without seeing the drum home sensor activate. 5,002.42: The Y-Axis encoder is not working properly or the drum has stalled. 5,003.43: There is a general problem with the Y-Axis sub-system. 5,004.44: Y-Axis fault_general fail problem with drum motion sub-system. Troubleshooting Procedure for Y-Axis Sub-System
1. 2. From the service diagnostic Monitor Menu, run the Y-axis Encoder test. Did the test pass? Inspect the Y-axis motor connector. Is the wiring faulty? Inspect the encoder wiring harness. Is the wiring faulty? Run the Y-axis Drive test. Check the current values. Are the values within normal operating range? Run the Y-axis Belt Tension test. Check the current values. Are the values within the normal operating range? Run the Y-axis Motor test. Did the tests pass? Replace the drum assembly. Replace the Y-axis motor. Go to Step 6. Replace the Y-axis belt. Replace the wiring harness or Y-axis motor. Replace the defective wiring. Go to Step 5. Go to Step 4.
Yes
Go to Step 2.
No
Go to Step 3.
1. 2.
3 4
1. 2. 1. 2. 3.
Replace the drum assembly. Replace the Y-axis motor.
1. 2. 3.
1. 2.
5,0XX.6x Errors - Program Faults

5,001.63: There is a problem with the Y-Axis sub-system. 5,005.67: If not in the homeless or idle state, the system faults out. Software fault. 5,006.68: Software fault. 5,007.60: Software fault. 5,008.61: PostScript failed to fill the race buffer during imaging. Software fault.
3-16
5,009.62: There were errors during imaging. Possible jets on/off outside of the deadband area. Software fault. a. Reset NVRAM and retest. b. Ensure ground integrity for the printer (see "Ensuring Ground Integrity" on page 4-77). c. Replace the EEPROM chip. d. Reboot the printer.
Service Manual
3-17
6,0XX.4x Errors - X-Axis Fault

6,000.41: An X-axis motor current error occurred. Troubleshooting Procedure for X-Axis Motor
1. 2. 3. 4. Inspect the printhead power cable and heater wiring. Verify the printhead travels smoothly from left to right. Ensure the printhead does not bind due to ink spills. Is anything visibly restricting printhead movement? Clear the wiring or ink spill, which is restricting movement of the printhead. Did this correct the problem? Inspect the X-axis wiring harness. Is the wiring damaged or faulty? Use service diagnostics to test the X-axis drive. Did the test fail? Replace the defective wiring. Replace the Xaxis motor. Go to Step 4. Complete. Go to Step 3.
Yes
Go to Step 2.
No
Go to Step 3.
1. 2.
3 4
1. 2. 1. 2.
Replace the electronics module.

6,001.64: The X-axis task received an unexpected message. 6,002.65: Attempt to home the X-axis from a state where homing is not allowed. 6,008.62: Attempt to use the X-axis drive without initializing it. 6,011.65: Attempt to service the X-axis while not in the appropriate state. 6,013.67: Unknown X-axis program fault. 6,017.62: An attempt was made to drive the X-axis using the wrong server. 6,018.63: An attempt was made to move with the X-axis uninitialized. 6,019.64: An attempt was made to move the X-axis from a homeless state. 6,023.68: Could not allocate memory for X-axis home parameters. 6,025.66: An attempt was made to home with the X-axis uninitialized. 6,032.68: Could not find a solution to the described home motion profile. 6,033.60: Could not allocate memory for X-axis move parameters. a. Reset NVRAM, and then retest. b. Ensure ground integrity for the printer (see "Ensuring Ground Integrity" on page 4-77).
3-18
7,0XX.4x Errors - Process Motor Gearbox Faults

7,002.44: There is a problem with the process motor sub-system. The process motor stalled during operation. Troubleshooting Procedure for 7,002 Error Code
1. Verify the process drive system is properly homed, see "Homing the Process Gear Drive Train" on page 6-8. Did this resolve the problem? Use service diagnostics to run the Tilt Axis Drive test. Did the test fail? Check for and remove any obstructions in the process gearbox. Ensure the process drive gears are correctly aligned. Are the gears damaged? Use service diagnostics to run the Process Motor test. Did the test fail? Use service diagnostics to run the Transfix Drive Slow test. Did the test fail? Replace the process gearbox Verify the transfix cams are not damaged. Replace problem component. Go to Step 5. Replace the process gearbox. Go to Step 4. Go to Step 3. Go to Step 4.
Yes
Complete.
No
Go to Step 2.
2.
1. 2.
1. 2. 3.
1. 2.
1. 2.
7,006.xx: The head tilt solenoid is not activating the head tilt cam, or the head is not tilting properly. Troubleshooting Procedure for 7,006 Error Code
1. Ensure the process drive system is correctly homed as described in "Homing the Process Gear Drive Train" on page 6-8. Reboot the printer. Is the tilt-head activating the head tilt cam? Is ink blocking the head tilt cam? Is the tilt-head latch properly installed? Remove ink spills or reinstall the head-tilt and start over with Step 1. Go to Step 4.
Yes
Is the problem fixed? Go to Step 4.
No
Go to Step 2.
2 3
1. 2. 1. 2.
Go to Step 3.
Service Manual
3-19

1. Review instructions for 7,008.xx and 7,010.xx fault codes.
Yes
No
Follow recommended actions for error codes and reboot the printer.
7,007.49: The process motor stalled while tilting the head. Troubleshooting Procedure for 7,007 Error Code
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Check the printhead wiring for proper routing. Remove the printhead and inspect the printhead tilt and drive gears for ink spills. Re-route the wiring. Clean around the gears and printhead. Did this correct the problem? To ensure the gears are correctly aligned, homed, and free from damage, see "Homing the Process Gear Drive Train" on page 6-8. Did this correct the problem? Complete. Replace the process gearbox.
Yes
Complete.
No
Go to Step 2.
1.
2.
7,008.41: The head tilt is not engaged, or the printhead is stuck in the tilt position by the tilt arms. Troubleshooting Procedure for 7,008 Error Code
Step 1 2 Questions and Actions
1. 2. 1. 2. 3. Reboot the printer. Did this correct the problem? Inspect the printer for ink spills on the head tilt gear and the drive train. Clean and reboot the printer. Did this correct the problem? Ensure that the printhead moves properly left and right. Go to Step 4. Remove any obstructions or replace any defective parts. Go to Step 5. Complete. Go to Step 3.
Yes
Go to Step 2.
No
Complete.
1.
1.
Ensure the gears are correctly aligned and homed (see "Homing the Process Gear Drive Train" on page 6-8). Are the gears damaged? Check the process gearbox for obstructions or damaged. Remove any obstructions. Is the gearbox damaged?
2.
1. 2. 3.
Go to Step 6.
3-20

1. 2. Use service diagnostics to run the Tilt Axis Drive test. Did the test fail? Use service diagnostics to run the Head Maintenance Wiper Clutch test. Did the test fail? Perform the Wiper Alignment procedure (see "Wiper Alignment Procedure" on page 6-2). Did this correct the problem? Use service diagnostics to run the Wiper Drive Test. Did the test fail? Inspect the maintenance drive system and replace any defective parts. Complete.
Yes
Replace the process gearbox. Replace the wiper drive clutch. Complete.
No
Go to Step 7.
1. 2.
Go to Step 8.
1. 2.
Go to Step 9.
1. 2.
7,009.42: The printhead is tilted back but not properly restrained in the park arms. Troubleshooting Procedure for 7,009 Error Code
1. Ensure that the right and left printhead restraints work correctly and are not cracked or broken. Ensure that the wiper is aligned correctly (see "Wiper Alignment Procedure" on page 6-2). Check the printhead wiring for proper routing. Remove the printhead and clean around the printhead tilt gears. Did this correct the problem? Ensure the gears are correctly aligned and homed (see "Homing the Process Gear Drive Train" on page 6-8). Did this correct the problem? Replace the process gearbox. Did this correct the problem? Use service diagnostics to run the Head Maintenance Wiper Clutch test. Did the test fail? Replace the wiper drive clutch. Go to Step 7. Complete. Go to Step 6 Complete. Go to Step 5.
Yes
Complete.
No
Go to Step 2.
1.
Complete.
Go to Step 3.
1. 2. 3.
Complete.
Go to Step 4.
1.
2.
5 6
1. 2. 1. 2.
Service Manual
3-21

1. 2. Use service diagnostics to run the Wiper Drive test. Did the test fail?
Yes
Inspect the maintenance drive system, replace any defective parts.
No
Replace the exit module assembly.
7,010.43: The printhead is stuck in the tilted position, or is not able to tilt forward to the print position, due to problems. 7,011.44: This is a soft fault and will not halt the printer. 7,012.45: The drum transfix home sensor is still in a not homed position, after the return home motion has been completed. 7,014.47: The printhead is not locked in the head tilt restraint spring. 7,015.48: The head tilt restraint spring is out of place. Troubleshooting Procedure for 7,010 to 7,015 Error Code
1. 2. 1. Reboot the printer. Did this correct the problem? Do the printhead lock arms rotate correctly? Go to Step 3. Repair/replace the printhead restraints. Go to Step 5.
Yes
Complete.
No
Go to Step 2.
1.
Has ink spilled ink around the printhead that prevents the printhead from moving to its center position? You should be able to manually push the printhead right to left. Is the printhead stuck to the wiper blade?
Clean the printhead area.
1.
Start the printer in diagnostics mode and run idiags test Exercise Heater - toggle printhead heaters to soften the ink. Manual separate the wiper and printhead. Set them in their home positions. Go to step 6.
Go to Step 4.
1.
Does the X-axis motor drive the printhead to its center position (so it can tilt forward)?
Troubleshoot the X-axis drive.
3-22
Troubleshooting Procedure for 7,010 to 7,015 Error Code (Continued)

1. 2. 3. 4. Check the process gearbox for obstructions or damaged. Ensure the gears are correctly aligned and homed. Verify the process shaft and drive module shaft are at their home positions. Did this correct the problem? Has ink spilled on the head tilt gear on its drive train (near left side of the printhead)? Use service diagnostics to run the Head Maintenance Wiper Clutch test. Did the test fail? Ensure the wiper is properly aligned. Use service diagnostics to run the Wiper Drive Test. Did the test fail? Use service diagnostics to run the Load Maintenance Clutch test. Did the test fail? Inspect the maintenance drive system, replace any defective parts. Go to Step 12. Go to step 11. Clean the gears. Replace the wiper drive clutch. Replace the exit module assembly. Go to Step 8. Go to Step 9.
Yes
Complete.
No
Go to Step 7.
7 8
1. 1. 2.
1. 2. 3.
Go to Step 10.
10
1. 2.
11
1. 2.
Verify the headtilt gear will engage. You can manually set the headtilt gear. Is the gear engaged properly? Use service diagnostics to run the Tilt Axis Drive test. Did the test fail? Use service diagnostics to run the Process Motor test. Did the test fail?
Set the headtilt gear.
12
1. 2.
Replace the process gearbox. Replace the process motor.
Go to Step 13.
13
1. 2.

a. Reset NVRAM and retest. b. Ensure ground integrity for the printer (see "Ensuring Ground Integrity" on page 4-77).
Service Manual
3-23
8,0XX.xx Error - Wiper/Media Path Gearbox Faults

8,005.48: The media path motor gearbox stalled while moving the wiper to the home position. 8,006.49: The wiper cannot verify the home position. 8,007.41: The wiper stalled finding home. 8,008.42: The wiper stalled while trying to move away from the home position. 8,009.43: The media path motor stalled while moving without the clutch engaged. 8,015.49: The media path motor stalled while moving the cap/wipe to the park position. 8,025.41: The media path motor stalled while moving the cap/wipe from the park position. 8,035.42: The media path motor stalled while moving the cap/wipe UP. 8,045.43: The media path motor stalled while moving the cap/wipe DOWN. 8,055.44: The media path motor stalled while engaging headtilt. Troubleshooting Procedure for Wiper/Media Gearbox
For an 8,005.48 error: 1. Check for paper in the paper path that is adding drag to the rollers. Look for paper or wiring interfering with the take away roller. Remove the pick solenoid to view the meshing of the take away rollers gears to the paper path drive module. Did this correct the problem? Complete. Go to Step 4.
Yes
Complete.
No
Go to Step 4.
2.
3.
For an 8,007.41 error: 1. Check for a missing KL-clip securing the drum maintenance clutch. Replace if missing. Did this correct the problem?
2.
For an 8,009.43 error: 1. 2. 3. Ensure that there is no paper in the paper path adding drag to the rollers. Ensure the media paper drive is fully seated and correctly installed. Remove the pick solenoid to view the meshing of the take away rollers gears to the paper path drive module. Ensure the feed rollers are properly engaged in the drive gears. Did this correct the problem?
Complete.
Replace the media path drive assembly.
4. 5.
3-24
Troubleshooting Procedure for Wiper/Media Gearbox (Continued)

1. 2. 1. 2. Run the Wiper Drive test. Did the test pass? Run the Wiper Alignment test (see "Wiper Alignment Procedure" on page 6-2). Did the test pass? Inspect the wiper system for improper operation, obstructions, or damage (broken gear or belt). Look for ink in the wiper belt channels. Ensure the wiper system is properly aligned (see "Wiper Alignment Procedure" on page 6-2). Did this correct the problem? Run the Head Maintenance Clutch test. Did the test pass? Is the head lock mechanism on the right end of the exit module assembly is functioning properly? Are there obstructions or spilled ink on the wiper blade, the tilt gear drive path, or under the printhead? Is the waste tray overfilled? Go to Step 9. Go to Step 8. Replace the maintenance clutch. Replace the exit assembly. Complete. Go to Step 7. Go to Step 7. Go to Step 6.
Yes
Go to Step 5.
No
Go to Step 6.
1.
2.
3.
1. 2.
1.
1.
Clean the inside of the printer and retest.
2.

a. Reset NVRAM, and then retest. b. Ensure ground integrity for the printer (see "Ensuring Ground Integrity" on page 4-77).
Service Manual
3-25
9,0XX.xx Errors - Ink Loader Faults

9,000.44: These fault indicate a problem with the ink loader. 9,005.49: Ink loader fault. The cyan ink melt heater is on, but the ink does not appear to be dripping. 9,006.41: Ink loader fault. The magenta ink melt heater is on, but the ink does not appear to be dripping. 9,007.42: Ink loader fault. The yellow ink melt heater is on, but the ink does not appear to be dripping. 9,008.43: Ink loader fault. The black ink melt heater is on, but the ink does not appear to be dripping. 9,015.4x through 9, 018 (8500/8550 only): When a customer opens and closes the inkloader door to clear an ink jam, the following codes are recorded: 9,01x.41, where x= 5 for cyan, 6 for magenta, 7 for yellow, and 8 for black. 9,025.4x through 9, 028 (8500/8550 only): When a customer opens and closes the inkloader door for a second time to clear an ink jam, the following codes are recorded: 9,02x.41, where x= 5 for cyan, 6 for magenta, 7 for yellow, and 8 for black. 9,035.43 through 9, 038 (8500/8550 only): Fault codes associated when ink count flags are stuck after melting 2.5 ink sticks. The following codes are recorded: 9,03x.41, where x= 5 for cyan, 6 for magenta, 7 for yellow, and 8 for black. Troubleshooting Procedure for Ink Loader
1. Are the ink sticks all Xerox ink? Are they the correct ink sticks for the printer model?
Yes
Go to Step 2.
No
Advise customer. Run clear ISC Fault test to clear the error. The clear ISC fault menu item is located in the internal diagnostics function menu. This must be performed following an ink loader replacement.
3-26
Troubleshooting Procedure for Ink Loader (Continued)

1. Manually verify that the ink stick is able to advance in the ink loader chute. Check for broken or wrong type ink sticks.
Yes
Go to Step 3.
No
Remove any blockage and/ or replace the ink stick. Run clear ISC Fault test to clear the error. The clear ISC fault menu item is located in the internal diagnostics function menu. This must be performed following an ink loader replacement. Replace the ink loader assembly. Run clear ISC fault test to clear the error. The clear ISC Fault menu item is located in the internal diagnostics function menu. This must be performed following an ink loader replacement.
1.
Run the appropriate Ink Melt [1, 2, 3, 4] Heater test. 1 = Yellow 2 = Cyan 3 = Magenta 4 = Black
Replace the printhead.
2.
Did the test pass?
9,009.44 and 9,00X.6x

9,009.44: This fault code indicates a device failure attempting to access NVRAM. a. Reset NVRAM and retest. b. Ensure ground integrity for the printer (see "Ensuring Ground Integrity" on page 4-77).
11,0XX.xx Errors - Electronics Module Interface Fault

11,001.47: Upper 525-sheet feeder broken serial link detected. 11,002.48: Lower 525-sheet feeder broken serial link detected. 11,003.49: Control Panel broken serial link detected.
Service Manual
3-27
11,004.41: Control Panel or I/O board broken serial link detected. 11,005.42: Power control broken serial link detected. 11,006.43: Printhead broken serial link detected. 11,007.44: PCI error detected. 11,008.45: The DMA hardware is not responding. 11,009.46: Communication timeout failure detected. 11,010.47: Hardware version mismatch. 11,011.48: Software version mismatch. 11,012.49: The power control PLD does not match the expected version. 11,013.41: I/O PLD version mismatch. 11,014.42: Control Panel version mismatch. 11,015.43: Printhead PLD version mismatch. 11,016.44: Lower 525-sheet feeder PLD version mismatch. 11,017.45: Upper 525-sheet feeder PLD version mismatch. 11,018.46: Titan version mismatch. Troubleshooting Procedure for Electronic Module Interface
1. 2. 1. 2. 3. Ensure ground integrity for the printer. Did this resolve the error? Inspect and reseat all connectors. Inspect the gray cable between the I/O board and the electronics module. Ensure the cables are properly dressed in the wiring raceway as detailed in the wiring diagram section of this manual. Did this correct the problem? Reset NVRAM and retest. Did this resolve the problem? 11, 001.47 and 11,017.45 11,002.48 and 11, 016.44 11,003.49 and 11,0014.42 11,004.41 and 11,013.41 11,006.43 and 11,015.43 11,009.46 Replace tray lift motor or the electronics module. Replace lower tray assembly (or check wiring). Replace the I/O board. Replace the I/O board or the Control Panel. Replace the printhead. Replace the I/O board or the electronics module. Complete. Go to Step 4. Complete. Go to Step 3.
Yes
Complete.
No
Go to Step 2.
4.
1. 2.
3-28
Troubleshooting Procedure for Electronic Module Interface (Continued)

Step Questions and Actions
Yes
No
For all other 11,000.4x errors:
11,100.60 - Temperature Error

The root problem for this error is temperature sensitivity with the power supplys opto-isolator chips. Ensure room temperature is not too high. Ensure also that the electronics fan runs correctly. If OK, then replace the electronics module.
12,000.60 Errors - Program Faults

a. Reset NVRAM and retest. b. Ensure ground integrity for the printer (see "Ensuring Ground Integrity" on page 4-77).
13,0XX.xx Errors - Thermal Faults

13,000.48: Thermal fault. Troubleshooting Procedures for Error Code 13,000 (Printhead)
Step 1 2 3 Questions and Actions
1. 2. 1. 2. 1. 2. Ensure ground integrity for the printer. Did this correct the problem? Reset NVRAM and retest. Did this correct the problem? Check and reseat all data cables to the printhead. Did this correct the problem? Complete. Replace the printhead. Complete. Go to Step 3.
Yes
Complete.
No
Go to Step 2.
13,003.42: 13,007.46: Troubleshooting Procedures for 13,003 to 13,007 Error Code

1. 2. 1. 2. Ensure ground integrity for the printer. Did this correct the problem? Reset NVRAM and retest. Did this correct the problem? Complete. Replace in the following order:

Yes
Complete.
No
Go to Step 2.
NVRAM Electronics module
Service Manual
3-29
13,008.47: The drum heater is too hot. 13,010.49: The drum heater took too long to reach its setpoint. Troubleshooting Procedure for 13,008 to 13,010 Error Code (Drum Heater)
1. Verify that the ambient temperature of the room is within the printers optimal environmental specification (see "Environmental Specifications" on page 1-11). Is the room too cold or too hot? Ensure ground integrity of the printer (see "Ensuring Ground Integrity" on page 4-77). Are all components grounded properly? Is the error code associated with an overheat condition? Verify clearance for adequate air flow. Are any of the vents blocked? Go to Step 4. Advise customer of clearance specification. Go to Step 6. Go to Step 6. Go to Step 5. Go to Step 3. Resolve ground integrity.
Yes
Advise customer of specification requirements.
No
Go to Step 2.
2.
1. 2.
3 4
1. 1. 2.
1. 2.
Using service diagnostics, run the Drum Fan Motor test. Did the test pass? Check the electronics module fan. Is the fan operating correctly? Using service diagnostics, run the Drum Temperature Sensor test. Did the test pass? Using service diagnostics, run the Drum Heater test. Did the test pass?
Replace the drum fan and/or the wiring harness. Replace the electronics module fan. Replace the drum temperature sensor. Replace the drum temperature sensor.
1. 2.
Go to Step 7.
1. 2.
Go to Step 8.
1. 2.
13,067.43: The drum thermistor circuit is open. 13,069.45: The drum thermistor circuit is shorted. 13,071.47: The drum thermistor returned a bad reading, or the reading was corrupted by ESD (Electrostatic Discharge).
3-30
Troubleshooting Procedure for 13,067 to 13,071 Error Code (Drum Thermistor)

1. 2. Using service diagnostics, run the Drum Temperature Sensor test. Did the test pass? Inspect the sensor wiring harness. Is the wiring free from defects? Is the wiring correctly routed through the pass-thru and not pinched against the drum assembly frame? Replace the drum temperature sensor.
Yes
Go to Step 2.
No
Replace the drum temperature sensor. Replace the sensor wiring harness.
1. 2.
13,072.48: The preheater got too hot. 13,074.41: The preheater took too long to reach its setpoint. 13,131.44: The preheater thermistor circuit is open. 13,133.46: The preheater thermistor circuit is shorted. 13,135.48: The preheater thermistor returned a bad reading, or the reading was corrupted by ESD. Troubleshooting Procedure for 13,072 to 13,135 Error Code (Preheater)
1. Verify that the ambient temperature of the room is within the printers optimal environmental specification (see "Environmental Specifications" on page 1-11). Is the room too cold or too hot? Run the Preheater test. Did the test pass? Check the wiring from the preheater. Is the wiring connected properly and sound? Replace the I/O board. Replace the preheater board. Go to Step 3.
Yes
No
Go to Step 2.
2.
2 3
1. 2. 1. 2.
Replace the wiring harness.
13,136.49: The printhead left jetstack heater is too hot. 13,138.42: The printhead left jetstack heater took too long to reach its setpoint. 13,195.45: The printhead left jetstack thermistor circuit is open. 13,197.47: The printhead left jetstack thermistor circuit is shorted. 13,199.49: The printhead left jetstack thermistor returned a bad reading, or the reading was corrupted by ESD.
Service Manual
3-31
Troubleshooting Procedure for 13,136 to 13,199 Error Code (Printhead)

1. Verify that the ambient temperature of the room is within the printers optimal environmental specification (see "Environmental Specifications" on page 1-11). Is the room too cold or too hot? Ensure ground integrity of the printer (see "Ensuring Ground Integrity" on page 4-77). Are all components grounded properly? Use service diagnostics to run the Left Jetstack Temperature test. Did the test pass? Check and reseat all wiring to the printhead. Did this correct the problem? Complete. Replace the printhead. Go to Step 4. Replace the printhead. Go to Step 3. Resolve ground integrity.
Yes
Advise customer of environmental specification requirements.
No
Go to Step 2.
2.
1. 2.
1. 2.
1. 2.
3-32
13,200.41: The printhead right jetstack heater is too hot. 13,202.43: The printhead right jetstack heater took too long to reach its setpoint. 13,259.46: The printhead right jetstack thermistor circuit is open. 13,261.48: The printhead right jetstack thermistor circuit is shorted. 13,263.41: The printhead right jetstack thermistor returned a bad reading, or the reading was corrupted by ESD. Troubleshooting Procedure for 13,200 to 13,263 Error Code (Printhead)
1. Verify that the ambient temperature of the room is within the printers optimal environmental specification (see "Environmental Specifications" on page 1-11). Is the room too cold or too hot? Ensure the ground integrity of the printer (see "Ensuring Ground Integrity" on page 4-77). Are all components grounded properly? Run the Right Jetstack Temperature test. Did the test pass? Check and reseat all wiring to the printhead. Did this correct the problem? Complete. Go to Step 4. Replace the printhead. Replace the printhead. Go to Step 3. Resolve ground integrity.
Yes
No
Go to Step 2.
2.
1.
2.
3 4
1. 2. 1. 2.
13,264.42: The printhead reservoir heater got too hot. 13,266.44: The printhead reservoir heater took too long to reach its setpoint. 13,323.47: The printhead reservoir thermistor circuit is open. 13,325.49: The printhead reservoir thermistor circuit is shorted. 13,327.42: The printhead reservoir thermistor returned a bad reading, or the reading was corrupted by ESD. Troubleshooting Procedure for 13,264 to 13,327 Error Code (Printhead)
1. Verify that the ambient temperature of the room is within the printers optimal environmental specification (see "Environmental Specifications" on page 1-11). Is the room too cold or too hot?
Yes
No
Go to Step 2.
2.
Service Manual
3-33
Troubleshooting Procedure for 13,264 to 13,327 Error Code (Printhead) (Continued)

1. 2. Ensure ground integrity of the printer (see "Ensuring Ground Integrity" on page 4-77). Are all components grounded properly? Run the printhead Reservoir Temperature test. Did the test pass? Check and reseat all wiring to the printhead. Did this correct the problem? Complete. Replace the printhead. Go to Step 4. Replace the printhead.
Yes
Go to Step 3.
No
Resolve ground integrity.
1. 2.
1. 2.
13,328.43: The ink loader CYAN heater is too hot. 13,330.45: The ink loader CYAN heater took too long to reach its setpoint. 13,387.48: The ink loader CYAN thermistor circuit is open. 13,389.41: The ink loader CYAN thermistor circuit is shorted. 13,391.43: The ink loader CYAN thermistor returned a bad reading, or was corrupted by ESD. 13,392.44: The ink loader MAGENTA heater is too hot. 13,394.46: The ink loader MAGENTA heater took too long to reach its setpoint. 13,451.49: The ink loader MAGENTA thermistor circuit is open. 13,453.42: The ink loader MAGENTA thermistor circuit is shorted. 13,455.44: The ink loader MAGENTA thermistor returned a bad reading, or ESD corruption. 13,456.45: The ink loader YELLOW heater got too hot. 13,458.47: The ink loader YELLOW heater took too long to reach its setpoint. 13,515.41: The ink loader YELLOW thermistor circuit is open. 13,517.43: The ink loader YELLOW thermistor circuit is shorted. 13,519.45: The ink loader YELLOW thermistor returned a bad reading, or ESD corruption. 13,520.46: The ink loader BLACK heater got too hot. 13,522.48: The ink loader BLACK heater took too long to reach its setpoint. 13,579.42: The ink loader BLACK thermistor circuit is open. 13,581.44: The ink loader BLACK thermistor circuit is shorted. 13,583.46: The ink loader BLACK thermistor returned a bad reading, or ESD corruption.
3-34
Troubleshooting Procedure for 13,326 to 13,583 Error Code (Ink Loader)

1. Verify that the ambient temperature of the room is within the printers optimal environmental specification (see "Environmental Specifications" on page 1-11). Is the room too cold or too hot? Ensure ground integrity of the printer (see "Ensuring Ground Integrity" on page 4-77). Are all components grounded properly? Inspect and reseat the wiring to the ink loader. Check for open wires. Did this correct the problem? Run the appropriate Ink Melt test. 1 = Yellow 2 = Cyan 3 = Magenta 4 = Black 2. Did the test pass? Go to Step 4. Replace the I/O board or the combined right cable. Replace the ink loader. Go to Step 3. Resolve ground integrity.
Yes
No
Go to Step 2.
2.
1. 2.
1. 2.
1.
13,000.6x Errors - Program Faults

13,001.62: Thermals failed to read from printer NVRAM. 13,002.63: Value is not in valid range. 13,003.64: Thermal control task received an unexpected message. 13,004.65: Thermal control task was expecting initialization message, but received other. 13,005.66: Thermal code tried to command a segment ID that did not exist. 13,006.67: Thermal code tried to command a segment ID that did not exist. 13,007.68: Thermal power manager task was expecting initialization message, but received other. 13,008.60: Thermal power manager task received an unexpected message. a. Reset NVRAM and retest. b. Ensure ground integrity for the printer (see "Ensuring Ground Integrity" on page 4-77).
Service Manual
3-35
19,0XX.xx Errors - Printhead Calibration faults.

19,001.46: HFD server failed due to NVRAM operation. This fault only occurs when the printer is set in manufacturing mode. Program fault. 19,002.47: Attempted to perform a printhead operation without the printhead NVRAM data being loaded. 19,003.48: Scale and offset error is too large. The voltages measured have more than a 20% error from their expected values. Something is wrong with the electronics module or the wave amplifier. 19,004.40: The printhead and the electronics module do not match. Contact escalated Service Support Representative for information to clear fault. 19,005.63: Wave amp overcurrent. This error can occur in too-low humidity environments. Printer self-resets. Troubleshooting Procedure for Printhead Calibration
1. 2. Check and reseat all wiring to the printhead. Did this correct the problem?
Yes
Complete.
No
Replace in the following order:

Printhead Electronics Module
19,0XX.6x - Errors
19,001.68 thru 19,039.61: Waveform printhead calibration program faults. a. Reset NVRAM, and then retest. b. Replace the NVRAM chip.
21,000.69 Errors - Diagnostic Code Version Mismatch

a. The diagnostic firmware does not match the engine firmware. Update the diagnostic firmware for the printer. If a code updated ROM daughter board is installed on the main board, remove the board so the printer boots using the main boards code and diagnostics.
22,0XX.6x Errors - Jam Codes

a. For jam codes, "Jam Codes" on page 3-55.
23,0XX.6x Errors - NVRAM Fault

a. Reset NVRAM, and then retest. b. Replace the NVRAM.
3-36
26,0XX.6x Errors - Printing Faults

a. Reboot the printer if one of these faults occur.
26,962 Errors - Fall Out Code

a. Check the previous error in the fault history and troubleshoot that code.
27,0XX.6x Errors - Profile Library

a. Ensure the ground integrity of the printer (see "Ensuring Ground Integrity" on page 4-77).
29,0XX.6x Errors - Jam Manager

a. Reset NVRAM, and then retest. b. Replace the NVRAM.
31,0XX.4x Errors - Mechanical Initialization Jam

31,001.40: Mechanical initialization jam fault. Troubleshooting Procedure for Mechanical Unit Jam
1. Verify that all the main tray paper path sensor wires are clear of the take away rollers. Are any wires damaged? Are the take away rollers dirty, contaminated, or damaged? Run the Paper Path Drive test. Did the test pass? Does the media path motor run extremely fast? The media path motor encoder is faulty; replace the motor. Complete. Go to Step 5. Replace the take away roller. Go to Step 5. Go to Step 3. Go to Step 4.
Yes
No
Go to Step 2.
2.
2 3 4
1. 1. 2. 1.
1. 2. 3. 4.
Remove the media drive gearbox and manually rotate each paper path roller. Identify any roller that may be binding and causing drag on the printer. Repair or replace as necessary. Did this correct the problem?
If the media path is clear of debris and the rollers rotate normally, replace the media gearbox.
Service Manual
3-37

a. Reset NVRAM, and then retest. b. Ensure ground integrity for the printer (see "Ensuring Ground Integrity" on page 4-77).
3-38
33,0XX.xx Errors - Tray Manager Device Faults

33,001.42: Tray 1 width value too low. 33,002.43: Tray 1 width value too high. Troubleshooting Procedure for Tray 1
1. 2. Check the wiring and connectors from the front door to the I/O board. Are the wires connected properly? Run the Test Tray 1 Width Sensor test. Did the test pass? Replace the I/O board. Replace the front door.
Yes
Go to Step 2.
No
1. 2.
34,0XX.xx Errors - Printhead NVRAM Faults

34,001.43: An error occurred while attempting read/write access to the printhead calibration partition in NVRAM. The printhead cable may be unplugged. 34,002.44: An error occurred while attempting read/write access to the printhead ink data partition in NVRAM. 34,003.45: An error occurred while attempting read/write access to the printhead data partition in NVRAM. 34,004.46: An error occurred while accessing the printhead NVRAM hardware for the purpose of initialization. The printhead cable may be unplugged. Troubleshooting Procedure for Printhead NVRAM
1. 2. Check and reseat all wiring to the printhead. Did this correct the problem?
Yes
Complete.
No

Printhead Electronics Module
Service Manual
3-39
36,000.40 Errors - Drum Maintenance Faults

Troubleshooting Procedure for Drum Maintenance
1. 2. Ensure ground integrity (see "Ensuring Ground Integrity" on page 4-77). Did this correct the problem? Ensure the process drive system is correctly homed as described in "Homing the Process Gear Drive Train" on page 6-8. Inspect pivot plate for cracks. Check the drum maintenance cam rollers for damage or improper movement. If the pivot plate or cam rollers are faulty, replace. Did this correct the problem? Use service diagnostics to run the Drum Maintenance/Transfix Home test. Use service diagnostics to run the Drum Maintenance Drive test. If either test fails, replace the process drive. Complete. Go to Step 3.
Yes
Complete.
No
Go to Step 2.
1.
1. 2. 3. 4.
Complete.
Go to Step 4.
1. 2.
36,001.67 Errors
a. Replace the pivot plate. b. Replace the drum maintenance unit.
36,002.44 Errors
Printer cant write to Drum Maintenance Unit. a. Ensure the DMU sits correctly in the pivot plate. b. Replace the DMU. c. Replace the drum maintenance pivot plate assembly.
3-40
37,0XX.xx Errors - PEST Faults

AC power supplied by power sources such as uninterruptible power supplies (UPSs) or DC-to-AC inverter systems, may not supply enough current to properly power up the printer. In these cases, the printer may report printhead jet-stack or reservoir heater disconnect, drum heater, or preheater errors (37,002.47 thru 37,012.48). Verify the AC power source prior to troubleshooting a printer exhibiting any of these errors. For wiring diagrams to aid in diagnosing PEST faults, see "Wiring Diagrams" on page 10-1.
8400/8500/8550 PEST Description
37,001.46: Generic PEST error. Something went wrong during the PEST process. 37,002.47: PEST Error - Printhead Left jetstack disconnect. The left jetstack is not
drawing the expected power from the supply.
37,03.48:
PEST - Printhead Right jetstack disconnect. The right jetstack is not drawing the expected power from the supply. expected power from the supply.
37,004.40: PEST - Printhead Reservoir 0 disconnect. Reservoir 0 is not drawing the 37,005.41: PEST - Printhead Reservoir 1 disconnect. Reservoir 1 is not drawing the
expected power from the supply.
37,006.42: PEST - Drum disconnect. The drum heater is not drawing the expected
power from the supply.
37,008.44: PEST - Preheater disconnect. The preheater is not drawing the expected
8400 PEST Description
8500/8550 PEST description

All ink melters are disconnected. All ink melters are not drawing the expected power. Check to see if the ink melters AC cable is connected. Inkmelt 0 (Yellow) disconnect. The inkmelt heater is not drawing the expected power from the supply. Inkmelt 1 (Cyan) disconnect. The inkmelt heater is not drawing the expected power from the supply.
37,009.45: Inkmelt 0 (Yellow) disconnect.

The inkmelt heater is not drawing the expected power from the supply.
37,010.46: Inkmelt 1 (Cyan) disconnect. The

inkmelt heater is not drawing the expected power from the supply.
37,011.44: Inkmelt 2 (Magenta) disconnect.

The inkmelt heater is not drawing the expected power from the supply. inkmelt heater is not drawing the expected power from the supply.
37,012.48: Inkmelt 3 (Black) disconnect. The Inkmelt 2 (Magenta) disconnect. The

inkmelt heater is not drawing the expected power from the supply. Inkmelt 3 (Black) disconnect. The inkmelt heater is not drawing the expected power from the supply.
37,013.40:
Service Manual
3-41
Troubleshooting Procedure for Heaters

1. 2. Check the wiring running from the problem component to the printhead. Is the wiring damaged or not working properly? Run the appropriate diagnostic test: 37,002.47 = Left Jetstack Heater 37,003.48 = Right Jetstack Heater 37,004.40, 37,005.41 = Reservoir Heaters 2. Did the test pass? Run the appropriate diagnostic test: 37,006.42 = Drum Heater 2. Did the test pass? Run the appropriate diagnostic test: 37,008.44 = Preheat Heater 2. Did the test pass? Run the appropriate diagnostic test: 37,009.45 = (8500/8550) All ink melters = (8400) Ink Melt 1 37,010.46 = (8500/8550) Ink Melt 1 = (8400) Ink Melt 2 37,011.47 = (8500/8550) Ink Melt 2 = (8400) Ink Melt 3 37,012.48 = (8500/8550) Ink Melt 3 = (8400) Ink Melt 4 37,013.48 = (8500/8550) Ink Melt 4 2. Did the test pass? Replace the Ink loader. Replace the Preheater Drum Assembly. Replace the Preheater.
Yes
Replace the problem wiring harness.
No
Go to Step 2.
1.
Replace the Printhead.
1.
1.
1.
3-42
37,013.40: Electronics module cooling fan

disconnect. The electronics cooling fan is not drawing the expected power from the supply.
37,014.41:
Drum cooling fan disconnect. The drum cooling fan is not drawing the expected power from the supply.
Electronics Cooling Fan Disconnect. The Electronics Cooling Fan is not drawing the expected power from the supply. Drum cooling fan disconnect. The drum cooling fan is not drawing the expected power from the supply.
37,015.42:
Troubleshooting Procedure for Fans

1. Run the appropriate diagnostic test: 37,013.40 = (8400) Elect. Cooling 37,014.40 = (8500/8550) Elect. Cooling 37,014.41 = (8400) Drum Fan 37,015.41 = (8500/8550) Drum Fan 2. Did the test pass? Check the wiring for the problem fan. Is the wiring damaged or not working properly? Replace the problem wiring harness. Replace the problem component: Electronics cooling fan Drum Fan
Yes
Go to Step 2.
No
Go to Step 2.
1. 2.
Service Manual
3-43

50 V power supply test. The power supply is loaded with the head maintenance, the deskew, and the pick clutches. Check the 50 V on the Power supply. Or, ensure that the cables are not plugged into any of the clutches. The expected power from the supply is not being drawn. This error may be caused by a power supply that is faulty or shorted by some other 50 V device. Check the 50 V on the Power supply. Or, ensure that the cables are not plugged into the clutch.
37,016.43: PEST 50 V power supply test. For

Phaser 8400 printers, the 50 V power supply is loaded with the Head Maintenance clutch, and then tested.
50V Power Supply Fault Troubleshooting Procedure

Check for a short in the electronics module. NOTE: Damage to circuits within the electronics module may occur if the power supply capacitors are not allowed to fully discharge. NOTE: It is possible that the power supply is not shorted, but instead is out of spec and can lead to an error condition. 1. Measure the 50 V power supply output. The test point is located on the power control board below the main board RAM DIMMs. Is the power supply within specification? Turn off the printer and wait 30 seconds for the power supply capacitors to discharge.
Yes
Go to Step 2.
No
Go to Step 2.
2. 3.
3-44
50V Power Supply Fault Troubleshooting Procedure (Continued)

1. Unplug the following electronics module connectors. This step disconnects all other external circuits so the electronics module can be tested alone: Power Control to I/O board (J800 - gray ribbon cable on right side) Power Control right (J400 16 wire, multi-color) Printhead data interface (J130 gray ribbon cable on top side) Wave amp signal (J790) short gray ribbon cable located on left side) Printhead power connector Power Control left (J390 34 wire, multi-color) Y-Axis motor (J280) Turn on power to the printer.
Yes
Go to Step 3.
No
2. 3.
Do the PE and PS indicators (near the power switch) flash momentarily? Turn off the printer and wait 30 seconds for power supply capacitors to discharge. Plug in the power control to I/O board connector (J800). Turn on power to the printer. Do the PE and PS indicators flash momentarily? If the 50V Power Supply LED (viewed thru the cooling grill below the power cord receptacle) illuminates, the short is on one of the external devices you unplugged earlier. In this case, systematically turn off the printer, plug a wiring harness back in, and turn the printer on until the 50V supply fails (see Measuring DC Power Supply Voltages on page 76). Replace the defective part. Retest the printer. To isolate the problem to the I/O board or its related cabling, unplug the I/O board connectors. Umbilical Right J1 Waste Tray Sense J110 Stripper Solenoid J250 Paper Tray Sense J610 Ink load Signal J910 DMU Sense J860 Drum Thermistor J870 Exit Module J680 Heater Relay Control J950 Test the resistance of the I/O board to Pin1 of J270.

1. 2. 3. 4.
Go to Step 4.
Go to Step 5.
1.
2.
1.
Replace the I/O board.
Go to Step 6.
2. 3.
Is the resistance still less than 1K ohm?
Service Manual
3-45
50V Power Supply Fault Troubleshooting Procedure (Continued)

1. 2. 3. Plug in the I/O board connectors one at a time and retest the resistance. Replace components until you find one that creates a short at J270, Pin 1. Find any shorted components? Connect the wave Amp. Any problems. Connect printhead. Leave power on to ensure the problem is fixed. Go to Step 8.
Yes
Leave power on to ensure the problem is fixed.
No
Go to Step 7.
1. 2.
1.
Power up printer and retest.
3-46

Head Maintenance Clutch Disconnect. The Head Maintenance Clutch is not drawing the expected power from the supply. Main Tray Deskew Clutch Disconnect. The Main Tray Deskew Clutch is not drawing the expected power from the supply. Main Tray Pick Clutch Disconnect. The Main Tray Pick Clutch is not drawing the expected power from the supply. Multipurpose Tray Pick Solenoid Disconnect. The Multipurpose Tray Pick Solenoid is not drawing the expected power from the supply. Strip solenoid disconnect. The strip solenoid is not drawing the expected power from the supply. Preheat Solenoid Disconnect. The Preheat Solenoid is not drawing the expected power from the supply. Head Tilt Solenoid Disconnect. The Head Tilt Solenoid is not drawing the expected power from the supply.
37,017.44: Head maintenance clutch

disconnect. The main tray deskew clutch is not drawing the expected power from the supply.
37,018.45: Main tray (Tray 1) deskew clutch

disconnect. The main tray pick clutch is not drawing the expected power from the supply.
37,019.46: Tray 1 pick solenoid disconnect.

The tray 1 pick solenoid is not drawing the expected power from the supply.
37,020.47: Strip solenoid disconnect. The

strip solenoid is not drawing the expected power from the supply.
37,021.48:
37,022.40:
37,023.41:
Service Manual
3-47
Solenoid, Clutch and Pick Troubleshooting Procedure

1. Run the appropriate diagnostic test: 37,017.44 = Head Maintenance Clutch 37,018.45 = Deskew Clutch 37,019.46 = (8500/8550) Main tray pick Clutch 37,019.46 =(8400) Pick Solenoid 37,020.47 = (8500/8550) Multipurpose Pick Solenoid 37,020.47 = (8400) Strip Solenoid 37,021.48 = (8500/8550) Strip Solenoid 37,022.40 = (8400) Preheat Solenoid 37,023.41 = (8500/8550) Head Tilt Solenoid Did the test pass?
Yes
Go to Step 3.
No
Go to Step 2.
2.
1. 2.
Check the wiring for the problem clutch or solenoid. Is the wiring damaged or not working properly?
Replace the problem wiring harness.
Replace the problem component: Head maintenance clutch Media path drive assembly Pick solenoid Strip solenoid Head tilt solenoid Preheater solenoid
8400
8500/8550
PEST Description
37,021.48: 37,024.48: Tray 1 elevator disconnect. The main tray elevator is not
Troubleshooting Procedure for Tray 1 Elevator

1. 2. Run the Tray 2 Lift Motor test. Did the test pass? Check the wiring to the tray 2 lift motor. Is the wiring damaged?
Yes
Replace the electronics module. Replace the wiring harness
No
Go to Step 2.
1. 2.
Replace the tray lift motor.
3-48
8400
8500/8550

motor is not drawing the expected power from the supply.
37,022.40: 37,025.43: Pressure pump motor disconnect. The pressure pump
Troubleshooting Procedure for Pressure Pump

1. 2. Run the Pressure Pump Motor test. Did the test pass? Check the purge pump assembly wiring. Is the wiring damaged?
Yes
No
Go to Step 2.
1. 2.
Replace the pressure pump motor.
8400
8500/8550
PEST Description
Purge valve disconnect. The purge valve is not drawing the expected power from the supply.
37,023.41: 37,026.44
Troubleshooting Procedure for Purge Valve

1. 2. 1. 2. Run the Purge Vent Solenoid test. Did the test pass? Check the purge pump assembly wiring. Is the wiring damaged?
Yes
Go to Step 2.
No
Replace the purge pump.
Replace the defective wiring or the purge pump.
Service Manual
3-49
8400
8500/8550
PEST Description
relay coils are not drawing the expected power from the supply.
37,024.42: 37,027.45: Drum heater relay board disconnect. Both drum heater
37,025.43: 37,028.46: Drum heater relay A disconnect. The drum heater A coil is
not drawing the expected power from the supply.
37,026.44: 37,029.47: Drum heater relay B disconnect. The drum heater B coil is
not drawing the expected power from the supply.
Troubleshooting Procedures for Relay Board

1. 2. Run the Drum Heater Relay test. Did the test pass? Check the wiring for damage.
Yes
No
Go to Step 2.
1.
Replace the drum heater relay board.
8400
8500/8550
PEST Description
the expected power from the supply (both phases).
37,027.45: 37,030.48: X-axis motor disconnect. The X-axis motor is not drawing 37,028.46: 37,031.40: X-axis motor disconnect. The X-axis motor (first phase) is
not drawing the expected power from the supply
37,029.47: 37,032.41: X-axis motor short. The X-axis motor is drawing too much
power from the supply (first phase).
37,030.48: 37,033.42: X-axis motor disconnect. The X-axis motor (second phase)
is not drawing the expected power from the supply.
37,031.40: 37,034.43: X-axis motor short. The X-axis motor is drawing too much
power from the supply (second phase).
Troubleshooting Procedure for X-axis Motor

1. 2. Run the X-axis Drive test. Did the test pass? Check the X- axis motor wiring for damage.
Yes
No
Go to Step 2.
1.
Replace the X-axis motor.
3-50
8400
8500/8550
PEST Description
the expected power from the supply.
37,032.41: 37,035.44: Y-axis motor disconnect. The Y-axis motor is not drawing 37,033.42: 37,036.45: Y-axis motor short. The Y-axis motor is drawing too much
Troubleshooting Procedure for Y-axis Motor

1. 2. Remove any obstructions interfering with drum rotation. Inspect the drum and ensure the drum rotates smoothly, if not replace the drum and retest. Did this correct the problem? Disconnect the Y-axis belt. Does the Y-motor shaft rotate smoothly? Reconnect the Y-axis belt. Run the Y-axis Motor test. Did the test pass? Check the wiring for damage. Replace the electronics module. Go to Step 3. Replace the Y-axis motor. Go to Step 4.
Yes
Complete.
No
Go to Step 2.
3.
2 3
1. 2. 1. 2. 3.
1.
Replace the Y-axis motor.
8400
8500/8550
PEST Description
37,034.43: 37,037.46: Media path motor disconnect. The media path motor is not 37,035.44: 37,038.47: Media path motor short. The media path motor is drawing
too much power from the supply.
Troubleshooting Procedure for Media Path Motor

1. 2. Run the Media Path Motor test. Did the test pass? Check the wiring for damage.
Yes
No
Go to Step 2.
1.
Replace the media path motor.
Service Manual
3-51
8400
8500/8550
PEST Description
37,036.45: 37,039.48: Process motor disconnect. The process motor is not 37,037.46: 37,040.40: Process motor short. The process motor is drawing too
much power from the supply.
Troubleshooting Procedure for Process Motor

1. Do the process drive gears, transfix shaft, and drum maintenance shafts rotate freely?
Yes
Go to Step 2.
No
Look for drag in the rollers or replace the process drive. Go to Step 3.
1. 2.
Run the Process Motor test. Did the test pass? Check the wiring for damage.
1.
Replace the process drive assembly.
37,038.47: The power supply did not reset

properly as requested. The reset line may not be connected.
37,039.48: Power supply +5 volt over limit. 37,040.40: Power supply +5 volt under limit. 37,041.41: Power supply +1.8 volt over limit.
The power supply did not reset properly as requested. The reset line may not be connected.
37,042.42: Power supply +1.8 volt under limit. 37,043.43: Power supply +2.5 volt over limit. 37,044.44: Power supply +2.5 volt under limit. 37,045.45: Power supply +3.3 volt over limit. 37,046.46: Power supply +3.3 volt under limit. 37,047.47: Power supply +12 volt over limit. 37,048.48: Power supply +12 volt under limit
Power supply +2.5 volt over limit. Power supply +2.5 volt under limit. Power supply +3.3 volt over limit. Power supply +3.3 volt under limit. Power supply +12 volt over limit Power supply +12 volt under limit
3-52

Power supply -12 volt over limit. Power supply -12 volt under limit. Power supply current over limit. Power supply current under limit. Power supply +50 volt over limit. Power supply +50 volt under limit. Power supply -50 volt over limit. Power supply -50 volt under limit. Power supply +15 volt over limit. Power supply +15 volt under limit. Power supply -15 volt over limit. Power supply -15 volt under limit. Power supply +5 volt over limit.
37,049.40: Power supply -12 volt over limit. 37,050.41: Power supply -12 volt under limit. 37,051.42: Power supply current over limit. 37,052.43: Power supply current under limit. 37,053.44: Power supply +50 volt over limit. 37,054.45: Power supply +50 volt under limit. 37,055.46: Power supply -50 volt over limit. 37,056.47: Power supply -50 volt under limit. 37,057.48: Power supply +15 volt over limit. 37,058.40: Power supply +15 volt under limit. 37,059.41: Power supply -15 volt over limit. 37,060.42: Power supply -15 volt under limit. 37,061.43: Power supply high switch will not
activate. 12, 15, and 50 volt missing. This may be due to a short or disconnected power supply reset line.
37,062.44: Vss measurement too low. The

printhead power cable may be disconnected.
Power supply +5 volt under limit.
37,063.45: Vpp measurement too low. The

printhead power cable may be disconnected.
Power supply high switch will not activate. 12, 15, and 50 volt missing. This may be due to a short or disconnected power supply reset line. Vss measurement too low. The printhead power cable may be disconnected. Vpp measurement too low, head power cable may be disconnected. Wave amp drive cable may be damaged or disconnected at head driver board or wave amp board. The wave amp appears to be shorted. It is drawing to much power. Check for bad wave amp drive cable (lifted ends of conductors).
37,064.46:
37,065.47:
37,066.48:
Service Manual
3-53
Troubleshooting Procedure for Power Supply

1. 2. Run the Voltages check test. Did the test pass? Check the printhead power cable. Is the wiring damaged or not connected? Reseat or replace the wiring.
Yes
Go to Step 2.
No
Replace the electronics module. Replace the wave amp.
1. 2.
3-54
Jam Codes
The printer stores the most recent 20 events in Jam History. To access this information for Phaser 8400 printers, press the Up Arrow button when the jam code displays. Then, scroll to Jam History and press OK to display the most recent jam list. Phaser 8500/8550 printers have improved jam code reporting capabilities. When the printer is in a jam condition, pressing HELP displays the jam code. The jam code contains 4-digits compared to the 3-digit codes produced by Phaser 8400 printers. The fourth digit simplifies troubleshooting by indicating one of the following:

The tray number at which the jam occurred (1, 2, 3, or 4). The jam occurred while processing a chase page (5).
Service Manual
3-55
The jam occurred when generating a duplex print (6).
Jam Code Key Table

Process Event 8400
A Deskew Flag B Preheat Flag C Strip Flag D Exit Flag E Tray 1 Width Sensor F Front Door Event G Tray 2 Media Sensor H Tray 3 Media Sensor J Tray 4 Media Sensor K Tray 4 Media Sensor M Paper Path Motor N Y-Axis Motor P Process Motor T Exit Door Event V Tray 2 Event W Tray 3 Event X Tray 3 Pick Flag Y Tray 4 Event Z Tray 4 Pick Flag
Process Event 8500/8550

A Deskew Flag B Preheat Flag C Strip Flag D Exit Flag E Tray 1 Media Present F Front Door Event G Exit Door H Tray 2 Media Sensor J Tray 3 Media Sensor M Paper Path Motor N Y-Axis Motor P Process Motor Q DMU Missing T Exit Door Event U Pipeline Resource V Tray 2 Event W Tray 3 Event X Tray 3 Pick Flag Y Tray 4 Event Z Tray 4 Pick Flag
Basis for Jam

2 Sensor Event 3 Timeout 4 Motor Stall 5 Motor Position 6 Length Short 7 Length Long
Printer State
A Printer 1st Init Abnormal Shutdown B Printer 1st Init - Normal Shutdown C Mechanical Recovery D Warmup E Ready F Fault G Auto Drum Maintenance H Printhead Maintenance J Printhead Purge K Oil Transfix Roller L Standby Print Process Substates M Pick from Tray 2 N Pick from Tray 3 P Pick from Tray 4 Q Pick from Tray 1 R Pick from Duplex S Stage for Transfix T Transfix V Print Drum Maintenance W Imaging X Exit Z Shutdown
(8500/8550 only)
1 - Tray 1 2 - Tray 2 3 - Tray 3 4 - Tray 4 5 - Chase page 6 - Duplex
3-56
Jam Code Definition Table

Not all jam code combinations are documented in this manual, only the codes that occur most commonly. Note The following table only shows the 3-digit jam code. For Phaser 8500/8550 Printers, an additional 4th digit represents the tray number (5 represents a chase page and 6 represents duplex). Numbers following the 4th digit represent the page number:
Jam Code Troubleshooting Procedures

A2C Deskew sensor in unexpected state during mechanical recovery. 1. Check the drum maintenance unit NVRAM contacts during the oiling process for continuity. 2. Instruct customer to remove media from Tray 1 before opening the front door. 3. Replace the pivot arm. A2E Deskew sensor in unexpected state at ready. 1. Ensure ground integrity of the printer, see page 4-77. 2. Replace Tray 1 solenoid. A2F Deskew sensor in unexpected state. 1. Ensure ground integrity of the printer, see page 4-77. 2. Verify all doors and covers are fully closed and not moving during printing. A2J A2K A2M Deskew flag sensor event during head purge. Deskew sensor in an unexpected state during a transfix roller oiling. The deskew flag tripped unexpectedly while the printer was picking paper from Tray 2. The deskew flag tripped unexpectedly while the printer was picking paper from Tray 3. The deskew flag tripped unexpectedly while the printer was picking paper from Tray 4. Deskew sensor in unexpected state during media stage for transfix.
A2N
A2P
A2S
Service Manual
3-57
Jam Code Troubleshooting Procedures (Continued)

A2Q The deskew flag tripped unexpectedly while the printer was picking paper from Tray 1. 1. Try using different, supported media. 2. Ensure the paper guides are snug against the media in the tray. 3. Push up on Tray {2 - 4} Nudger Roller until it is captured by actuator arm. 4. Run the following diagnostic tests, Deskew Flag, Tray {2-4} Pick Clutch and the Tray {2-4} Solenoid. 5. Ensure ground integrity of the printer, see page 4-77. 6. Verify all doors and covers are fully closed and not moving during printing. 7. Replace the Tray {2 - 4} Pick Clutch. 8. Replace the retard roller. 9. Replace the preheater. A3G Deskew Sensor time-out event during an auto drum maintenance cycle. A3M The deskew flag timed out waiting for the paper picked from Tray 2. A3N The deskew flag timed out waiting for the paper picked from Tray 3 A3P The deskew flag timed out waiting for the paper picked from Tray 4. A3Q The deskew flag timed out waiting for the paper picked from Tray 1. 1. Verify media is appropriate for the tray. 2. Verify the tray is not overfilled and the guides are positioned correctly. 3. Check for obstructions in the paper path. 4. Test the appropriate Tray Solenoid. 5. Test the appropriate Tray Pick Clutch. 6. Ensure the take away rollers are in good condition. 7. Test the take away roller using the diagnostic Paper Path Drive test. 8. Replace the appropriate Separator Pad Assembly. 9. Replace the Pick Assembly. A3R Deskew sensor time-out during movement from exit roller to deskew roller when duplexing print. 1. Ensure the media is appropriate for two-sided printing. Not too short, not too smooth. Check printer specifications. 2. Inspect the condition of the exit rollers and the duplex roller. 3. Check the Front Door for obstructions or damage, replace the Front Door if necessary. 4. Test the operation of the exit roller and the duplex roller using diagnostic Duplex Paper Lead Edge Times test. 5. Test the deskew sensor using the diagnostic Sensors test.
3-58

B2C Preheat exit sensor unexpected state during mechanical recovery. 1. Clear jam and let printer finish mechanical recovery. 2. Ensure ground integrity of the printer, see page 4-77. B2F B2S Preheater exit sensor in unexpected state during fault. Preheater exit sensor in unexpected state during stage. 1. Ensure ground integrity of the printer, see page 4-77. 2. Check the drum maintenance unit NVRAM contacts during the oiling process for continuity. 3. Check the waste tray. 4. Replace the preheater assembly.
B2M
The preheat flag tripped unexpectedly while the printer was picking paper from Tray 2. The preheat flag tripped unexpectedly while the printer was picking paper from Tray 3. The preheat flag tripped unexpectedly while the printer was picking paper from Tray 4. The preheat flag tripped unexpectedly while the printer was picking paper from Tray 1. 1. Test the preheat flag using the diagnostic Sensors test. 2. Ensure ground integrity of the printer, see page 4-77.
B2N
B2P
B2Q
B3M B3N B3P B3Q B3S B3T
The preheat flag timed out waiting for the paper picked from Tray 2. The preheat flag timed out waiting for the paper picked from Tray 3. The preheat flag timed out waiting for the paper picked from Tray 4 The preheat flag timed out waiting for the paper picked from Tray 1. Preheater sensor timed out during stage. Preheater exit sensor timed out during transfix. 1. Verify the media is appropriate for the tray. 2. Check for paper path obstructions, ensure the preheater plate moves freely. 3. Replace the Tray 1 Separator Pad Assembly. 4. Run diagnostics to test the preheat flag. 5. Ensure the deskew rollers are in good condition. 6. Run the Deskew Clutch test. 7. Run the Paper Path Drive test. 8. Replace the preheater, then retest
Service Manual
3-59

C2C C2D C2E C2F C2K C2M C2N C2P C2Q C2R C2T Strip flag unexpected event during mechanical recovery. Strip flag unexpected state during warm-up. Strip flag unexpected event during printer ready. Strip flag unexpected event during fault. Strip flag unexpected event during transfix roller oiling. The strip flag actuated unexpectedly when paper picked from Tray 2. The strip flag actuated unexpectedly when paper picked from Tray 3. The strip flag actuated unexpectedly when paper picked from Tray 4. The strip flag actuated unexpectedly when paper picked from Tray 1. Strip flag unexpected event during pick from the duplex path. Strip flag unexpected event during transfix. 1. Ensure ground integrity of the printer, see page 4-77. 2. Check the paper tray for overfill. 3. Run the Stripper sensor test. 4. Inspect the stripper blade for damage or debris. 5. Run the Paper Lead Edge Times test. 6. Replace the stripper carriage assembly. C2X Strip flag unexpected event during exit. 1. Ensure the media is not too thick and that it is supported by the printer. 2. Use a less glossy media. 3. Ensure the guides in the tray are snug against the media. 4. If the drum maintenance unit is near the end of its life, replace it. 5. Clean and inspect the exit rollers. 6. Run the Paper Path Drive test. C3M C3N C3P C3Q The strip flag timed out waiting for the paper picked from Tray 2. The strip flag timed out waiting for the paper picked from Tray 3. The strip flag timed out waiting for the paper picked from Tray 4. The strip flag timed out waiting for the paper picked from Tray 1.
3-60

C3T Strip flag time-out during transfix. 1. Ensure media is correct size and type for the tray. If envelope jam, try a different style. 2. Check the drum maintenance unit for proper operation, replace if necessary. 3. Ensure the process drive assembly is correctly homed, see page 6-8. 4. Ensure the stripper carriage moves freely, run the Stripper Contact test. 5. Run the Transfix Drive Slow and Transfix Drive Fast tests. C3X Strip flag time-out during exit. 1. Open the exit cover and ensure the springs for the idler rollers are present and installed correctly (they should be the same for all 5 rollers). 2. Verify the metal bar is installed on top of the exit guide. C5X Print pulled back into transfix nip during exit. 1. Ensure the media is not too thick and that it is supported by the printer. 2. Use a less glossy media. 3. If the drum maintenance unit is near the end of its life, replace it. 4. Clean and inspect the exit rollers. 5. Ensure the process drive is correctly homed. 6. Run the Paper Path Drive test. 7. Replace the lower exit guide assembly. D2D D2M D2N D2P D2Q D2R D2T Exit flag unexpected event during warm-up. The exit flag actuated unexpectedly when paper picked from Tray 2. The exit flag actuated unexpectedly when paper picked from Tray 3. The exit flag actuated unexpectedly when paper picked from Tray 4. The exit flag actuated unexpectedly when paper picked from Tray 1. The exit flag actuated unexpectedly when duplexing. The exit flag actuated unexpectedly when transfixing. 1. Ensure ground integrity of the printer, see page 4-77. 2. Run the Sensors test to test the exit sensor. 3. Run the Paper Lead Edge Times test. 4. Replace problem component.
Service Manual
3-61

D2X The exit flag actuated unexpectedly exit. 1. Ensure the media is not too thick and that it is supported by the printer. 2. Use a less glossy media. 3. If the drum maintenance unit is near the end of its life, replace it. 4. Clean and inspect the exit rollers. 5. Check the exit flag for proper installation or damage, replace the flag if necessary. 6. Run the diagnostic Paper Path Drive test. 7. Replace problem component. D3C D3M D3N D3P D3Q D3R D3T Exit flag time-out during mechanical recovery. Exit flag timed out following Tray 2 Pick. Exit flag timed out following Tray 3 Pick. Exit flag timed out following Tray 4 Pick. Exit flag timed out following Tray 1 Pick. Exit flag timed out during duplexing. Exit flag time-out during transfix. 1. Inspect the exit path for obstructions. 2. Inspect and clean the exit roller, ensure the exit roller rotates. 3. Inspect and clean the stripper blade. 4. Replace the drum maintenance unit. 5. Run the diagnostic Paper Path Drive test. E2D E2E E2Q Tray 1 width sensor during warm-up. Tray 1 width sensor during Tray 1 width sensor during Tray 1 pick. 1. Examine the Tray 1 width guides for proper movement and ensure the side guides are not being adjusted while printing. 2. Ensure the front door is closed and the wiring is properly connected and seated. 3. Run the Tray 1 sensor test. 4. Inspect the Tray 1 wiring to the I/O board. 5. Replace the I/O board, then retest.
3-62

F2D F2F F2M F2N F2P F2Q F2R F2S F2T F2V The front door open flag unexpectedly tripped while the printer was warming up. The front door open flag unexpectedly tripped while the printer was in a fault state. The front door open flag unexpectedly tripped when the printer pick from Tray 2. The front door open flag unexpectedly tripped when the printer pick from Tray 3. The front door open flag unexpectedly tripped when the printer pick from Tray 4. The front door open flag unexpectedly tripped when the printer pick from Tray 1. The front door open flag unexpectedly tripped while the printer was duplexing. Front door sensor unexpectedly actuated while the paper was staged for transfix. The front door open flag unexpectedly tripped while the print was being transfixed. The front door open flag unexpectedly tripped while the printer was oiling the drum during a print job. The front door open flag unexpectedly tripped while the printer was imaging during a print job. Front door sensor unexpectedly actuated during exit. 1. Ensure the media is supported. 2. Ensure ground integrity of the printer, see page 4-77. 3. Run the diagnostic Sensors test to test the door sensor. 4. Check that the doors and covers are properly closed and seated. 5. Run the door sensor test. G2M H2N J2M J2P M2C M4A M4B M4C M4D M4E M4F M4G Tray 2 removed during pick from Tray 2. Tray 3 was removed during pick from Tray 3. Tray 4 was removed during pick from Tray 4. Tray 4 Media Present Sensor event pick from Tray 4. Media path motor had an unexpected event during mechanical recovery. Paper path motor stalled during an abnormal printer shutdown. Paper path motor stalled during a normal printer shutdown. Paper path motor stalled during mechanical recovery. Paper path motor stalled during printer warm-up. Paper path motor stalled while the printer was in its ready state. Paper path motor stalled while the printer was in a fault state. Paper path motor stalled while the printer performed an auto drum maintenance cycle.
F2W
F2X
Service Manual
3-63

M4H M4J M4K M4L M4M M4N M4P M4Q M4R M4S M4T Paper path motor stalled while the printer performed printhead maintenance. Paper path motor stalled while the printer performed printhead purge. Paper path motor stalled while the printer performed an oil transfix roller cycle. Paper path motor stalled while the printer was in standby mode. Paper path motor stalled while the printer picked from Tray 2. Paper path motor stalled while the printer picked from Tray 3. Paper path motor stalled while the printer picked from Tray 4. Paper path motor stalled while the printer picked from Tray 1. Paper path motor stalled while the printer duplexed the print. Paper path motor stalled while the printer staged the print for transfix. Paper path motor stalled during transfix. 1. Verify the media in the tray is supported by the printer. 2. Inspect the paper path for obstructions. 3. Run the Paper Drive Power test. 4. Run the Media Path Motor and Shafts test. 5. Replace the media path drive assembly. N2T Y-Axis motor event during transfix (Tray 1 only - probably a multi-pick). 1. Verify the media in the tray is supported by the printer. 2. Try a heavier media. 3. Inspect Tray 1 separator pad. Replace if necessary. 4. Send a snippet to turn off the multi-pick detection code. 5. Run the Y-Axis Motor test, replace if necessary. 6. Run the Voltages test, replace the power supply if necessary. N2W Y-Axis motor event during imaging. Probably a software fault. 1. Ensure ground integrity of the printer, see page 4-77. N4A N4B N4C N4D NFE N4F N4G Y-Axis motor stalled on power-up following an abnormal printer shutdown. Y-Axis motor stalled on power-up following a normal printer shutdown. Y-Axis motor stalled during mechanical recovery. Y-Axis motor stalled during an printer warm-up. Y-Axis motor stalled while the printer was in its ready state. Y-Axis motor stalled while the printer was in a fault state. Y-Axis motor stalled while the printer performed an auto drum maintenance cycle.
3-64

N4H N4J N4K N4L N4S N4T N4V N4W N4X Y-Axis motor stalled while the printer performed printhead maintenance. Y-Axis motor stalled while the printer performed printhead purge. Y-Axis motor stalled while the printer performed an oil transfix roller cycle. Y-Axis motor stalled while the printer was in standby mode. Y-Axis motor stalled while the printer staged for transfix. Y-Axis motor stalled while the printer transfixed the print. Y-Axis motor stalled while the printer performed a print drum maintenance cycle. Y-Axis motor stalled while the printer imaged the drum. Y-Axis motor stalled while the print exited the printer. 1. Check for supported media, generally label, trifold or envelopes cause this error. 2. Try running fewer sheets through the tray. 3. Ensure the Process Drive Gearbox is correctly aligned, refer to "Homing the Process Gear Drive Train" on page 6-8. 4. Run the Check Y-Axis Motor test, replace if necessary. 5. Run the Belt Slip test. 6. Replace the Tray 1 separator pad assembly. 7. Replace the process drive assembly. N5T N5W Y-Axis motor out of position while the printer transfixed the print. Y-Axis motor out of position while the printer imaged the drum. 1. Inspect the Y-Axis drive belt. 2. Run the Check Drum Y-Axis Encoder test. 3. Run the Check Drum Y-Axis Drive test. 4. Run the Check Drum Y-Axis Belt Slip test. 5. Replace the Y-Axis motor or drum assembly if necessary. N6T Y-Axis motor media short during transfix. The media was measured to be shorter than it was believed to be. 1. Ensure the media is supported. 2. Ensure ground integrity of the printer, see page 4-77. 3. Run the Check Drum Y-Axis Encoder test. 4. Pull the preheater and check the preheater flag for ink or paper interference. 5. Replace the preheater. Legal size paper from Tray 4 in standard print mode may buckle. Use slower print mode.
Service Manual
3-65

N7T Y-Axis motor media long during transfix. The media was measured to be longer than it was believed to be. 1. Ensure the media is supported. 2. Try heavier media. 3. Try loading only a few sheets. Some photo media may require running one sheet at a time. 4. Run the diagnostic Check Drum Y-Axis Encoder test. 5. Replace the Pick Assembly and retard roller. 6. Run the clean ink smears and check the preheater exit flag for debris. 7. Remove the paper preheater and ensure that the exit flag does not interfere with the assembly. Replace the Paper Preheater if all else checks out. P4A P4B P4C P4D P4E P4F P4G P4H P4J P4K P4L P4S P4T P4V P4W P4X Process motor stalled on abnormal shutdown. Process motor stalled on power-up following a normal printer shutdown. Process motor stalled during mechanical recovery. Process motor stalled during an printer warm-up. Process motor stalled while the printer was in its ready state. Process motor stalled while the printer was in a fault state. Process motor stalled while the printer performed an auto drum maintenance cycle. Process motor stalled while the printer performed printhead maintenance. Process motor stalled while the printer performed printhead purge. Process motor stalled while the printer performed an oil transfix roller cycle. Process motor stalled while the printer was in standby mode. Process motor stalled while the printer staged for transfix. Process motor stalled while the printer transfixed the print. Process motor stalled while the printer performed a print drum maintenance cycle. Process motor stalled while the printer imaged the drum. Process motor stalled while the print exited the printer. 1. Ensure the media is supported. 2. Verify that the Process Drive Gearbox is correctly aligned and homed. 3. Run the Process Motor test. 4. Replace the process motor if necessary. 5. Run the Transfix Fast and Slow tests. 6. Replace the transfix camshaft and load arms if necessary. 7. Run the Tilt Drive test, replace if necessary. 8. Replace the process drive gearbox assembly.
3-66

T2A The exit door open flag unexpectedly tripped while the printer was performing an abnormal shutdown. The exit door open flag unexpectedly tripped while the printer was performing a normal shutdown. The exit door open flag unexpectedly tripped while the printer was performing a mechanical recovery. The exit door open flag unexpectedly tripped while the printer was warming up. The exit door open flag unexpectedly tripped while the printer was ready.
T2B
T2C
T2D T2E
T2F T2G
The exit door open flag unexpectedly tripped while the printer was in a fault state. The exit door open flag unexpectedly tripped while the printer was performing an automatic drum maintenance cycle. The exit door open flag unexpectedly tripped while the printer was performing a printhead maintenance cycle. The exit door open flag unexpectedly tripped while the printer was performing a printhead purge cycle. The exit door open flag unexpectedly tripped while the printer was performing a transfix oiling cycle. The exit door open flag unexpectedly tripped while the printer was in Standby mode. The exit door open flag unexpectedly tripped when the printer picked from Tray 2. The exit door open flag unexpectedly tripped when the printer picked from Tray 3. The exit door open flag unexpectedly tripped when the printer picked from Tray 4. The exit door open flag unexpectedly tripped when the printer picked from Tray 1. The exit door open flag unexpectedly tripped while the printer was duplexing. The exit door open flag unexpectedly tripped while the paper was staging for the transfix cycle. The exit door open flag unexpectedly tripped while the print was being transfixed. The exit door open flag unexpectedly tripped while the printer was ejecting the print.
T2H
T2J
T2K
T2L
T2M T2N T2P T2Q T2R T2S
T2T T2X
Service Manual
3-67

T2Z The exit door open flag unexpectedly tripped while the printer was shutting down. 1. Ensure the media is supported. 2. Ensure ground integrity of the printer, see page 4-77. 3. Run the Monitor Sensors test. 4. Inspect the door switch for damage and proper operation. 5. Check the drum maintenance unit to ensure it is functioning properly and the blade is not covered with ink debris. 6. Replace the drum maintenance unit. 7. Replace the transfix roller. V2D V2E V2F V2K V2L V2M V2N V2P V2Q V2R V2S V2T V2V Tray 2 media size sensor unexpectedly activated during warm-up. Tray 2 media size sensor unexpectedly activated during printer ready. Tray 2 media size sensor unexpectedly activated while printer was in a fault state. Tray 2 media size sensor unexpected event during oil transfix. Tray 2 media size sensor unexpectedly activated while the printer was in standby. Tray 2 media size sensor unexpectedly activated while picking from Tray 2. Tray 2 media size sensor unexpectedly activated while picking from Tray 3. Tray 2 media size sensor unexpectedly activated while picking from Tray 4. Tray 2 media size sensor unexpectedly activated while picking from Tray 1. Tray 2 media size sensor unexpectedly activated while duplexing. Tray 2 media size sensor unexpectedly activated while paper staged for print. Tray 2 media size sensor unexpectedly activated while transfixing the print. Tray 2 media size sensor unexpectedly activated while print drum maintenance cycle was being performed. Tray 2 media size sensor unexpectedly activated during printer imaging. Tray 2 media size sensor unexpectedly activated while exiting print. 1. Ensure ground integrity of the printer, see page 4-77. 2. Ensure the Tray 2 paper guides are correctly set. 3. Run the Monitor Sensors test to test the media size sensor. 4. Replace the media size sensor board. 5. Replace the pivot arm. W2D W2E W2F Tray 3 media size sensor unexpectedly activated during warm-up. Tray 3 media size sensor unexpectedly activated during printer ready. Tray 3 media size sensor unexpectedly activated while printer in fault state.
V2W V2X
3-68

W2L W2M W2N W2P W2Q W2R W2V Tray 3 media size sensor unexpectedly activated while printer in standby. Tray 3 media size sensor unexpectedly activated while picking from Tray 2. Tray 3 media size sensor unexpectedly activated while picking from Tray 3. Tray 3 media size sensor unexpectedly activated while picking from Tray 4. Tray 3 media size sensor unexpectedly activated while picking from Tray 1. Tray 3 media size sensor unexpectedly activated while duplexing. Tray 3 media size sensor unexpectedly activated while print drum maintenance cycle being performed. Tray 3 media size sensor unexpectedly activated during printer imaging. Tray 3 media size sensor unexpectedly activated while paper staged for print. Tray 3 media size sensor unexpectedly activated while transfixing the print. Tray 3 media size sensor unexpectedly activated event while exiting print. 1. Ensure ground integrity of the printer, see page 4-77. 2. Ensure the paper guides are correctly set. 3. Run the Monitor Sensors test to test the media size sensor. 4. Replace the 525-Sheet Feeder. W4N W4P W4S Tray 3 motor stall during pick from Tray 3. Tray 3 motor stall during pick from Tray 4. Tray 3 motor stall during pick from Tray 3. 1. Ensure ground integrity of the printer, see page 4-77. 2. Ensure the paper guides are correctly set. 3. Run the Monitor Sensors test to test the media size sensor. 4. Replace the 525-Sheet Feeder. X2A X2B X2C X2D X2E X2F X2L X2M X2N Tray 3 pick flag triggered unexpectedly during abnormal shutdown. Tray 3 pick flag triggered unexpectedly on power-up following normal shutdown. Tray 3 pick flag triggered unexpectedly during mechanical recovery. Tray 3 pick flag triggered unexpectedly during warm-up. Tray 3 pick flag triggered unexpectedly during printer ready. Tray 3 pick flag triggered unexpectedly while printer was in a fault state. Tray 3 pick flag triggered unexpectedly while printer in standby. Tray 3 pick flag triggered unexpectedly while picking from Tray 2. Tray 3 pick flag triggered unexpectedly while picking from Tray 3.
W2W W2S W2T W2X
Service Manual
3-69

X2P X2Q X2R X2S X2V Tray 3 pick flag triggered unexpectedly while picking from Tray 4. Tray 3 pick flag triggered unexpectedly while picking from Tray 1. Tray 3 pick flag triggered unexpectedly while duplexing. Tray 3 pick flag triggered unexpectedly while transfixing. Tray 3 pick flag triggered unexpectedly while print drum maintenance cycle was being performed. Tray 3 pick flag triggered unexpectedly during printer imaging. Tray 3 pick flag triggered unexpectedly while exiting print. 1. Ensure ground integrity of the printer, see page 4-77. 2. Ensure the paper guides are correctly set. 3. Run the Monitor Sensors test to test the media size sensor. 4. Replace the 525-Sheet Feeder. 5. Replace the pivot arm. X3D X3E X3F X3L X3M X3N X3P X3Q X3R X3S X3T X3V Tray 3 pick flag sensor timed out during warm-up. Tray 3 pick flag sensor timed out during wile printer ready. Tray 3 pick flag sensor timed out while printer in fault state. Tray 3 pick flag sensor timed out while printer in standby. Tray 3 pick flag sensor timed out while picking from Tray 2. Tray 3 pick flag sensor timed out while picking from Tray 3. Tray 3 pick flag sensor timed out while picking from Tray 4. Tray 3 pick flag sensor timed out while picking from Tray 1. Tray 3 pick flag sensor timed out while duplexing. Tray 3 pick flag sensor timed out while paper staged for print. Tray 3 pick flag sensor timed out while transfixing the print. Tray 3 pick flag sensor timed out while the printer drum maintenance cycle was being performed. Tray 3 pick flag sensor timed out while printer imaging.
X2W X2X
X3W
3-70

X3X Tray 3 pick flag sensor timed out while exiting print. 1. Verify the paper loaded in Tray 3 is supported media. 2. Reduce the amount of media in the tray and reposition the guides to fit firmly against the media. 3. Inspect and/or clean the pick roller assembly. 4. Run the Tray 3 Pick Shaft test. 5. Ensure ground integrity of the printer, see page 4-77. 6. Push up on the nudger roller until it is captured by the actuator arm. 7. Run the Pick Clutch test, replace the pick clutch. 8. Run the Media Path Drive test. 9. Replace the pick roller assembly. 10.Replace the Tray 3 525-sheet feeder. Y2D Y2E Y2F Y2L Y2M Y2N Y2P Y2Q Y2R Y2S Y2T Y2V Tray 4 media size sensor unexpectedly activated during warm-up. Tray 4 media size sensor unexpectedly activated during printer ready. Tray 4 media size sensor unexpectedly activated while printer in fault state. Tray 4 media size sensor unexpectedly activated while printer in standby. Tray 4 media size sensor unexpectedly activated while picking from Tray 2. Tray 4 media size sensor unexpectedly activated while picking from Tray 3. Tray 4 media size sensor unexpectedly activated while picking from Tray 4. Tray 4 media size sensor unexpectedly activated while picking from Tray 1. Tray 4 media size sensor unexpectedly activated while duplexing. Tray 4 media size sensor unexpectedly activated while paper staged for print. Tray 4 media size sensor unexpectedly activated while transfixing the print. Tray 4 media size sensor unexpectedly activated while the printer drum maintenance cycle was being performed. Tray 4 media size sensor unexpectedly activated while printer imaging. Tray 4 media size sensor unexpectedly activated while exiting print. 1. Ensure ground integrity of the printer, see page 4-77. 2. Ensure the paper guides are correctly set. 3. Run the Monitor Sensors test to test the media size sensor. 4. Replace the Tray 4 525-Sheet Feeder. 5. Replace the pivot arm. Z2A Z2B Tray 4 pick flag triggered unexpectedly during abnormal shutdown. Tray 4 pick flag triggered unexpectedly during normal shutdown.
Y2W Y2X
Service Manual
3-71

Z2C Z2D Z2E Z2F Z2L Z2M Z2N Z2P Z2Q Z2R Z2S Z2T Z2V Tray 4 Pick flag triggered unexpectedly during mechanical recovery. Tray 4 pick flag triggered unexpectedly during warm-up. Tray 4 pick flag triggered unexpectedly while printer ready. Tray 4 pick flag triggered unexpectedly while printer in fault state. Tray 4 pick flag triggered unexpectedly while printer in standby. Tray 4 pick flag triggered unexpectedly while pick from Tray 2. Tray 4 pick flag triggered unexpectedly while pick from Tray 4. Tray 4 pick flag triggered unexpectedly while pick from Tray 4. Tray 4 pick flag triggered unexpectedly while pick from Tray 1. Tray 4 pick flag triggered unexpectedly while duplexing. Tray 4 pick flag triggered unexpectedly while paper staged for print. Tray 4 pick flag triggered unexpectedly while transfixing the print. Tray 4 pick flag triggered unexpectedly while the printer drum maintenance cycle was being performed. Tray 4 pick flag triggered unexpectedly during printer imaging. Tray 4 pick flag triggered unexpectedly while exiting print. 1. Ensure ground integrity of the printer, see page 4-77. 2. Run the Monitor Sensors test to test the media size sensor. 3. Replace the 525-Sheet Feeder. 4. Replace the pivot arm. Z3B Z3D Z3E Z3F Z3L Z3M Z3N Z3P Z3Q Z3R Tray 4 pick flag sensor timed out during normal shutdown. Tray 4 pick flag sensor timed out during warm-up. Tray 4 pick flag sensor timed out during wile printer ready. Tray 4 pick flag sensor timed out while printer in fault state. Tray 4 pick flag sensor timed out while printer in standby. Tray 4 pick flag sensor timed out while pick from Tray 2. Tray 4 pick flag sensor timed out while pick from Tray 4. Tray 4 pick flag sensor timed out while pick from Tray 4. Tray 4 pick flag sensor timed out while pick from Tray 1. Tray 4 pick flag sensor timed out while duplexing.
Z2W Z2Z
3-72

Z3V Tray 4 pick flag sensor timed out while the printer drum maintenance cycle was being performed. Tray 4 pick flag sensor timed out while printer imaging. Tray 4 pick flag sensor timed out while paper staged for print. Tray 4 pick flag sensor timed out while transfixing the print. Tray 4 pick flag sensor timed out while exiting print. 1. Verify the paper loaded in Tray 4 is the correct size and type. 2. Inspect/clean the pick roller assembly. Replace if necessary. 3. Run the Tray 4 Pick Shaft test 4. Replace the Tray 4 525-Sheet Feeder.
Z3W Z3S Z3T Z3Z
Service Manual
3-73
General Troubleshooting
In this chapter...

Service Diagnostics Service Diagnostics Mode Menu Check Menu Definition Tables Electronics Troubleshooting Ensuring Ground Integrity Paper Path and Media-Based Problems Operating System and Application Problems
Section
Introduction
This chapter covers the general start-up, Power On Self Test (POST), and power supply operations of the printer to aid in troubleshooting problems not associated with a Control Panel error message or error code. For troubleshooting problems associated with an error code or Control Panel error message, notes on how to use the troubleshooting procedure tables, and how to use service diagnostics, see Chapter 3 "Error Messages and Codes" on page 3-1. The Printer Status page also contains useful troubleshooting information. This page provides general printer information, life information for all consumables, printhead cleaning and power cycles, and jam and error code information. Troubleshooting procedures will isolate a problem to a specific component or subassembly, in some cases including the wiring harness. If you go through the procedures in a troubleshooting table and still are unable to solve the problem, re-read the Theory of Operations for the problem area and ensure that you understand how that section of the printer is supposed to function.
Hidden Service Menu

The Hidden Service Menu provides access to a large group of information pages and functions usable for diagnosing and correcting printer malfunctions and accessing special features. Display the Hidden Service Menu as follows: 1. On the Control Panel, press the Down Arrow button to select Troubleshooting and then press OK. 2. Press the Down Arrow button to select Service Tools, and then press OK. 3. While pressing and holding down the Up Arrow button, press the Down Arrow button to display the Hidden Service Menu.
Menu Item
Test Prints Startup Page Eliminate Light Stripes Fault History Jam History Diagnostic History (8500)
Description
See "Analyzing Service Test Prints" on page 5-33 for a complete explanation of each test print available. Prints a page with basic printer configuration and networking information. Performs a cleaning procedure to remove light stripes in prints; this process will take about 5 minutes. Displays available information regarding the last 15 faults reported by a test and/or the print engine. Displays available information regarding the last 20 Jams reported by a test and/or the print engine. Displays each diagnostic test performed on the printer.
4-2
Menu Item
Diagnostic History (8500/8550) Enter Diagnostic Mode Reset NVRAM
Description
Displays a list of all recent diagnostic tests. See "Service Diagnostics Mode Menu" on page 4-5 for a complete explanation of each diagnostic routine. Provides access to reset the printer back to its factorydefault settings and erase all network settings. If possible, print the Configuration Page before resetting NVRAM. Selects the Power Saver Timeout, the amount of time the printer must be idle before changing to Power Saver lowenergy consumption mode, per ENERGY STAR\256 guidelines. Resets all items in the Printer Controls menu to their default values. This is for manufacturing or engineering use only. This is for manufacturing or engineering use only. This is for manufacturing or engineering use only. This is for manufacturing or engineering use only. Adjusts the tension on the wiper blade (for engineering use only). When replacing a purge pump different than the manufactured pump, you may need to adjust the amount of pressure in the pump using this menu item. Resets the ink loader ink stick count. Prints pages with detailed printer-usage information. Prints using a font optimized for FAX. Displays engine copy count. Displays the printhead serial number. Displays the date the printhead was calibrated. Displays the printhead version. Displays the engine firmware version. Enables a chase page to follow a 2-sided printing job. Enables a chase page to follow an envelope print job. Centers the image by adjusting the margin (not operational). Exits the Hidden Service Diagnostics Menu and returns to the previous menu.
Power Saver Timeout
Reset Printer Head Adjust Adjust X-axis scale Drift Compensation Head-to-Drum Adjust Wiper adjust (8500) Purge adjust (8500)
Reset Ink Loader (8500) Service Usage Profile Print OCR Usage Profile Engine Copy Count Head Serial Number Head Cal Date Head Version Engine Firmware Version 2-Sided Printing Oil Chase Envelope Oil Chase Center Image (8400) Exit
4-3
Service Diagnostics
The printer has built-in diagnostics to aid in troubleshooting problems with the printer. The Service Diagnostics Menu provides a means to test sensors, motors, switches, clutches, fans and solenoids. Diagnostics also contain functions to report printer status and some NVRAM access. Service diagnostics are to be executed through the Control Panel by a certified service technician only. Service Diagnostics can be entered one of two ways:
Entering Service Diagnostics without Rebooting the Printer:

This method of entering diagnostics is to allow customers to be diverted to service diagnostics in order to perform some tests. 1. Display the Hidden Service Menu as described in "Hidden Service Menu" on page 4-2. 2. Scroll down to Enter Diagnostics and press the OK button.
Entering Service Diagnostics by Rebooting the Printer (8400):

1. Turn the printer power OFF. 2. Press and hold the Back and Help buttons. 3. Turn the printer power ON while continuing to hold the Back and Help buttons for approximately 30 seconds until the Control Panel indicates Diagnostic Menu.
Entering Service Diagnostics by Rebooting the Printer (8500/8550):

1. Turn the printer power ON. 2. Wait for the Xerox logo to begin moving across the display. 3. Before the logo is centered on the display (stops moving), press and hold the Back and Help buttons on the Control Panel. 4. Hold both buttons until the display reads Beginning Service Mode Initialization. Release the buttons and the printer reboots into service mode with the Service Diagnostics menu displayed.
4-4
Service Diagnostic Control Panel Button Descriptions

Button
BACK
Function
Returns to the prior higher level menu structure, if available. Cancels the display of test results on the Control Panel. If help text is displayed on the Control Panel, pressing BACK will restore the current menu item and remove the help text. Cancels certain functions of the printer. Provides help information, if available. Press any key to advance through the help text. Scrolls up one menu item within a menu list. This control does not wrap. Used to increment data in tests requiring user input. Scrolls down one menu item within test results. This control does not wrap. Enters the highlighted menu. Executes the current test item.
CANCEL HELP UP DOWN OK
NOTE: Pressing any key may cause an abort if allowed by the test being performed. A power cycle is used to arbitrarily stop a test.
Service Diagnostics Mode Menu

This mode can be entered from the Hidden Service Menu. All diagnostics are available in this mode. The printer reboots after entering or exiting all diagnostic modes. The printer will keep the printer thermals hot during diagnostics to avoid unnecessary cleaning cycles. If a diagnostic test runs into a problem while initializing the heaters a message will display, Test Fault, cant warm up - press any button, you can still continue to run diagnostics under this condition. Note If the heaters are ON while entering diagnostics, they will remain ON while diagnostics are being run. If the heaters are OFF while entering diagnostics, they will remain OFF. Utilize the Exercise Heaters function if it is necessary to turn ON/OFF the heaters.
4-5
Service Diagnostics Menu Map

Menu Map
Menu
Main Menu
Description
Displays general help text describing the general operation of the Control Panel/menu system. A temporary submenu containing some development functions and access to tests still under development. Exits service diagnostics and runs through POST to Ready.
Development Menu
Return to Customer Mode Check Menu
Check All Activators Menu Shafts Menu Fans Menu Heaters Menu Paper Path Menu Drive Menu Drum Menu (8500) Motors Menu Misc. Menu
See the individual table descriptions starting on page 4-12 for all Check/ Activator menu items.
Monitor Menu A submenu containing a set of functions for passively viewing or monitoring printer mechanical measurements. Sensors Monitors all mechanically activated digital sensors except for the Control Panel buttons. Whenever a state change is detected it is reported on the Control Panel. Monitors each of the non-temperature analog sensors (Tray 1 width, Y, Media Path, and Process motor encoders). Monitors each of the thermal sensors. Shows the current thermal control loop setpoint (first value) and the current sensor temperature (second value). Monitors each of the heaters. Shows if the heater is currently enabled (first value) and what percentage of maximum power is currently allocated (second value). Monitors line voltage as seen by the power supply. Reports max and min values.
Encoders
Temps
Heaters
Line Voltage
4-6
Menu Map (Continued)

Menu
Control Panel Buttons
Description
Monitors Control Panel buttons and reports button presses.
Exercise Menu A submenu containing a set of functions for actively causing mechanical actions which may then be observed. Activators Menu Pulses the specified activator to cause it to generate some sound or motion. Cycles each of the listed activators 4 times in sequence until interrupted by a Control Panel button press. Cycles the activator repeatedly until interrupted by a Control Panel button press. Cycles the activator repeatedly until interrupted by a Control Panel button press. Cycles the activator repeatedly until interrupted by a Control Panel button press. If not installed generates an Option not detected message. Cycles the activator repeatedly until interrupted by a Control Panel button press. If not installed generates an Option not detected message. Cycles the activator repeatedly until interrupted by a Control Panel button press. Cycles the preheater solenoid until interrupted by pressing the Control Panel button. Cycles the activator repeatedly until interrupted by pressing the Control Panel button. Cycles the tilt solenoid until interrupted by pressing the Control Panel button. Cycles the activator repeatedly until interrupted by a Control Panel button press.
Exercise All
Tray 1 Pick Solenoid
Tray 2 Pick Clutch
Tray 3 Pick Clutch
Tray 4 Pick Clutch
Deskew Clutch
Pre-heater Solenoid (8500/ 8550) Strip Solenoid
Tilt Solenoid (8500/8550) Head Maintenance Clutch
4-7

Menu
Purge Vent Solenoid
Description
Cycles the activator repeatedly until interrupted by a Control Panel button press. Cycles the activator repeatedly until interrupted by a Control Panel button press. These functions drive the specified motor or shaft sufficiently to generate easily observed motion without making substantial change to the state of the printer. Exercise All Cycles each of the listed motors/shafts 3 times in sequence until interrupted by a Control Panel button press. Cycles the motor/shaft repeatedly until interrupted by a Control Panel button press. Cycles the motor/shaft repeatedly until interrupted by a Control Panel button press. Cycles the motor/shaft repeatedly until interrupted by a Control Panel button press. Cycles the motor/shaft repeatedly until interrupted by a Control Panel button press. Cycles the motor/shaft repeatedly until interrupted by a Control Panel button press. Cycles the motor/shaft repeatedly until interrupted by a Control Panel button press. Cycles the motor/shaft repeatedly until interrupted by a Control Panel button press. Cycles the motor/shaft repeatedly until interrupted by a Control Panel button press. Cycles the motor/shaft repeatedly until interrupted by a Control Panel button press.
110V/220V Drum Heater Relay(s)
Exercise Motors/ Shafts Menu
Process Motor
Y-axis Motor
X-axis Motor
Purge Pump Motor
Drum Fan Motor
Media Path Motor Fan Motor
Media Path Motor & Shafts
Transfix Cam Shaft
Drum Maintenance Cam Shaft
4-8

Menu
Deskew Shaft
Description
Cycles the motor/shaft repeatedly until interrupted by a Control Panel button press. Cycles the motor/shaft repeatedly until interrupted by a Control Panel button press. Cycles the motor/shaft repeatedly until interrupted by a Control Panel button press. Cycles the motor/shaft repeatedly until interrupted by a Control Panel button press. Cycles the motor/shaft repeatedly until interrupted by a Control Panel button press. If not installed generates an Option not detected message. Cycles the motor/shaft repeatedly until interrupted by a Control Panel button press. Cycles the motor/shaft repeatedly until interrupted by a Control Panel button press. If not installed generates an Option not detected message. Cycles the motor/shaft repeatedly until interrupted by a Control Panel button press. If not installed generates an Option not detected message. Cycles the motor/shaft repeatedly until interrupted by a Control Panel button press. If not installed generates an Option not detected message. Cycles the motor/shaft repeatedly until interrupted by a Control Panel button press. If not installed generates an Option not detected message. Cycles the motor/shaft repeatedly until interrupted by a Control Panel button press. If not installed generates an Option not detected message.
Wiper Shaft
Tray 1 Pick Shaft
Tray 2 Pick Shaft
Tray 2 Lift Motor
Tray 3 Pick Shaft
Tray 4 Pick Shaft
Tray 3 Lift Motor
Tray 3 Motor & Shafts
Tray 4 Pick Shaft
Tray 4 Lift Motor
4-9

Menu
Tray 4 Motor & Shafts
Description
Cycles the motor/shaft repeatedly until interrupted by a Control Panel button press. If not installed generates an Option not detected message. Allows the heaters to forced to an ON or OFF condition or to be toggled from one condition to the other. Also, provide monitoring to observe the resulting heater power or temperature. Monitor heaters Monitor Temperatures All Heaters On All Heaters Off Toggle Printhead Heaters Toggle Preheat Heater Toggle Drum Heater Toggle Ink Melt Heaters Monitors heater power. Monitors heater temperature.
Exercise Heaters Menu
Turns all heaters On. Turns all heaters Off Toggles printhead heaters to opposite state. Toggles preheat heater to opposite state. Toggles drum heater to opposite state.
Toggles ink melt heaters to opposite state. There is a melt heater for each of the four colors. Exercises the Control Panel LCD/LED outputs.
Control Panel Display Cycle LED
Cycles the LED through a red/Yellow/ Green sequence. Sets the LCD display dark. Changes the display backlight from off to max. Sets the LCD display light. A submenu containing a set of functions for commanding more complex actions by portions of the printer mechanism.
Set display dark Test backlight
Set display light Function Menu
Initialize Mechanism
Performs a simplified version of the power up mechanical initialization sequence.
4-10

Menu
Print DMU Blot
Description
Raises the DM unit up against the drum, then does a Chase sequence. The result is an oil print of the contact of the DM unit with the drum (about 2/3 of the way down the page). A function that displays the current contents of the Fault History NVRAM store. A restricted function that provides read/ write access to selected PE NVRAM parameters. A restricted function that clears the Fault History NVRAM store. Resets the Ink Stick Count (ISC) fault condition. To avoid a reoccurrence, check the ink shapes and the ink stick flags. A restricted function that clears the PS NVRAM to be rebuilt with defaults at the next power up. A restricted function that clears the PE NVRAM to be rebuilt with defaults at the next power up. A restricted function that sets the PE NVRAM parameters to the default values.
Display Fault History
Access PE NVRAM Parameters
Clear Fault History
Clear ISC Fault
Clear PS NVRAM
Clear PE NVRAM
Set PE NVRAM to Defaults
4-11
Check Menu Definition Tables

A submenu containing a set of extensive tests that return measured mechanism parameters for comparison against stated limits. Refer to the table associated with each test for their normal operating ranges. In cases where insufficient baseline data is available, the results have been left blank. All results from tests that move paper through the printer were collected using 24 lb. bond paper. Note Collecting 2 or 3 samples of the test data is recommended before deciding on a course of action. Many of the tests rely on mechanical positions and slight changes can effect the results. Ensure that the printer is not out of paper, ink or maintenance kit life. The diagnostics routines are not designed to address all of these conditions consistently. If a test result differs significantly from the typical values defined in the following tables, check the entire system containing the problem component to ensure a problem within the system is not influencing the test results. To access the Check Menus enter Service Diagnostics and go to Check Menu --> Check Activators Menu. The Check All selection will run all check tests, taking 1.5 hours to complete and is not for use by field technicians.
4-12
Check / Activators Menu

Head Maintenance Clutch
Gathers data on the performance of the head maintenance clutch coil.
Typical Value (8400) R#

0
Definition
Peak Power (watts) 3.0 to 5.9
Typical Value (8500/ 8550)

3.2 to 6.3
Actions
Reports the profile max power value. Reports the average power during the constant portion of the profile.
Average Power (watts)
2.8
2.2 to 3.5
Deskew Clutch
Gathers data on the performance of the deskew clutch coil.

0 1
Definition
Peak Power (watts) Average Power (watts) 2.5 to 5.3 2.2 to 5.3

3.0 to 5.8 1.5 to 3.0
Actions
Reports the profile max power. Reports the average power during the constant portion of the profile.

Gathers data on the performance of the Tray 1 pick solenoid coil and flapper.

0 1
Definition
Peak Power (watts) Average Power (watts) 20.0 to 30 20.0 to 30

20 to 25 19 to 26
Actions
Reports the profile max power value. Reports the average power during the constant portion of the profile. Reports the min power following power off.
Min Power (watts)
-5.0 to -0.4
4-13

Gathers data on the performance of the Tray 1 pick solenoid coil and flapper.

3
Definition
Peak Power Time (sec) 0.05 to 0.19
Actions
Reports time after solenoid power on that the peak power occurred. Reports the average power following power on.
Initial Average Power (watts)
17 to 26
Tray 2, Tray 3, Tray 4, Pick Clutch

Gathers data on the performance of the pick clutch coil for Trays 2 through 4. The same type of clutch is used for each tray.

0
Definition

3.0 to 6.0
Actions
2.5 to 5.5
2.0 to 6.5
Strip Solenoid
Gathers data on the performance of the stripper solenoid coil and plunger.

0
Definition
Peak Power (watts) 8.0 to 15

22 to 27
Actions
8.0 to 15
20.0 to 30.0
4-14
Purge Vent Solenoid

Gathers data on the performance of the purge vent solenoid coil.

0
Definition

-.12 to 1.2 .15 to 1.2
Actions
0.4 to 1.2
Drum Heater Relay

Gathers data on the performance of the drum heater dual relay assembly by energizing each relay for a short time and capturing the resulting power draw.

0
Definition
220 V Coil Peak Power (watts) 220 V Coil Average Power (watts)

.2 to 1.2
Actions
Reports the profile max power value. Reports the average power during the constant portion of the profile. Reports the min power following power off. Reports time after solenoid power on that the peak power occurred.
.2 to 1.2
220 V Coil Min Power (watts) 220 V Coil Peak Power Time (sec)
.2 to .45
220 V Coil Initial Average Power (watts) 110 V Coil Peak Power (watts) 110 V Coil Average Power (watts)
.2 to .45
Reports the average power following power on.
.2 to 1.0
Reports the profile max power value. Reports the average power during the constant portion of the profile. Reports the min power following power off.
.2 to 1.0
110 V Coil Min Power (watts)
.2 to .45
4-15
Drum Heater Relay

Gathers data on the performance of the drum heater dual relay assembly by energizing each relay for a short time and capturing the resulting power draw.

8
Definition
110 V Coil Peak Power Time (sec)
Actions
Reports time after solenoid power on that the peak power occurred. Reports the average power following power on.
110 V Coil Initial Average Power (watts)
4-16
Check Shafts Menu

Deskew Shaft
Runs the media path drive train and engages the deskew clutch on the fly then disengages the clutch. The test is repeated in both directions to determine clutch characteristics, steady state drive requirements, bearing status, etc.

0
Definition
Time to CCW On peak fe (sec). 0.01 to 0.04

.01 to.04
Actions
Reports how long it takes the MP motor servo system to react to the sudden addition of the deskew shaft load. Larger values may show a slipping/slow to engage clutch. Reports peak effort needed to accelerate the deskew shaft load. A smaller value could indicate a slipping clutch. Reports the time it takes the MP motor servo system to "settle down" after the sudden addition of the deskew shaft load. A longer time could indicate a looseness in the deskew shaft assembly or a slipping clutch. Reports the average effort required to rotate the deskew shaft in the CCW direction at a constant velocity. An unusual value could indicate a difference in the composition and/or number of the rollers, the nip pressure, or out of range mechanical dimensions due to wear or contamination (such as paper dust increasing the effective diameter of a roller). Reports the variation of effort required to rotate the deskew shaft in the CCW direction at a constant velocity. A larger value could indicate particles in the gears or non uniform contamination of a roller (causing a lump).
CCW On peak fe.
540 to 750
2.0 to 8.0
CCW On fe settling time (sec).
0.017 to 0.21
0 to .2
CCW On average fe.
250 to 600
1.0 to 2.5
CCW On fe ripple.
115 to 360
0 to 2.0
4-17
Deskew Shaft (Continued)


5
Definition
CCW Off fe settling time (sec). 0.010 to 0.20

0 to .5
Actions
Reports the time it takes the MP motor servo system to "settle down" after the sudden release of the deskew shaft load. A larger value can indicate a slow to release or dragging clutch. Reports a time that indicates how long it takes the MP motor servo system to react to the sudden addition of the deskew shaft load. Larger values may indicate a slipping or slow to engage clutch. Reports the peak effort required to accelerate the deskew shaft load. A smaller value could indicate a slipping clutch. Reports the time it takes the MP motor servo system to "settle down" after the sudden addition of the deskew shaft load. A longer time could indicate a looseness in the deskew shaft assembly or a slipping clutch. Reports the average effort required to rotate the deskew shaft in the CW direction at a constant velocity. An unusual value could indicate a difference in the composition and/or number of the rollers, the nip pressure, or out of range mechanical dimensions due to wear or contamination (such as paper dust increasing the effective diameter of a roller).
Time to CW On peak fe (sec).
0.010 to 0.06
0 to .05
CW On peak fe.
-950 to -450
-7.0 to -2.0
CW On fe settling time (sec).
0.010 to 0.20
0 to .2
CW On average fe.
-610 to -220
-3 to 1.3
4-18
Deskew Shaft (Continued)


10
Definition
CW On fe ripple. 110 to 400

-2.25 to -1.0
Actions
Reports the variation of effort required to rotate the deskew shaft in the CW direction at a constant velocity. A larger value could indicate particles in the gears or non uniform contamination of a roller (causing a lump). Reports the time it takes the MP motor servo system to "settle down" after the sudden release of the deskew shaft load. A larger value could indicate a dragging or slow to release clutch.
11
CW Off fe settling time (sec).
0.010 to 0.20
.01 to .05
4-19
Check Paper Path Menu

Wiper Shaft
Runs the media path drive train and engages the head maintenance clutch on the fly then disengages the clutch. The test is repeated in both directions to determine clutch characteristics, steady state drive requirements, bearing status, etc.

0
Definition
Time to CCW On peak fe (sec). 0.009 to 0.16

.02 to 1.0
Actions
Reports how long it takes the MP motor servo system to react to the sudden addition of the wiper shaft load. Larger values may indicate a slipping or slow to engage clutch. Reports the peak effort required to accelerate the wiper shaft load. A smaller value could indicate a slipping clutch. Reports the time it takes the MP motor servo system to "settle down" following the sudden addition of the wiper shaft load. A longer time could indicate a looseness in the wiper shaft assembly or a slipping clutch. Reports the average effort required to rotate the wiper shaft in the CCW direction at a constant velocity. An unusual value could indicate a difference in the composition and/or number of the rollers, the nip pressure, or out of range mechanical dimensions due to wear or contamination (such as paper dust increasing the effective diameter of a roller). Reports the variation of effort needed to rotate the wiper shaft in the CCW direction at a constant velocity. A larger value could indicate particles in the gears or non uniform contamination of a roller (causing a lump).
CCW On peak fe.
25 to 100
.015 to 1.4
CCW On fe settling time (sec).
-2.1 to 0.25
-.03 to .3
CCW On average fe.
10 to 50
-.1 to 0
CCW On fe ripple.
25 to 100
.08 to .31
4-20
Wiper Shaft (Continued)


5
Definition
CCW Off fe setting time (sec). 0.004 to 0.15

.015 to .20
Actions
Reports the time it takes the MP motor servo system to settle down after the sudden release of the wiper shaft load. A larger value may show a dragging or slow to release clutch. Reports how long it takes the MP motor servo system to react to the sudden addition of the wiper shaft load. Larger values may indicate a slipping or slow to engage clutch. Reports the peak effort required to accelerate the wiper shaft load. A smaller value could indicate a slipping clutch. Reports the time it takes the MP motor servo system to "settle down" following the sudden addition of the wiper shaft load. A longer time could indicate a looseness in the wiper shaft assembly or a slipping clutch. Reports the average effort required to rotate the wiper shaft in the CW direction at a constant velocity. An unusual value could indicate a difference in the composition and/or number of the rollers, the nip pressure, or out of range mechanical dimensions due to wear or contamination (such as paper dust increasing the effective diameter of a roller).
Time to CW On peak fe (sec).
0.005 to 0.20
.02 to .045
CW On peak fe.
-275 to -10
-.15 to 0.4
CW On fe settling time (sec).
-10 to 1
-.04 to .23
CW On average fe.
-50 to 15
.02 to .2
4-21
Wiper Shaft (Continued)


10
Definition
CW On fe ripple. 20 to 75

0 to .4
Actions
Reports the variation of effort needed to rotate the wiper shaft in the CW direction at a constant velocity. A larger value may show particles in the gears or non uniform contamination of a roller (causing a lump). Reports the time it takes the MP motor servo system to "settle down" after the sudden release of the wiper shaft load. A larger value could indicate a dragging or slow to release clutch.
11
CW Off fe settling time (sec).
-5 to .01
.02 to .22
Tray 1 Pick Shaft

Runs the media path drive train and engages the tray 1 pick solenoid on the fly. The pick shaft goes through two full revolutions while drive requirements are determined.

0
Definition
Off average MP fe. (mpts). On response time. (sec). 800 to 1500 -1.5 to 0.95
Actions
Reports the average MP fe during the run in interval before the pick shaft is engaged. Reports the time between pick solenoid activation and a detectable response from the MP drive system indicating that pick shaft engagement. A higher value of R1 could indicate that the missing tooth gear engaged more slowly than usual, which could be a problem with the lift plate spring tension, the condition of the sliding surfaces between the cams and the followers, drag on the pick shaft, or problems with the drive gears (missing teeth, etc.).
4-22
Tray 1 Pick Shaft (Continued)

Runs the media path drive train and engages the tray 1 pick solenoid on the fly. The pick shaft goes through two full revolutions while drive requirements are determined.

2
Definition
Initial average MP fe. (mpts). -1 to 1400
Actions
Reports the average MP fe immediately following the pick shaft engagement. A higher value of R2 could indicate extra friction between the cams and the lift plate followers (wear, contamination, etc.), as well as high lift plate spring tension or higher shaft bearing drag. Also, if the missing tooth gear did not kick forward and engage, this value would be unchanged from R0. Reports the minimum MP fe value at the transition point between breaking separator pad contact and the continued depression of the lift plate. Value reflects the effort needed to rotate the pick shaft and compress the lift spring. A higher value of R3 could show higher cam/bearing friction and/or lift plate spring strength. Reports the average MP fe while the pick roller is contacting the separator pad. This value should reflect the coefficient of friction between the separator pad and the pick roller. This value may be effected by contamination or glazing. Reports the peak MP fe during the interval when the pick cams are depressing the lift plate. A higher value here could indicate issues with the cam surfaces or the spring compression force. Reports the average MP fe following the re latching of the missing tooth gear. This value should be the same as R0 if the missing tooth gear successfully relatched.
Transition MP fe min. (mpts).
750 to 1800
Contact average fe.
120 to 2000
Pushdown MP fe max.
750 to 2000
Final average MP fe. (mpts).
900 to 1500
4-23
Tray 2, Tray 3, and Tray 4 Pick Shaft

Test is the same for each pick shaft although for tray 2 the media path motor is used and for the 525-sheet feeders the corresponding pick/transport motor is used. Test determines if the shaft can be driven by the clutch, if the nudger rollers are being driven, and the pick pad/nudger roller friction.

0
Definition
Time to On peak fe (sec).
Actions
Reports how long it takes the MP motor servo system to react to the sudden addition of the Tray 2 pick shaft load. Larger values may indicate a slipping or slow to engage clutch. Reports the peak effort required to accelerate the Tray 2 pick shaft load. A smaller value could indicate a slipping clutch. Reports the time it takes the MP motor servo system to "settle down" after the sudden addition of the Tray 2 pick shaft load. A longer time could indicate looseness in the Tray 2 pick shaft assembly or a slipping clutch. Reports the average effort needed to rotate the Tray 2 pick shaft in the pick direction at a constant velocity. An unusual value could indicate a binding shaft, missing pressure springs, hard/dirty rollers, extra friction in the pick truck assembly. Reports the variation of effort required to rotate the Tray 2 pick shaft in the pick direction at a constant velocity. A larger value could indicate particles in the gears or non uniform contamination of a roller (causing a lump). Reports the time it takes the MP motor servo system to "settle down" after the sudden release of the Tray 2 pick shaft load. A larger value could indicate a dragging or slow to release clutch.
On peak fe.
On fe settling time (sec).
On average fe.
On fe ripple.
Off fe settling time (sec).
4-24
Tray 2, Tray 3, and Tray 4 Pick Shaft (Continued)

Test is the same for each pick shaft although for tray 2 the media path motor is used and for the 525-sheet feeders the corresponding pick/transport motor is used. Test determines if the shaft can be driven by the clutch, if the nudger rollers are being driven, and the pick pad/nudger roller friction.

6
Definition
Time to lift plate up (sec).
Actions
Reports the time between the activation of the Tray 2 lift motor and the detection of the raised lift plate. Out of range values may indicate a problem with the lifting mechanism (which could effect the following friction measurement), or media left in the tray. Reports the peak effort required to drive the pick shaft when the nudger roller is in contact with the separator pad. A smaller value could indicate a slipping clutch, missing nudger assembly pressure spring, or glazed/dirty roller/pad.
Plate lifted average fe.
Paper Drive Power

Test picks paper from selected tray (test currently supports picking from Tray 2 only) and moves it through either the simplex or duplex paper path to determine paper path power requirements.

0
Definition
Tray
Actions
Reports the tray from which the test paper was picked. Reports the size of the picked paper.
Paper Size
2 3 4
Unused Unused Tray 2 Pick Average Power (watts) Reports average of the power over the pick interval (begin pick to Deskew sensor).
4-25
Paper Lead Edge Times

Paper is picked and moved through either simplex or duplex paper path to determine leading edge arrival time at each paper path sensor. R values have alternate definitions or are unused depending on the pick tray and if simplex or duplex path was selected.
Typical Value (8400) R# Definition
Actions
Common 0 Tray Reports the tray from which the test paper was picked Reports the size of the picked paper.
Paper Size
Tray 4 Pick 2 Tray 4 Pick Interval (us) Reports the interval from the time the engine software is commanded to start the tray 4 pick process until the Tray 4 Pick sensor activates. Reports the interval from the Tray 4 Pick sensor activation until the Tray 3 Pick sensor activates. Reports the interval from the Tray 3 Pick sensor activation until the Deskew sensor activates.
Tray 4 Transport Interval (us)
Tray 3 Pick 2 3 Unused Tray 3 Pick Interval (us) Reports the interval from the time the engine software is commanded to start the tray 3 pick process until the Tray 3 Pick sensor activates. Reports the interval from the Tray 3 Pick sensor activation until the Deskew sensor activates.
Tray 2 Pick 2 3 Unused Unused
4-26
Paper Lead Edge Times (Continued)


4
Definition
Tray 2 Pick Interval (us)
Actions
Reports the interval from the time the engine software is commanded to start the tray 2 pick process until the Deskew sensor activates.
Tray 1 Pick 2 3 4 Unused Unused Tray 1 Interval (us) Reports the interval from the time the engine software is commanded to start the tray 1 pick process until the Deskew sensor activates.
Common 5 Stage Interval (us) Reports the interval from the time the engine software is commanded to start the stage process until the Preheat sensor activates. (part way through the stage paper motion). Reports the interval from the time the engine software is commanded to start the transfix process until the Strip sensor activates. (part way through the paper transfix motion). Reports the interval from the time the engine software is commanded to start the transfix process until the Exit sensor activates (part way through the paper transfix motion).
Transfix Interval (us)
Exit Interval (us)
Simplex Path
4-27
Paper Lead Edge Times (Continued)


8
Definition
Exited Interval (us)
Actions
Reports the interval from the time the engine software is commanded to start the exit process until the Exit sensor deactivates.
Paper Trail Edge Times

Paper is picked and moved through either the simplex or duplex paper path to determine the paper trailing edge arrival time at each paper path sensor. R values have alternate definitions or are unused depending on the pick tray and if simplex or duplex path was selected.
Actions
Common 0 Tray Reports the tray from which the test paper was picked. Reports the size of the picked paper.
Paper Size
Tray 4 Pick 2 Tray 4 Pick Trailing Edge Interval (us) Reports the interval from the time the engine software is commanded to start the tray 4 pick process until the Tray 4 Pick sensor deactivates.
Tray 3 Pick 3 Tray 3 Pick Trailing Edge Interval (us) Reports the interval from the time the engine software is commanded to start the tray 3 pick process until the Tray 3 Pick sensor deactivates.
Tray 2 Pick 2 Unused
4-28
Paper Trail Edge Times (Continued)


3
Definition
Unused
Actions
Tray 1 Pick 2 3 Unused Unused
Common 4 Deskew Trailing Edge Interval (us) Reports the interval from the time the engine software is commanded to start the transfix process until the Deskew sensor deactivates. (part way through the paper transfix motion). Reports the interval from the time the engine software is commanded to start the transfix process until the Preheat sensor deactivates. (part way through the paper transfix motion). Reports the interval from the time the engine software is commanded to start the exit process until the Strip sensor deactivates (part way through the paper exit motion).
Preheat Trailing Edge Interval (us)
Strip Trailing Edge Interval (us)
Simplex Path 7 Exit Trailing Edge Interval (us) Reports the interval from the time the engine software is commanded to start the duplex pick process until the Exit sensor deactivates.
4-29
Paper Sensor Bounce Times

Paper is picked and moved through either the simplex paper path to determine the paper trailing edge bounce interval at each paper path sensor. R values have alternate definitions or are unused depending on the pick tray and if simplex or duplex path was selected.
Actions
Common 0 Tray Reports the tray from which the paper was picked. Reports size of the picked paper.
Paper Size
Tray 4 Pick 2 Tray 4 Pick Bounce Interval (us) Reports the interval during which the Tray 4 Pick sensor bounces following the passage of the paper trailing edge.
Tray 3 Pick 3 Tray 3 Pick Bounce Interval (us) Reports the interval during which the Tray 3 pick sensor bounces following the passage of the paper trailing edge.
Tray 2 Pick 2 3 unused unused
Tray 1 Pick 2 3 unused unused
Common 4 Deskew Bounce Interval (us) Reports the interval during which the Deskew sensor bounces following the passage of the paper trailing edge.
4-30
Paper Sensor Bounce Times (Continued)

Paper is picked and moved through either the simplex paper path to determine the paper trailing edge bounce interval at each paper path sensor. R values have alternate definitions or are unused depending on the pick tray and if simplex or duplex path was selected.

5
Definition
Preheat Bounce Interval (us)
Actions
Reports the interval during which the Preheat sensor bounces following the passage of the paper trailing edge. Reports the interval during which the Strip sensor bounces following the passage of the paper trailing edge. Reports the interval during which the exit sensor bounces following the passage of the paper trailing edge.
Strip Bounce Interval (us)
Exit Bounce Interval (us)
Duplex Paper Drive Power

Test picks paper from selected tray (test currently supports picking from Tray 2 only) and moves it through either the simplex or duplex paper path to determine paper path power requirements.

0
Definition
Tray
Actions
Reports the tray from which the test paper was picked. Reports the size of the picked paper.
Paper Size
2 3 4
Unused Unused Tray 2 Pick Average Power (watts) Reports average of the power over the pick interval (begin pick to Deskew sensor).
4-31
Duplex Paper Lead Edge Times

R#
8
Definition
Duplex Turnaround Interval (us)
Typical Value (8400)
Actions
Reports the interval from the time the engine software is commanded to start the duplex exit process until the Strip sensor deactivates. Reports the interval from the time the engine software is commanded to start the duplex pick process until the Deskew sensor activates Reports the interval from the time the engine software is commanded to start the stage process until the Preheat sensor activates (part way through the stage paper motion). Reports the interval from the time the engine software is commanded to start the transfix process until the Strip sensor activates (part way through the paper transfix motion). Reports the interval from the time the engine software is commanded to start the transfix process until the Exit sensor activates (part way through the paper transfix motion). Reports the interval from the time the engine software is commanded to start the exit process until the Exit sensor deactivates.
Duplex Pick Interval (us)
10
Duplex Stage Interval (us)
11
Duplex Transfix Interval (us)
12
Duplex Exit Interval (us)
13
Duplex Exited Interval (us)
4-32
Duplex Paper Trail Edge Times


7
Definition
Exit Trailing Edge Interval (us)
Actions
Reports the interval from the time the engine software is commanded to start the duple pick process until the Exit sensor deactivates. Reports the interval from the time the engine software is commanded to start the transfix process until the Deskew sensor deactivates (part way through the paper transfix motion). Reports the interval from the time the engine software is commanded to start the transfix process until the Preheat sensor deactivates. (part way through the paper transfix motion). Reports the interval from the time the engine software is commanded to start the exit process until the Strip sensor deactivates (part way through the paper exit motion). Reports the interval from the time the engine software is commanded to start the duplex pick process until the Exit sensor deactivates.
Duplex Deskew Trailing Edge Interval (us)
Duplex Preheat Trailing Edge Interval (us)
10
Duplex Strip Trailing Edge Interval (us)
11
Duplex Exit Trailing Edge Interval (us)
4-33
Duplex Paper Sensor Bounce Times

Paper is picked and moved through either the duplex paper path to determine the paper trailing edge bounce interval at each paper path sensor. R values have alternate definitions or are unused depending on the pick tray and if simplex or duplex path was selected.

7
Definition
Exit Bounce Interval (us)
Actions
Reports the interval during which the Exit sensor bounces following the passage of the paper trailing edge during duplex turnaround. Reports the interval during which the Deskew sensor bounces following the passage of the paper trailing edge. Reports the interval during which the Preheat sensor bounces following the passage of the paper trailing edge. Reports the interval during which the Strip sensor bounces following the passage of the paper trailing Reports the interval during which the Exit sensor bounces following the passage of the paper trailing edge.
Duplex Deskew Bounce Interval (us)
Duplex Preheat Bounce Interval (us)
10
Duplex Strip Bounce Interval (us)
11
Duplex Exit Bounce Interval (us)
4-34
Check Drive Menu

Wiper Drive
This test moves the wiper drive mechanism through the complete range of its motion in each direction and does an on the fly reversal to verify operability.

0
Definition
Up Motion Drive Error (uin) 120 to 275

-.06 to -.4
Actions
Reports the average following error while move the wiper up from the low limit to the lock encounter point. Reports the difference between the max and min following error over the same interval. Reports the difference between the max and min limits of travel when moving up. Reports the distance up from the lower limit of travel at which the head lock latch is encountered. Reports the distance up from the lower limit of travel at which the head lock latch engages. Reports the peak following error at the point the latch engages. Reports the average following error while move the wiper up from the low limit to the lock encounter point. Reports the difference between the max and min following error over the same interval. Reports the difference between the max and min limits of travel when moving up. Reports the distance up from the upper stall point at which the head lock latch releases. Reports the peak following error at the point the latch releases
Up Motion Drive Error Ripple (uin)
35 to 150
.06 to .2
Up Distance (uin)
3200 to 4600
4000 to 4350
Lock Encounter Distance (uin)
1300 to 2500
3500 to 4450
Lock Engage Distance (uin)
350 to 700
2500 to 4500
Lock Engage Peak (uin) Down Motion Drive Error (uin)
-250 to -125 -250 to -125
.25 to 1.0
.25 to 1.0
Down Motion Drive Error Ripple (uin)
40 to 150
.05 to .8
Down Distance (uin)
3200 to 4600
4000 to 4350
Lock Disengage Distance (uin)
-2000 to -50
-95 to -60
10
Lock Disengage Peak (uin)
-800 to -150
.30 to 1.2
4-35
Wiper Drive (Continued)

This test moves the wiper drive mechanism through the complete range of its motion in each direction and does an on the fly reversal to verify operability.

11
Definition
Bottom Encounter Distance (uin) -2500 to -1800

-4250 to 3900
Actions
Reports the distance up from the upper limit of travel at which the wiper first encounters the lower travel limit. Reports the time following the start of the turnaround motion that the motion drive error return to normal in the opposite direction.
12
Turnaround Recovery time (sec)
0.001 to 0.250
-0.05 to .35
Paper Path Drive

This test moves the gear train in one direction while capturing data, does a reversal to capture reversal transient data, then operates in the other direction.

0
Definition
Forward Drive Power Level (watts) Up Motion Drive Error Ripple (watts) Reverse Drive Power Level (watts) Down Motion Drive Error Ripple (watts) Swing Arm Transition Time (sec)

1.0 to 4.0
Actions
Reports the average drive power level in the foreword direction. Reports the average drive ripple level in the forward direction. Reports the average power in the reverse direction. Reports the average drive ripple in the forward direction. Reports the time that the lower portion of the paper path drive is disconnected while the swing arm transitions to the other drive position.
0 to 1.5
-4.0 to -1.0 0 to 1.5
.03 to .06
4-36
X-Axis Drive
This test drives the X-Axis motor in each directions until the printhead stalls into the stops and then moves the printhead into the clear and performs an on the fly reversal. The power profile is used to confirm operational goals.

0
Definition
Right Stall Power Level (watts) 5 to 10

.5 to 3.3
Actions
Reports the motor/drive electronics stall power. An abnormal level may indicate a motor/motor drive problem. Reports the distance between the left and right stall points. An abnormal value may indicate an problem that restricts the range of motion (pinched cable, etc.). Reports the average power required to move the printhead from the right hard stop to the left hard stop. An abnormal value may indicate a problem with the lead screw or printhead bearings (lubrication, etc.). Reports ripple in the power level needed to move the printhead from the right hard stop to the left hard stop. An abnormal value may indicate a problem with roughness in the drive mechanism or an interference with the printhead motion. Same as R2 except for the other direction of motion.
Left Right Distance (in)
0.32 to 0.48
-.15 to .5
Right Left Traverse Average Power Level (watts)
3.5 to 8.5
.5 to 1.55
Right Left Traverse Power Ripple (watts)
.20 to 1.8
-0.5 to 1.0
Left Right Traverse Power Average Level (watts) Left Right Traverse Power Ripple (watts) Turnaround Power Blip Width (watts)
4.0 to 8.5
.5 to 1.75
1.2 to 1.5
-.01 to .05 .02 to .11
Same as R3 except for the other direction of. motion. Reports the width of the momentary drop in the required drive power when the printhead motion is being reversed. An abnormal value may indicate an unusual amount of play in the drive mechanism.
4-37
Transfix Drive Slow and Transfix Drive Fast

With the drum turning at a constant velocity, the transfix roller is loaded against the drum, held for one revolution, then raised. The velocity with which the transfix roller is moved differs for the two tests.
R#
0
Definition
Time to first contact (sec)
Typical Fast
0.22 to 0.29
Value Slow
0.22 to 0.50
Actions
Reports the time from the load command to the engine until the drum indicates contact with the pressure roller. Reports the average Y-axis following error during the Roll With Transfix Roller Down interval.
Loaded average Yaxis following error (mpts) Loaded Yaxis following error ripple (mpts) Time to last contact (sec)
2600 to 4200
2600 to 3400
75 to 1200
150 to 1100
Reports the difference between the max and min Y-axis following errors during the Roll With Transfix Roller Down interval
.300 to 0.450
0.30 to 0.80
Reports the time from the unload command to the engine until the drum indicates no further contact.
4-38
Drum Maintenance Drive

With the Y-axis rotating, the drum maintenance unit is loaded against the drum for a short time in each configuration (roller and blade/blade only)

0
Definition
Time to blade first contact (sec) .01 to .35

.15 to .4
Actions
Reports the time from the load command to the engine until the drum indicates blade contact. Reports the time from the load command to the engine until the drum indicates roller contact. Reports the average Y-axis following error during the Roll With Both Loaded interval.
Time to roller first contact (sec)
.03 to 045
.2 to .50
Roller/Blade loaded average Y-axis following error (mpts) Roller/Blade loaded Y-axis following error ripple (mpts)
-700 to -250
-650 to -150
-50 to 300
0 to 600
Reports the difference between the max and the min Y-axis following error during the Roll With Both Loaded interval. Reports the average period of the Y-axis following error ripple during the Roll With Both Loaded interval. This variation would be due to the dmu roller rolling along the drum surface. Reports the number of Y-axis following error ripple peaks during the Roll With Both Loaded interval.
Roller Average Period (sec)
50 to 1600
-.05 to .05
Roller Revs
3 to 40
Roller Disengaged Time (sec)
-0.001 to 0.05
-.05 to 0.5
Reports the time from the unload roller command to the engine until the drum indicates no further roller contact. Reports the average Y-axis following error during the Roll With Blade Loaded interval.
Blade loaded average Y-axis following error (mpts) Blade loaded Y-axis following error ripple (mpts)
-160 to -50
-800 to -100
-0.001 to 0.50
115 to 900
Reports the difference between the max and the min Y-axis following error during the Roll With Blade Loaded interval.
4-39
Drum Maintenance Drive (Continued)

With the Y-axis rotating, the drum maintenance unit is loaded against the drum for a short time in each configuration (roller and blade/blade only)

9
Definition
Blade Disengaged Time (sec)

-0.05 to 0.05
Actions
Reports the time from the unload blade command to the engine until the drum indicates no further blade contact.
Tilt Drive
This test drives the printhead tilt mechanism through one cycle to determine if it is controllable and operating as expected.

0
Definition
Tilt Engage Cap Position (min) 10 to 600

50 to 550
Actions
Reports the distance from the cap Home position to the tilt cam engage point. Reports the distance around the tilt cam from the tilt engage position to the pre standby peak. Should be in degrees, but currently units/scaling are unverified. Reports the pm motor following error at the pre standby peak location. Reports the distance around the tilt cam from the tilt engage position to the post wipe peak. Should be in degrees, but currently units/scaling are unverified. Reports the pm motor following error at the post wipe peak location.
Pre Standby Peak Location ()
325 to 3100
-125 to 10
Pre Standby peak Magnitude (pm ticks)
-5100 to -500
-150 to -20
Post Wipe Peak Location ()
1400 to 4150
-450 to 150
Post Wipe peak Magnitude (pm ticks)
-4000 to -75
-130 to 25
4-40
Tray 2, Tray 3, Tray 4, Lift Plate Drive

This test raises the lift plate to verify motion and sensor operation. If the test is requested for a 525-sheet feeder that is not installed, an Option Not Detected message is generated.

0
Definition
Tray Configuration
Actions
Reports the tray status (present, plate not lifted, etc.). See Paper Path Status test for a description of the configuration encoding. Reports the highest peak during the first quarter of the lifting interval. Reports the interval between the initial power min (when the plate is not yet engaged), and the point where the lifting power becomes a constant. Reports the average power over the center of the lifting interval. Reports the interval from the motor start time until the required lift power starts to increase due to the initial contact with the nudger roller assembly. Reports the interval from the motor start time until plate lifted is indicated. Reports the average stall power during the overlifting interval
Start Peak Power (watts)
Slack Take-up Time (sec)
Average Lift Power (watts) Lift Contact Time (sec)
Lift Time (sec)
Stall Power (watts)
4-41
Check Drum Menu

Y-axis Encoder
Uses the sine and cosine sum data to determine the characteristics of the encoder disk and encoder sensors.

0
Definition
Sin Sum Data Offset (sin sum units) Sin Sum Data Amplitude (sin sum units) Amplitude Ripple (Sun Sum units) 150000 to 800000 -11000 to 350000 25 to 75

-68000 to 160000 -68000 to 160000 2.0 to 12
Actions
Reports average of the max and min Sin Sum average amplitude values. Reports difference between the max and min Sin Sum average amplitude values. Reports the ripple in the Sin Sum amplitude values. Excludes the neighborhood of the Home notch (a distance of +/- 50 samples from the Home notch min location. Reports the max variation in the reported delta position between samples over the revolution. Reports the max value of the diference between the rotation position of any adjacent sin sum peaks Reports the ratio between the notch bottom amplitude and the max amplitude value as reflected in the Sin Sum data. Reports the width of the Home notch at 99% full depth as reflected in the Sin Sum data. Reports the ratio of the Home notch width sections as bisected by a vertical from the notch min as reflected in the Sin Sum data. Reports average of the max and min Cosine Sum average amplitude values. Reports difference between the max and min Cosine Sum average amplitude values.
Max Position Ripple (mpts) Sin max delta position
-140000 to 275000 -.3 to 5
24000 to 52000 -.3 to 5
Home Notch Depth Ratio (none)
0 to 13
68 to 80
Home Notch Width (sec) Home Notch Symmetry (none)
50 to 90
720 to 960 35 to 65
250 to 550
Cosine Sum Data Offset (cosine sum units) Cosine Sum Data Amplitude (cosine sum units)
90000 to 450000 300000 to 500000
-125000 to 200000 300000 to 500000
4-42
Y-axis Geometry
Rotates the drum at a constant velocity and samples the Y-axis position. Uses the data to determine Y-axis motor and drum vibration and the most significant other vibrational frequencies.

0
Definition
Drum Normalized FFT Power (none)

-3900 to 6000
Actions
Reports the normalized FFT power amplitude of the drum frequency. The normalized value is generated by dividing the drum FFT power by 1.0xE13. Reports the current drum frequency. Reports the ration of the FFT power amplitude of the motor frequency to the FFT power amplitude of the drum frequency. Reports the current motor frequency. Reports the ratio of the FFT power amplitude of the most powerful FFT frequency (not including the drum or motor), to the FFT power amplitude of the drum frequency. Reports the frequency of the most powerful FFT frequency (not including the drum or motor). Reports the ratio of the FFT power amplitude of the second most powerful FFT frequency (not including the drum or motor), to the FFT power amplitude of the drum frequency. Reports the frequency of the second most powerful FFT frequency (not including the drum or motor).
Drum Frequency (hz) Motor FFT Power Ratio (none)
1.25 to 7.5 -200 to 250
Motor Frequency (hz) FFT Power Ratio 1 (none)
44 to 48
-20000 to 25000
Frequency 1 Frequency (hz)
45 to 110
FFT Power Ratio 2 (none)
-14000 to 17000
Frequency 2 Frequency (hz)
-70 to 140
4-43
Y-axis Drive
This procedure performs a 4 corner test using the minimum and maximum velocity and acceleration used during printing and minimum and maximum load for a total of eight test cycles. Measures servo response parameters under various conditions.

0
Definition
HAHVN CCW Average Fe (mpts) 4000 to 5700

4000 to 5800
Actions
Reports average following error during the last half of the first period. Reports following error ripple during the last half of the first period. Reports average following error during the last half of the second period. Reports following error ripple during the last half of the second period. Reports the time following the start of motion that it takes the following error value to enter the CCW ripple band. Reports the time following the start of motion reversing that it takes the following error value to enter the CW ripple band. Reports the time following the start of motion stopping that it takes the following error value to enter the idle ripple band. Reports the time following the start of motion that it takes the Yaxis delta velocity to enter the CCW delta velocity ripple band.
HAHVN CCW Fe Ripple (mpts)
100 to 380
0 to 500
HAHVN CW Average Fe (mpts)
-5200 to 3800
-5500 to -4000
HAHVN CW Fe Ripple (mpts)
80 to 380
75 to 350
HAHVN Start Fe Settle time (sec)
0.08 to 1.0
.05 to 0.2
HAHVN Reverse Fe Settle time (sec)
0.17 to 1.1
.12 to .3
HAHVN Stop Fe Settle time (sec)
-.001 to 0.15
-.001 to .30
HAHVN Delta Print Velocity Settle Time (sec)
0.02 to 0.10
0 to .11
4-44
Y-axis Belt Slip

This test does a chase using a special sheet of preprinted media and records the y-axis following error.

0
Definition
Initial Peak Y-axis FE (mpts) Max Following Peak Y-axis FE (mpts) 0 to 12000 0 to 11000

1200 to 8000 1100 to 7500
Actions
Reports the amplitude of the first Y-axis following error peak. Reports the amplitude of the maximum Y-axis FE peak after the first. Reports the average of the Y-axis following error during the roller down portion of the transfix operation.
Average Y-axis FE (mpts)
0 to 4000
2200 to 3500
Y-axis Belt Tension

This test modifies the y-Axis servo loop so that it is unstable and oscillates. The oscillation frequency is recorded while the drum is advanced for two revolutions. Checks for correct belt tension and for variations in tension during operation.

0
Definition
Min Resonant Frequency (hz) Max Resonant Frequency (hz) Min Resonant Frequency Revs (revs) Min Resonant Frequency Angle (deg) -0.001 to -0.2 10 to 150

4.5 to 175
Actions
Reports the min resonant frequency over the data set. Reports the max resonant frequency over the data set. Reports the number of full Y-axis revs required to locate the min frequency configuration.
175 to 3000
-4400 to 10000
-33 to -20
Reports the amount of additional Y-axis rotation required to locate the min frequency configuration.
4-45
Stripper Contact
This test holds the drum stationary while the stripper solenoid is activated and released. The drum servo error signal illustrates activation/deactivation timing and how strongly the drum was contacted by the blade.

0
Definition
Engage Displacement (mpts) -10 to 2

-15 to 8.0
Actions
Reports the static difference between the average ya_fe before and after the blade contacts the drum, indicating how strongly the blade is interacting with the drum while pushing onto the drum. May be an indication as to the condition of the blade (stiffness, dirty, bent, delaminated, etc.). Another potential factor could be the solenoid range of travel or engagement force (solenoid/ solenoid drive strength or return spring strength). Reports time between engagement of the stripper solenoid and initial contact between the blade and the drum. May indicate the geometry of the mechanism, such as parts out of tolerance, mis-assembled, or bent, causing an incorrect blade to drum gap. Reports time between stripper solenoid engagement and the point when the reaction of the drum to the contact of the blade fades back into the ripple (noise). Another indication of blade to drum interaction. The profile shape (R2/R2) could be a dynamic indication of the blade/ drum interaction as is the static value reported by R0. Reports the magnitude of the reaction of the drum to the contact of the blade. (See R2)
Engage Time (sec)
.0030 to .0035
0 to .05
Engaging Period (sec)
0 to 0.11
0 to .3
Engaging Amplitude (mpts)
3 to 18
5.0 to 35
4-46
Stripper Contact (Continued)

This test holds the drum stationary while the stripper solenoid is activated and released. The drum servo error signal illustrates activation/deactivation timing and how strongly the drum was contacted by the blade.

4
Definition
Release Displacement (mpts) -0.75 to 2.2

-4.5 to 4.5
Actions
Reports the static difference between the average ya_fe before and after the blade disengages from the drum, indicating the strength of the blade/drum interaction while pulling off the drum (see R0). Reports the time between the disengagement of the stripper sol and the point when the blade begins to withdraw from the drum (see R2). Reports the time between the disengagement of the stripper sol and the point when the reaction of the drum to the withdrawal of the blade fades back into the ripple (see R2). Reports the magnitude of the reaction of the drum to the blade withdrawal (see R3).
Release Time (sec)
0 to 0.09
.002 to .1
Releasing Period (sec)
0 to .001
-0.5 to .75
Releasing Amplitude (mpts)
-45 to 0
-10 to 1
Drum Maintenance Contact

This test uses the drum servo error signal to indicate when the drum is contacted by the roller blade.

0
Definition
Initial Contact Position (pm motor counts)
Actions
Reports the distance the pm motor was moved (raising the dm unit), before a Y-axis reaction was detected. Shows that the dm is raising, provides blade/drum gap information.
4-47
Check Motors Menu

Y-Axis Motor
This test turns on the Y-axis motor and runs it very slowly for one revolution.

0
Definition
Motor fe ripple (ticks) 0.08 to 0.60

.07 to .7
Actions
Reports amount of variation of the motor following error over the recording interval. Reports the motor following error average value of the recording interval. Reports amount of variation of the motor drive voltage over the recording interval. Reports average value of motor drive voltage over the recording interval. Reports variation of motor drive power over the recording interval. Reports average value of motor drive power over the recording interval.
Motor fe average (ticks)
0.5 to 0.7
.5 to .8
Motor drive voltage ripple (volts)
0.34 to 1.3
.3 to 1.5
Motor drive voltage (volts)
-1.4 to -0.8
-1.6 to -.8
Motor drive power ripple (watts). Motor drive power average (watts)
0.25 to 1.8 1.25 to 2.6
.06 to .13
1.3 to 2.5
X-Axis Motor
This test turns on the X-axis motor and runs it very slowly for one revolution.

0
Definition
Motor Voltage A Ripple (volts). 84 to 86

59 to 62
Actions
Reports amount of variation of the motor phase A drive voltage over the recording interval. Reports the motor phase A drive voltage average value over the recording interval.
Motor Voltage A Average (volts)
-0.120 to 0.13
.10 to .05
4-48
X-Axis Motor
This test turns on the X-axis motor and runs it very slowly for one revolution.

2
Definition
Motor Voltage B Ripple (volts) 84 to 86

59 to 62
Actions
Reports amount of variation of the motor phase B drive voltage over the recording interval. Reports the motor phase B drive voltage average value over the recording interval. Reports amount of variation of the motor drive power over the recording interval. Reports the motor drive power average value of the recording interval.
Motor Voltage B Average (volts)
-.012 to 0.1
.04 to .11
Motor Drive Power Ripple (watts)
0.5 to 2.0
.1 to .5
Motor Drive Power Average (watts)
9 to 13
5.5 to 7.5
Process Motor
This test turns on the process motor and runs it very slowly for one revolution.

0
Definition
Motor fe ripple (ticks) 2.8 to 6.0

0 to .02
Actions
Reports amount of variation of the motor following error over the recording interval. Reports the motor following error average value of the recording interval. Reports amount of variation of the motor drive voltage over the recording interval. Reports the motor drive voltage average value of the recording interval. Reports amount of variation of the motor drive power over the recording interval.
-4 to 3.0
.015 to .01
5 to 11
8 to 11
1.3 to 2.3
.9 to 1.5
Motor drive power ripple (watts)
1.03 to 3.6
.7 to 2.0
4-49
Process Motor
This test turns on the process motor and runs it very slowly for one revolution.

5
Definition
Motor drive power average (watts) 1.5 to 3.5

1.2 to 2.75
Actions
Reports the motor drive power average value of the recording interval.
Media Path Motor

This test turns on the media path motor and runs it very slowly for one revolution.

0
Definition
Motor fe ripple (ticks) .40 to 1.3

.001 to .0035
Actions
Reports amount of variation of the motor following error over the recording interval. Reports the motor following error average value of the recording interval. Reports amount of variation of the motor drive voltage over the recording interval. Reports the motor drive voltage average value of the recording interval. Reports amount of variation of the motor drive power over the recording interval. Reports the motor drive power average value of the recording interval.
0.8 to 2.0
.0033 to .007
4 to 10
4 to 8
-5.5 to 2.0
-5 to -2.0
0.8 to 6
.8 to 3.9
Motor drive power average (watts)
1.9 to 7
2 to 8
4-50
Tray 2, Tray 3, Tray 4, Lift Motor

his test turns on the specified motor and runs it at constant velocity for approximately 20 revolutions while recording drive data. The test is the same for each motor. Requesting a test for a 525-sheet feeder that is not installed will generate an Option Not Detected message.

0
Definition
Motor Peak Power (watts) Motor Average Power (watts) 1 to 2.5
Actions
Reports max amount of motor power over the run interval. Reports the average motor drive power over the last half of the run interval. Reports the average motor brake power over the stop with brake interval.
.25 to .55
Brake Average Power (watts)
.10 to .20
Tray 3 and Tray 4 Pick/Feed Motor

This test turns on the specified motor and runs it at constant velocity for approximately 25 revolutions while recording drive data. The test is the same for each motor. Requesting a test for a 525-sheet feeder that is not installed will generate an Option Not Detected message.

0
Definition
Motor fe ripple (ticks)
Actions
Reports amount of variation of the motor following error over the recording interval. Reports the motor following error average value of the recording interval. Reports amount of variation of the motor drive voltage over the recording interval. Reports the motor drive voltage average value of the recording interval. Reports amount of variation of the motor drive power over the recording interval.
4-51
Tray 3 and Tray 4 Pick/Feed Motor (Continued)

This test turns on the specified motor and runs it at constant velocity for approximately 25 revolutions while recording drive data. The test is the same for each motor. Requesting a test for a 525-sheet feeder that is not installed will generate an Option Not Detected message.

5
Definition
Motor drive power average (watts)
Actions
Reports motor drive power average value over the recording interval.
4-52
Check Misc Menu

Paper Path Status
This test looks at the paper path sensors to identify if anything would prevent a page from printing. The Control Panel will display messages indicating if anything unexpected is found for: R0 = upper paper path; R1 = tray 1; R2 = tray 2; R3 = tray 3; and R4 = tray 4. The display is a string of 0s and 1s (one digit for each sensor state) and is listed below from most significant bit to least significant bit. 1 = an item that needs to be corrected. 0 = normal

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 2, 3, 4 2, 3, 4 2, 3, 4 2, 3, 4 2, 3, 4 2, 3, 4 Tray 2, Tray 3 and Tray 4 Tray 1
Definition
Upper Paper Path
Actions
6 -31 Not used, always 0 5 - Front door open 4 - Top door open 3 - Paper at deskew sensor 2 - Paper at preheat exit sensor 1 - Paper at strip sensor 0 - Paper at exit sensor 14 - 31 unused, always 0 13 - No media present 0 - 12 width value 9 - 31 unused
8 - No tray 7 - No paper 6 - plate not lifted 5 - Paper at tray pick sensor 4 - media length top
4-53
Paper Path Status (Continued) This test looks at the paper path sensors to identify if anything would prevent a page from printing. The Control Panel will display messages indicating if anything unexpected is found for: R0 = upper paper path; R1 = tray 1; R2 = tray 2; R3 = tray 3; and R4 = tray 4. The display is a string of 0s and 1s (one digit for each sensor state) and is listed below from most significant bit to least significant bit. 1 = an item that needs to be corrected. 0 = normal
2, 3, 4 2, 3, 4 2, 3, 4 2, 3, 4
Definition
Actions
3 - media length bottom 2 - Media width top 1 - media width middle 0 - Media width bottom
Temperature Status
This test scans the thermocouples and reports data on the current temperature with the goal of providing a picture of the current temperature state of the printer. All degrees are reported in celsius.

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Definition
Reservoir Temp Left Jetstack Right Jetstack Preheater Temp Drum Temp Ink Melt 1 Temp Ink Melt 2 Temp Ink Melt 3 Temp ~127.7o ~134o ~134o ~62o ~60o ~50o ~50o ~50o

~135.0o ~138o ~138o ~70 ~60o ~50o ~50o ~50o
Actions
Reports the current temperature Reports the current temperature Reports the current temperature Reports the current temperature Reports the current temperature Yellow (usually off) Cyan (usually off) Magenta (usually off)
4-54
Temperature Status (Continued)

This test scans the thermocouples and reports data on the current temperature with the goal of providing a picture of the current temperature state of the printer. All degrees are reported in celsius.

8
Definition
Ink Melt 4 Temp ~50o

~50o
Actions
Black (usually off)
Purge Pump
This test determines if the purge pump system (pump/hose/purge valve/printhead) is operating normally.

0
Definition
Jetstack Temperature (deg) ~134o

~138o
Actions
Reports current jetstack temperature. If the temperature is above current threshold (120 deg), the test will abort and following results will report as 0. This avoids having ink extrude out of the faceplate and onto the drum, requiring both a wipe and a chase to clean up. Reports initial peak pumping power after pump power on. This reflects the inrush current to the pump motor. An unusual value could indicate a defective motor (windings/brushes/etc.). Reports minimum pumping power after start up peak (R1). This is the first value to reflect the system pressure. If the volume is normal (hose/printhead), then the drop is large and the pressure rises slowly. If the volume is small (hose pinched plugged near the pump), then the drop is minimal and the pressure rises quickly
Start Power (watts)
Initial Pumping Power (watts)
4-55
Purge Pump (Continued)

This test determines if the purge pump system (pump/hose/purge valve/printhead) is operating normally.

3
Definition
Max Pressure Pumping Power
Actions
Reports average pumping power just before maximum pressure is reached. May indicate the efficiency of the pump, leaks, and/or the setting of the pressure relief valve. Reports the time from pump on until the pressure relief valve opens. May indicate the conditions discussed in R3, as well as the system volume. Reports the average pumping power after the pressure has fully decayed. May indicate pump motor condition/efficiency. Reports the time between purge valve opening and the point when the pumping power (relative to the current pressure), fades back into the ripple of the no pressure pumping power (see the R5 discussion above). This time could indicate the operation of the purge valve and the condition of the bleed orifice (plugged, etc.).
Pumping Time To Max (sec)
No Pressure Pumping Power (watts)
Pressure Decay Time (sec)
Voltages
This test determines averaged readings for key system voltages.
Actions
Main Board Voltages 0 1 5 Volts (volts) 1.8 Volts (volts) ~5V ~1.8V ~5V ~1.8V
4-56
Voltages (Continued)
This test determines averaged readings for key system voltages.

2 3 4
Definition
2.5 Volts (volts) 3.3 Volts (volts) unregulated12 Volts (volts) 2.5 Volts (volts) unregulated Negative 12 Volts (volts) ~2.5V +/-2.5% +/- 20%

~2.5V +/-2.5% +/- 20%
Actions
5 6
~ 2.5 +/- 20%
~ 2.5 +/- 20%
Control Board Voltages 7 8 9 10 DC Power (watts) 50 Volts Negative 50 Volts Unregulated Negative 15 Volts Unregulated 15 Volts AC Volts 120 Volts AC Volts 240 Volts 47 to 52 -47 to 52 -11 to 16.5 11 to 17 90 to 140 180 to 275 47 to 52 -47 to 52 -11 to 16.5 11 to 17 90 to 140 180 to 275
11 12
Wiper Alignment

0
Definition
The engage wiper position (min) Upper hard stop wiper position (min)

50 to 400
Actions
Reports the distance from wipe home to the tilt engage position. Reports the distance from wipe to home to the upper hard stop.
2000 to 5000
4-57
Drum Maint/Transfix Home

This test drives the process motor a short distance in each direction to verify that the dmfix drive unit was in its home position.

0
Definition
DM Initial FE Peak (pm motor counts)
Actions
Reports the height of the initial peak when starting rotation of the dm drive gear. Reports the time since the start of CCW motion until the peak was detected. Reports the height of the initial peak when starting rotation of the tf drive gear. Reports the time since the start of CW motion until the peak was detected.
DM Initial FE Peak Time (sec)
TF Initial FE Peak (pm motor counts)
TF Initial FE Peak Time (sec)
4-58
Electronics Troubleshooting
Printer Power-Up Sequence
The following lists the chain of events that occur when you turn on a printer. You can follow this list as one means of determining if the printer is operating correctly. The exact chain of events depends upon the last power down condition and where the printer has last determined the printhead is positioned, this is stored in non-volatile RAM. The Electronics Troubleshooting Checklist is the primary reference for troubleshooting power-up problems. 1. Power cord is plugged in and the power switch is turned on: 2. Power supply senses AC line voltage conditions (110 VAC or 220 VAC) and enables DC voltages. If an overload occurs, the printer turns off the high voltage DC supplies, causing a blink effect on the Control Panel LEDs. 3. BIST test flashes the PE LED very briefly at a fast rate until the end of the next test. 4. The Boot loader performs CPU initialization and RAM test. It then sends the boot loader version to the serial port. 5. Power-On Self Test (POST) initializes the Control Panel. The Control Panel LED turns red, green, orange, and then off. The Control Panel LCD then goes black and then clear. The POST version displays on the LCD and waits two seconds. During this time the operator can press the Back button to bypass the remaining POST test. 6. Low level Power-On Self Test (POST) diagnostics are performed. The Control Panel displays status messages as each sub-test is performed. This test takes about 8 seconds. All LEDs are off during the test. If POST diagnostics pass, the Control Panel displays the Xerox logo and turns on the green LED. If the test detects an error, the error message displays on the LCD and the printer flashes the LEDs with a repeating error code pattern. 7. The VxWorks operating system is initialized and engine code is started. This takes about 15 seconds. The Xerox logo is displayed. 8. Print Engine Self Test (PEST) diagnostics are then performed. These test the heaters, clutches, motors and solenoids. As each clutch is tested, you hear clicking with four high tones as each motor is tested. This test takes about 30 seconds. 9. The printer now runs the mechanical initialization. The exact sequence depends on the initial position of the printhead and wiper assembly.
4-59
4-60
Start Mechanical Recovery Mechanical Recovery POWER ON
Set FIRMWARE states: CapState = UNKNOWN Head Tilt State = UNKNOWN DmfixState = UNKNOWN YaState = HOMELESS Xa State = HOMELESS
Start the Thermals 13,xxx
Unbind Media Path Motor and Home the MPT 31,000 Home the Y-Axis 5001, 5004
Values in the NVRAM are used to determine if printhead and wiper have contact or if the head was parked on last power down. If printhead and wiper are in contact, the printhead warms first before moving. If the printhead was parked, the printhead is warm before moving to the print position. The dashed line traces what happens if the printhead was parked on last power down. The RED numbers indicate errors that may be displayed at that point in the mech init process.
Mechanical Initialization (8400)
Wait for the Head to read OK_TO_WIPE Temperatures 13.xxx YES Is the head tilt Cam engaged (head tilted?)
Home XA 6000 NO Home the CAP/wiper without disengaging the Head Tilt Cam 8005, 8007, 8008, 8009
Move XA to HEAD TILT POSITION 6000
s8500-029
RECOVERY ROUTINE
YES
YES
_head Parked On? Last Power Down?
NO NO
Move Head to the Standby position. 7007, 7008, 8005, 8055, 8007, 7006, 8008, 8009 Move XA to Left Side Hard Stop 6000
Try to recover from Process Motor Stall
Home Dmfix 7002 Did the Process Motor Devise Fault?
Home XA 6000 Move XA to Left Side Hard Stop 6000
YES
Move Cap/Wiper to the Park ARMS- and restrain head again. 8035,7009
Device Fault Codes
Jog the X Axis in order to release the Head Tilt Arms.

Move Head to the PARK position, 7007, 7008, 8005, 8055, 8007, 7006, 8008, 8009, 7014 If not in non-thermals Oil Drum 4 times DONE
Move XA to Tilt Position 6000 Move Head to the Home/ Print position 7010, 7006 Start YA Slew 5003 Rehome XA 6000
NO
Move XA to Tilt Position 6000
Jog the X Axis in order to release the Head Tilt Arms.
80xx - Wiper 7002 - PM stalled 70xx - Headtilt 7014 - Head Not Restrained 31001 - Media Path 5001 - YA Home Timer 5002 - YA Encoder (Stall) 6000 - XA Error 4025 - PM Init Failed (home Dmfix) 4024 - Wiper Alignment Failed 8021 - Pump Uninitialized
home Dmfix again 4025
Others..... - Thermal Faults, ECM Faults, HC, PM Faults oiling drum
Warmup will be responsible for moving the head to the print position after the wipe and purge are performed.
s8500-030
4-61
4-62
Mechanical Recovery POWER ON Start Mechanical Recovery Start the thermals. 13,xxx Set FIRMWARE states: CapState = UNKNOWN HeadTiltState = UNKNOWN DmfixState = UNKNOWN YaState = HOMELESS Unbind Media Path Motor and HOME the MPT 31,001 Home the Y-Axis 5001, 5004 Wait for head to read OK_TO_WIPE temperatures 13,xxx Yes Home XA and move XA to the HEADTILT position 6000 No Is the head tilt CAM engaged (head tilted?) Values in NVRAM are used to determine if printhead and wiper have contact or if the printhead was parked on last power down. If printhead and wiper are in contact, the printhead warms first before moving the wiper. The BLUE line traces what happens if printhead was parked on last power down. NOTE: Headtilt CAM will be engaged when the printhead is in the PARKED (restrained) position. The RED numbers indicate errors that may be displayed at that point in the process. Engage the Headtilt Solenoid Use the Headtilt Solenoid and tilt the head to Standby 7007, 7006, 7008, 8005, 8055, 8007, 8008, 8009 Move the wiper and the head to determine if the head is fully restrained or not. This will allow the head to tilt to the standby position so the wiper can be homed. 7007, 7006 Home the CAP/wiper without disengaging the Head Tilt CAM 8005, 8007, 8008, 8009
MECHANICAL RECOVERY
Mechanical Initialization (8500/8550)
Close preheater
s8500-137
Yes _headParkedOn LastPowerDown? Yes No RECOVERY ROUTINE Try to recover from Process Motor Stall Yes Home XA 6000 Move XA to Left Side Hard Stop 6000 No Move XA to Tilt Position 6000 homeDmfix again 4025
Move Cap/Wiper to the PARK ARMS - and restrain head again. 8035, 7009
homeDmfix 7002 Did the Process Motor Device Fault? No Device Fault Codes Move Head to the Standby position, 7007, 7006, 7008, 8005, 8055, 8007, 8008, 8009 Move XA to Left Side Hard Stop 6000 Move XA to Tilt position 6000 Move Head to the Home/Print position 7006, 7010 Start YA SLEW 5004 Rehome XA 6000 Jog the X Axis in order to release the HeadTilt Arms. Jog the X Axis in order to release the HeadTilt Arms. Move Head to the PARK position, 7007, 7008, 8005, 8055, 8007, 8008, 8009, 7014 Warmup will be responsible for moving the head to the print position after the wipe and purge are performed. After the printer is warm, the head will tilt to the print position and Oil Drum 4 times DONE s8500-138
80xx - Wiper 8021 - Pump Not Inited 7009 - Wiper Alignment 7002 - PM stalled 70xx - Headtilt 7006 - Headtilt Solenoid 7014 - Head Not Restrained 31001 - Media Path 5001 - Ya Home Timer 5004 YA - General Motion Error 6000 - XA Error 4025 - PM Init Failed (homeDmfix) 4024 - Wiper Alignment Failed Others... - Thermal faults, ECM Faults, HC, PM faults oiling drum
4-63
If the printer was not shutdown by the power switch the last time it was turned off or it was shutdown with ink on the drum:
1. As soon as the printer has warmed up, the media path motor moves the wiper to the bottom of its travel and the process motor moves the printhead to the print position a chase page is sent through the paper path to clean ink from the drum.
If printhead, ink reservoirs, or jetstack temperature are below purge threshold, the printer performs a head clean cycle.
1. The printer waits for the printhead to reach its purge temperature. 2. The printer moves the wiper to the bottom of its travel and tilts the printhead forward to its print position to check the ink levels. If the ink level is low, ink is melted into the appropriated reservoirs. 3. The printhead tilts to the standby position and moves the wiper assembly to the purge position in front of the printhead faceplate. 4. The purge pump begins the pressure purge after about 2 seconds the purge pump solenoid opens. 5. The printhead tilts forward against the wiper assembly (wipe position) and the purge and wipe cycle begins. 6. The Control Panel indicates the printer is performing the cleaning process. 7. The printhead is moved left to the tilt zone, where the printhead can tilt back without interference, and the media path motor moves the wiper to the bottom of its travel to engage the printhead tilt cam. The process motor rotates the printhead tilt gears, which tilt in order to move the printhead to the forward print position. 8. After the print engine is in a known, valid state the Control Panel display shows the warm-up progress (the Ready LED flashes). When warm-up completes, the Ready LED displays solid. 9. The temperature of the printhead, drum and paper preheater are allowed to stabilize at their operating temperatures and ink is melted if needed. 10. The printhead is homed to the print position for printing. 11. A cleaning page is printed at this time, if a purge was performed. 12. A start page is printed (if enabled). 13. The Control Panel displays a message that the printer is initializing and then ready. 14. The print engine is initialized and is ready to print.
4-64
Miscellaneous Electrical Troubleshooting

The electronics module contains the Power Supply, Image Processor board and the Power Control board. If a component of the electronics module fails, and service is necessary, the entire electronics module is replaced as a unit. No individual board troubleshooting is required. The printer contains many self test routines to aid in diagnosing problems. Note If the printer encounters certain fault conditions, the printer may reboot up to three times before displaying an error code. This is an attempt to correct the problem and reduce the number of unnecessary service calls. Following the suggested debug procedures, the specified sequence generally provides better test coverage than performing tests in a different order.
Error Message Displayed on Control Panel LCD

Printer has detected a fault condition. 1. See "Fault Code Error Message Troubleshooting" on page 3-9 for definitions and solutions.
LCD Is Blank and the PS and PE Indicators Are Flashing an Error Code
Printer has detected a fault condition but can't display a message on the LCD. Some portion of the chain of devices used to drive the LCD may be defective since an error message is not displayed. 1. See "Fault Code Error Message Troubleshooting" on page 3-9 for definitions and solutions.
Printer Fails to Power-Up: PS, PE and the 3.3 V Indicator LEDs Are Not Illuminated
1. Printer is not receiving proper AC. Note Use caution with hazardous voltages when diagnosing AC problems. The 3.3 V LED is located INSIDE the electronics module and must be observed through the vent holes close to the AC power switch, see the illustration on page 4-75. a. Inspect the power cord. b. Verify AC outlet voltage and current capacities are within specifications. c. If necessary, move the printer to a different outlet and retest.
4-65
2. Transient on AC line tripped protective circuitry in printer power supply. a. Cycle power to printer to reset protective circuits in power supply. 3. Short circuit on 3.3 V power supply within the electronics module. ESD damage to the printer may occur if static electricity is discharged to printer electronics a. With power cord connected, touch the metal electronics module to discharge any static electricity. b. Turn off printer and wait 30 seconds for power supply capacitors to discharge. Damage to circuits within the electronics module may occur if the power supply capacitors are not allowed to fully discharge. c. Unplug power cord and remove printer's covers. Caution Use caution around motors, pulleys and live AC connections when working with the printer covers off. d. Unplug the following electronics module connectors: This step removes all other circuits so the electronics module can be tested alone.

Power Control to I/O board (J800) Power Control right (J400) Preheater solenoid (interconnect cable) Printhead tilt gear solenoid (interconnect cable) Printhead data (J130) Waveamp signal (J790) Power Control left (J390) Y-Axis motor (J280)
e. Plug in power cord and turn on power to the printer f. If the PE and PS indicators do not flash momentarily, the short is inside the electronics module. Replace the electronics module and retest the printer. If PE and PS indicators flash, continue with debug. g. Plug in all cables removed during service. h. Trace through all service steps performed to reattach any cables that were unplugged during debugging. i. Attach printer covers. j. Perform full test of printer. 4. Short circuit on 3.3 V power supply within the I/O board. a. REQURIED: Follow all procedures from Step 3 before proceeding with these steps. The I/O board needs to be isolated from other systems in the printer to be effectively tested. b. Turn off printer and wait 30 seconds for power supply capacitors to discharge. Damage to circuits within the electronics module may occur if the power supply capacitors are not allowed to fully. c. Unplug the Control Panel connector (J220) on the I/O board. This removes the Control Panel from the I/O board.
4-66
d. Plug in the Power Control to I/O board connector (J800). This step adds the I/O board back to the working electronics module - nothing else is connected. e. Turn on power to the printer 5. If the PE and PS indicators do not flash momentarily, the short is on the I/O board or related cabling. Skip the rest of this section if the PE and PS indicators flash because the problem is elsewhere in the printer. a. Verify short is on the I/O board by using an ohmmeter to check the resistance on J270, pin 1 to ground. Resistance of less than 1K ohm indicates a problem. b. To isolate problem to I/O board or related cabling, unplug I/O board connectors:

Umbilical Right J1 Waste Tray Sense J110 Stripper Solenoid J250 Paper Tray Sense J610 Front Door Sense J600 Inkload Signal J910 DMU Sense J860 Drum Thermistor J870 Exit Module J680 Heater Relay Control J950
c. Retest the resistance of the I/O board. If the resistance is still less than 1K ohm, replace the I/O board, reinstall all cables and retest printer. d. If the I/O board resistance is OK, plug in the I/O board connectors one at a time and retest the resistance. e. Plug in all cables removed during service. f. Trace through all service steps performed to reattach any cables that were unplugged during debugging. g. Attach printer covers. h. Perform full test of printer. 6. Short circuit on 3.3 V power supply within the Control Panel. a. REQUIRED: Follow all procedures from Step 3 and Step 4 before proceeding. b. With power cord connected, touch the metal electronics module to discharge any static electricity. c. Turn off printer and wait 30 seconds for power supply capacitors to discharge. Damage to circuits within the electronics module may occur if the power supply capacitors are not allowed to fully discharge. d. Plug in the Control Panel connector J220 on the I/O board. This step adds the Control Panel back to a working electronics module and I/O board in order to see if the short circuit is also removed. e. Turn on power to the printer.
4-67
f.
If the PE and PS indicators do not flash momentarily, the short is on the Control Panel. Replace the Control Panel and retest the printer. Skip the rest of this section if the PE and PS indicators flash because the problem is elsewhere in the printer. g. Plug in all cables removed during service. h. Trace through all service steps performed to re-attach any cables that were unplugged during debugging. i. Attach printer covers. j. Perform full test of printer.
7. Short circuit on 3.3 V power supply within the printhead. a. REQURIED: Follow all procedures from 'Short circuit on 3.3 V power supply within the electronics module' before proceeding. The following procedure relies on a working electronics module to determine if the printhead is causing a short circuit. b. With power cord connected, touch the metal electronics module to discharge any static electricity. ESD damage to the printer may occur if static electricity is discharged to printer electronics. c. Turn off printer and wait 30 seconds for power supply capacitors to discharge. Damage to circuits within the electronics module may occur if the power supply capacitors are not allowed to fully discharge. d. Plug in the printhead interface connector (J130) to the electronics module. This step adds the Control Panel back to a working electronics module and I /O board in order to see if the short circuit is also removed. e. Turn on power to the printer. f. If the PE and PS indicators do not flash momentarily, the short is on the printhead. Replace the printhead and retest the printer. Skip the rest of this section if the PE and PS indicators flash because the problem is elsewhere in the printer. g. Carefully test the printer to ensure damage to the electronics module did not occur due to the shorted printhead. h. Plug in all cables removed during service. i. Trace through all service steps performed to reattach any cables that were unplugged during debugging. j. Attach printer covers. k. Perform full test of printer.
4-68
Printer Is On and Can Print Pages, but the Control Panel Appears Frozen and No Error Messages Are Displayed
Note Opening and closing the front door of the printer causes a reset of the entire Control Panel. 1. Electrostatic Discharge. a. If the printer is currently powered on and frozen, open then close the front door of the printer and see if the LCD responds. b. If printer appears functional after operating the door, advise client that failure may have been due to an ESD event. Thoroughly test printer for any other problems. c. Skip the rest of this section if printer now appears functional, otherwise continue debugging. d. With power cord connected, touch the metal electronics module to discharge any static electricity. ESD damage to the printer may occur if static electricity is discharged to printer electronics. e. Turn off printer and wait 30 seconds for power supply capacitors to discharge. Damage to circuits within the electronics module may occur if the power supply capacitors are not allowed to fully discharge. f. Unplug power cord and remove printer's covers. Use caution around motors, pulleys and live AC connections when working with the printer covers off. g. Examine printer for loose grounding connections, especially the ground strap on the Y-axis motor. Eliminate the possibility of internally generated ESD from affecting printer. h. Plug in all cables removed during service. Trace through all service steps performed to reattach any cables that were unplugged during debugging. i. Attach printer covers. j. Perform full test of printer. 2. Control Panel failure a. Unplug the original Control Panel at connector ('C' / J220) and plug in a known working Control Panel. This step checks for a keypad or LCD failure in the Control Panel. b. Plug in all cables removed during service. Trace through all service steps performed to reattach any cables that were unplugged during debugging. c. Attach printer covers. d. Perform full test of printer.
4-69
Printer Control Panel Is Functional, but Printer Won't Print Jobs Sent from Computer
1. Computer driver incorrect or improperly installed a. Verify printer hardware is functional by sending a test print via the printer Control Panel. b. If a test print is properly produced, continue to next steps, focusing on problems outside the printer (network, Ethernet, or computer driver configuration issues). c. If a test print is not properly produced, the focus of problems within the printer suggests that the internal settings are corrupt. d. Use a known functional computer to test printer using the printer's parallel port or USB port. If test computer successfully prints pages, review the version of driver, the installation and the settings of the customer's computer. Note Using the parallel or USB port eliminates any network complexities associated with an Ethernet port. e. If test computer is unsuccessful, continue with debug. 2. Customer network or printer's Ethernet port not properly configured. a. Please see "Testing Communications Ports" on page 4-82 for procedures related to communication problems. 3. Disconnect the printer from its network and see if the behavior continues. 4. Printer internal settings corrupted. a. On the Control Panel, use the Hidden Service Menu to reset NVRAM. b. Perform full test of printer.
Printer Resets Unexpectedly

1. Transient on AC line tripped reset circuitry in printer. a. Cycle power to ensure printer initializes during stable AC power. 2. Internal fault a. Record any error codes and report to Xerox Office Group. If the printer detects an error, the printer will attempt to reboot and re initialize (up to three times) to correct the problem. After the third cycle of rebooting, an error code displays on the LCD and flashes on the PS and PE indicators. 3. Disconnect the printer from its network, for a few hours if necessary, to see if the behavior continures.
4-70
Printer Fails to Enter ENERGY STAR Mode

1. Model not certified as an ENERGY STAR model. a. Use the Control Panel to enable Energy Star mode (Printer Setup -> Printer Control -> Select Power Saver Timeout). Some printers are not shipped as energy star compliant and don't have the power saving mode enabled by default. 2. Electronics module failure. a. REQUIRED: Follow all procedures from 'Model not certified as an Energy Star model' before proceeding. b. With power cord connected, touch the metal electronics module to discharge any static electricity. c. Turn off printer and wait 30 seconds for power supply capacitors to discharge. d. Unplug power cord and remove printer's covers. e. Replace the electronics module. f. Plug in all cables removed during service. g. Trace through all service steps performed to reattach any cables that were unplugged during debugging. h. Attach printer covers. i. Perform full test of printer.
Printer Reports Missing Maintenance Kit

1. Maintenance kit missing or not fully seated. a. Fully install maintenance kit. 2. Connector not fully seated. a. Check I/O board connector J860 for proper mating. 3. Ensure that the waste tray sensor is incorrectly installed at the end of the waste tray housing.
Printer Reports Missing Waste Tray

1. Waste tray missing or not fully seated. a. Fully install waste tray. 2. Connector not fully seated. a. Check I/O board connector J110 for proper mating.
4-71
Printer Optional Features Not Available

1. Printer configuration incorrect. a. Verify proper configuration of printer using Control Panel. 2. Computer print driver configured incorrectly. a. Examine print driver setup to ensure printer driver setup doesn't override desired features set via Control Panel. 3. Configuration card failure. a. Verify configuration card is properly oriented and fully inserted. b. Verify printer model purchased corresponds to features expected. c. Clean configuration card contacts with isopropyl alcohol, reinstall, and retest. d. Swap configuration card with a known working card. If printer works, replace card with one containing identical features as originally purchase. e. The configuration card enables certain optional features in the printer. Care must be taken to duplicate the features of the original printer when replacing the card.
525-Sheet Feeder Does Not Function

1. Thermal safety fuse blown. a. Power cycle printer. b. The safety fuse is a self resetting device. Power cycling ensures the fuse cools enough to reset itself. 2. 525-Sheet Feeder faulty. a. Turn off printer and wait 30 seconds for power supply capacitors to discharge. b. Replace 525-Sheet Feeder. c. Perform full test of printer.
Printer Is On (Electronics Module LEDs are Illuminated) but the Printer Cannot Print Pages and the Control Panel Appears Frozen and No Error Messages Are Displayed
1. Nonspecific electronics failure. a. Double check PS and PE indicators for any error code information. The printer self test is usually able to detect a failure that would cause this symptom. Looking up the error code may save debugging time. b. If the PS and PE indicators are steady and dimly-on, replace the electronics module, reassembly and retest printer. c. If the PS and PE indicators are blinking, brightly-on, or totally off, continue debugging. A dim but steady on condition indicates some firmware was not properly loaded into a logic circuit.
4-72
d. With power cord connected, touch the metal electronics module to discharge any static electricity. e. Turn off printer and wait 30 seconds for power supply capacitors to discharge. f. Unplug power cord and remove printer's covers. g. Unplug the following electronics module connectors:

Power Control to I/O board (J800) Power Control right (J400) Printhead data (J130) Waveamp signal (J790) Power Control left (J390) Y-Axis motor (J280)
h. This step removes all other circuits so the electronics module can be tested alone. i. Plug in power cord and turn on power to the printer. j. The PE and PS indicators should flash an error code reporting that the Control Panel is missing. If the proper error message is not flashed, replace the electronics module and retest the printer. If PE and PS indicators flash, continue with debug. k. Turn off printer and wait 30 seconds for power supply capacitors to discharge l. Unplug the following electronics module connectors:

Power Control to I/O board (J800) Power Control right (J400) Printhead data (J130) Waveamp signal ('J790) Power Control left (J390) Y-Axis motor (J280)
This step prevents any faults from the motors, clutches and sensors from preventing the I/O board and Control Panel from functioning. m. Plug in the I/O board connector ('P' / J800) in the electronics module. This step adds the I/O board and Control Panel to the electronics module. n. Turn on power to the printer. o. If the electronics module, I/O board and Control Panel are working, the error code 34,001.43 should be displayed on the LCD to indicate the printhead is disconnected. p. If the correct error code is not displayed, replace the Control Panel and I/O board and verify the correct error code appears on the LCD. Retest electronics module, I/O board, Control Panel combination. q. If the correct error code is displayed, continue with the next steps of the procedure.
4-73
r.
If no error code displays, return the original Control Panel and I/O board to the printer. Replace the electronics module and then continue with the next steps of the procedure. s. If a different error code is displayed, see the "Fault Code Error Message Troubleshooting" on page 3-9 for a definition of the problem and the procedures needed to solve the problem.
2. Repeat the following procedures to check all circuits connected to the I/O board: a. Turn off printer and wait 30 seconds for power supply capacitors to discharge. b. Plug in the following connectors, one at a time, and perform steps C and D for each connector. c. Turn on printer and wait for the error code 34,001.43. Check that the three voltage indication LEDs INSIDE the electronics module (visible through the vent holes of the electronics module near the AC power switch) are lit. d. If the proper error code and LED doesn't appear after each I/O connector is reconnected, repair or replace the faulty circuit. e. If the proper code appears, repeat the procedures until all I/O board connectors are plugged back in. f. If repairs are made during this step, plug in all connectors to printer and retest. If printer is fixed, reattach covers to printer and perform a full test. If no defects are found in this step, continue with next step. 3. The proper error code is displayed, repeat the following procedures to check all circuits connected to the electronics module: a. Turn off printer and wait 30 seconds for power supply capacitors to discharge. b. Plug in the following connectors, one at a time, and perform steps C and D for each connector. c. Turn on printer and wait for the error code 34,001.43. Check that the three voltage indication LEDs INSIDE the electronics module (visible through the vent holes of the electronics module near the AC power switch) are lit. d. If the proper error code and LED doesn't appear after each I/O connector is reconnected, repair or replace the faulty circuit. e. If the proper code appears, repeat the procedures until all I/O board connectors are plugged back in. f. If repairs are made during this step, plug in all connectors to printer and retest. If printer is fixed, reattach covers to printer and perform a full test. If no defects are found in this step, replace electronics module, test printer, reattach covers to printer and perform a full test.
Verifying Print Engine Operation by Printing a Built-in Page.

1. If not already on, turn on the printer. If the printer does not begin initializing, go to the topic, "Measuring AC Power Supply Voltages" on page 4-75. 2. Once the Power light is on (not blinking) and the Control Panel displays Ready to Print it is now possible to print any built-in pages. 3. If the printer prints the Page, the print engine is working correctly. If the printer does not print the Page, then a problem exists with the print engine.
4-74
Verifying Power Supply Operation

Required Tools

TORX T-20 screwdriver Digital Multi-Meter (DMM)
The power supply is divided into two sections: the AC section used for heaters and the DC section for control logic, printhead drivers, and motors. Verifying the power supply involves three steps: 1. Checking for proper AC voltage. 2. Inspecting the power supply fuses. 3. Testing for a shorted motor or solenoid driver, which shuts down the power supply.
+50 V Supply Active LED (Take 20 Seconds to Drain Off)
+3.3 V Supply Active LED
+15 High Side +12 Power +5 Supply Active LED

s8500-031
Measuring AC Power Supply Voltages

1. AC line voltages are present on the power supply and possibly in the printer, via the heaters, while the printer is plugged into an AC outlet. The power switch is detected by software; a proper shut down follows a power off signal to the power supply. The printer may operate for a considerable time after this procedure. 2. Turn off the printer, wait for shutdown, and unplug it from the power outlet.
4-75
3. AC Input: With a DMM set to measure AC voltages, measure the power being supplied to the printer; it should measure between 90 to 140 VAC (115 VAC nominal) or 180 to 264 VAC (220 VAC nominal). 4. Proceed to the step, Testing Motor and Solenoid Resistances below. 5. If a heater shorts, F2 or F3 opens. The power supply does NOT shut down; however, a Service Required error code is displayed on the Control Panel.
Detecting condition of Fuse F2 and F3

1. The drum and preheater connect to F3. 2. The printhead and ink loader connect to F2. 3. Turn the power switch off and wait for the printer to shut down. 4. Unplug the power cord. 5. Remove the Ink Loader Assembly and Door as specified on page 8-8. 6. From the back of the printer you will see one heater cable connector on the left near the power switch and two under the ink loader. 7. Place the power switch in the ON position and make the following measurements: a. Using an ohmmeter, measure the resistance between the lowest pin on the left side, just above the power switch, and the lowest pin on the AC input connector. If the meter measures 0 ohms, F3 has not been damaged. b. Measure between the right most pin under the ink loader and (again) the lowest pin on the AC input connector. If the meter measures 0 ohms, F2 has not been damaged. 8. The heater triacs are not accessible for measurement and are disconnected from loads if the switch is off or the printer is powered down. 9. Reinstall the Inkloader Assembly and Door following the test.
Measuring DC Power Supply Voltages

1. Check the power supply status LEDs, they should be bright. 2. If the printer is operational, use the diagnostic test Monitor Voltages. Note DC voltage test points can be found on the power control board. When you remove the rear access cover, you will see the test points below the RAM DIMMs on the power control board.
4-76
Ensuring Ground Integrity

Intermittent or missing ground connections can result in minor interferences in the printer. As examples:

Control Panel display can be affected (blank) I/O board errors False jam reporting Erroneous thermistor readings Major interruptions Damage to the electrical boards
Key Ground Connections

The following illustration shows the grounding points in the printer.
Transfix Roller Ground Springs I/O Board Ground DM Ground Clip X-Axis Motor
X-Axis Return Spring Ground
Y-Axis Motor Media Path Drive Ground Ground

s8500-032
4-77
Testing Motor and Solenoid Resistances

1. Turn off the printer and disconnect the power cord. 2. With a DMM set for measuring resistance, test each motor's windings for correct resistance (disconnected from the printer). Rotate the motor's drive shaft slightly while taking the measurement. Motor and Solenoid Resistances
Motor or Solenoid
Process motor
Resistance (Approximate)
4.3 ohms +/-15% (Difficult to measure due to variability at the brush/commutator interface.) 1.4 ohms +/- 15% (Difficult to measure due to variability at the brush/commutator interface.) 12.5 ohms/phase (red-to-yellow and blue-to-orange) 1.5 +/- 20% ohms 186 ohms +/- 15% 186 ohms +/- 15%
Y-axis motor
X-axis motor Media path motor Wiper drive clutch Paper-pick clutch Deskew clutch MPT Pick solenoid
124 ohms +/- 5%
4-78
Paper Path and Media-Based Problems

For paper path and media-based problems, first check the displayed error codes using the Error Code Definition Table beginning on page 3-9 to help determine where the error is occurring. Run paper path diagnostics to help eliminate problems with printer components.
Media-Based Problems
1. Check that the correct type of media is being used, for information on the correct media type and sizes refer to the Paper Tips page, which is printable from the printers Control Panel Menu. 2. Ensure the printer is operating under the right environmental conditions, see Chapter One for more information. 3. Ensure the correct weight of paper is being used. 4. Ensure that envelopes are of an acceptable size and oriented with the flap up for Tray 1 and the flap down for Trays 2, 3, and 4. 5. Ensure that the correct media is in the correct media tray. The paper guides indicate to the printer the size of media being used. Ensure that the media guides in the tray are set correctly. 6. Inspect the paper for bent, torn or folded corners. 7. Check to ensure no small pieces of paper are in the paper path. 8. Run the paper path status test in service diagnostics to ensure all sensors are operating correctly. 9. Try printing from a fresh, unopened ream of paper.
Paper-Pick Errors - Trays 2, 3, and 4

Paper-pick errors occur when the media in the media tray mispicks or the printer double-picks two or more sheets of paper. 1. Inspect the paper path for obstructions. 2. Ensure that the side guides are set correctly by sliding the guide gently against the media. 3. Try printing from a fresh, unopened ream of paper. 4. Flip over the media in the tray. 5. Ensure the pick rollers for Trays 2, 3, and 4 are installed correctly. 6. Clean the pick roller using the cleaning procedures. Paper dust can coat the pick roller and affect its ability to grip the paper and pull it out of the tray. Also clean the transport rollers if they are visibly dirty. Refer to page 7-4 for proper cleaning procedures.
4-79
7. Check that the pick roller is being rotated. 8. Run the Paper Path test. 9. Replace the pick roller if damaged. 10. Inspect the rollers, bushings and gears of the paper path.
Paper-Pick Errors - Tray 1

1. Verify the media being used is the correct size and weight. 2. Clean the Tray 1 pick roller and separator pad, refer to the cleaning procedure. 3. Ensure the printer is operating under the right environmental conditions, see Chapter One for more information. 4. Run the Tray 1 Pick Solenoid test, replace if necessary. 5. When Tray 1 is opened or closed with media present the pick roller will home and pick paper. Remove all media, open and close Tray 1 and then try printing again.
Preheater and Transfix Jams

1. Remove the preheater and check for and remove any small paper scraps that may be present. 2. Check for excessive media skews. 3. Check for ink shards on top of the preheater next to the flag (see page 8-23). 4. Using diagnostics, run the media drive path test. If the test fails, replace the preheater assembly. 5. Check the paper-eject path for obstructions. Ensure no small pieces of paper are trapped around the paper release blade. 6. Ensure that the transfix roller is rotating freely, replace if necessary. 7. Test the sensors in the paper path. Look for damaged or non-operating sensor flags. 8. Check the stripper solenoid is functioning properly by running the stripper solenoid test and the stripper contact test, replace if necessary. 9. Check the stripper blade for damage, replace the stripper carriage if necessary. 10. Check for ink shards on top of the preheater next to the flag (see page 8-23).
4-80
Checking the Process and Media Path Drive

1. Determine if the process motor runs. If it does not rotate, go to Step 2. If it does rotate, go to Step 4. 2. Measure to determine if +50 VDC is being supplied to the motor. If power is applied, go to Step 3. If it is not, inspect the process motor's wiring harness. If the harness is functional, then troubleshoot the electronics module. Refer back to the topic, "Measuring AC Power Supply Voltages" on page 4-75. 3. Disconnect the motor's wiring harness. Measure the resistance of the motor's windings. If the windings are opened, shorted or far out of tolerance, replace the motor. 4. Ensure the process drive gearbox is in its proper home position, refer to page page 6-8. 5. Run the paper path drive test. 6. Run the drum maintenance drive test. 7. Run the transfix fast and transfix slow. 8. Run the process motor and media drive motor tests. 9. Inspect the gears and mating cam gears for stripped or damaged gear teeth. 10. Replace the Process Drive Gearbox. 11. Replace the media path drive gearbox.
Media Skews Passing Through the Paper Path

1. Ensure the media is supported. 2. Ensure that the side guides are properly adjusted. 3. Do not overfill the tray, especially with envelopes. 4. Check to see if the media is excessively curled. Curled media can get mistracked in the paper path. 5. Examine the paper path; ensure it is clear of obstructions. 6. Ensure that the pick roller is not visibly dirty so that it picks up a sheet of media smoothly and evenly. 7. Check and clean or replace, as required, the preheater and/or take away rollers. Also make sure that the front door is properly closed. 8. The printer should be installed on a flat, level surface. 9. Ensure the paper preheater assembly is clean and properly seated into the printer frame.
4-81
Operating System and Application Problems

Print an internal test print from the printers Control Panel to ensure the problem is not printer related. There is additional help available at www.xerox.com/office/ support. You can access the infoSMART Knowledge Base, PhaserSMART Technical Support, Technical Support via email, driver downloads, and much more. PhaserSMART Technical Support is an automated, Internet-based support system. Use your default web browser to send diagnostic information from your printer to our web site for analysis. PhaserSMART Technical Support examines the information, diagnoses the problem, and proposes a solution. To access PhaserSMART Technical Support: 1. Go to www.phaserSMART.com. 2. Enter your printers IP address in the browser address window.
Testing Communications Ports

Testing the communication ports can isolate communication problems to the computer, network, or software. Test the communications ports after the printer is installed or when the electronics module has been replaced. Test the communications ports as follows:
Ethernet Port Verification

Note The Ethernet port can be tested without connecting to the network by using a crossover cable and the PING command. 1. Connect a crossover cable between the Ethernet ports on the printer and computer. 2. Verify that the printer is Ready To Print. 3. At the computer, click the Start button, and select Run. 4. Type in the word command and click OK to launch the MS-DOS command prompt. 5. At the prompt, type in the command ipconfig and press Enter to display the computers IP address, subnet mask, and gateway. 6. On the Control Panel, print the Configuration Page and use this page to verify that TCP/IP is enabled and to determine the current TCP/IP values. Note To enable communication between the computer and printer, both must be configured for the same TCP/IP network.
4-82
7. Using the printer Control Panel, disable DHCP/BOOTP and AutoIP so that the printer can be configured manually. 8. Select an IP address for the printer that matches the computer, except for the last field, which must be unique. 9. Edit the printers gateway and subnet mask to match the computer. 10. At the MS-DOS command prompt, type ping followed by a space and the printers IP address. Then press Enter. If the number of packets sent and received match, the PING was successful and the Ethernet port is functional. If the request times out and fails to reply, either the cable or the port is defective.
Ethernet Port Verification for Default Assigned IP Address 169.254.xxx.xxx

An alternate method is required to test the Ethernet port when the PCs IP address falls within the range 169.254.xxx.xxx. PCs that have not been configured for a specific network default to a LOCAL LINK value within the 169.254.xxx.xxx range. Note To comply with industry standards, Phaser 8400 printers cannot be manually configured for IP addresses within the LOCAL LINK range. Note Always print the Configuration Page to obtain a record of the printer settings before changing the IP address. After testing the printer, be sure to restore the printers original network settings. 1. Connect a crossover cable between the PC and printer. 2. Verify the printer is Ready To Print. 3. Use the printers Control Panel to enable AutoIP: a. b. c. d. e. f. Select the Printer Setup menu. Select the Connection Setup menu. Select the Network Setup menu. Select the TCP/IP Setup menu. Set AutoIP to On. Exit the menu so the printer is Ready To Print.
4. Reset the printer to cause AutoIP to assign a new IP address (cycle power or select Restart Printer from the Shutdown menu). 5. After the printers IP address is set, test communication by sending the PING command. 6. If the test fails, install a different cable and retest.
4-83
USB Port Verification

1. Verify that the printer is Ready To Print. 2. Insert the Printer Installer and Utilities CD-ROM (8400) and Software and Documentation CD-ROM (8500/8550) into the computer. 3. If the installer autoruns, exit the installer window. 4. Connect a USB cable between the printer and computer USB ports. The computer automatically detects the new hardware and creates a driver. Note If the files from the driver are not currently installed on the computer, you must locate the driver files on the CD-ROM. Once the files have been located, the computer installs the driver and automatically configures it to match the printers feature set. 5. To test the connection, click the START button. 6. Select SETTINGS and then PRINTERS. 7. Locate the Phaser 8400/8500/8550 Color Printer icon and display its properties. 8. From the General tab, click the Print Test Page button to generate the test print. If the test page prints, the USB port is functioning normally.
Network Problems
The printer maintains 6 logs in memory detailing network functions. The logs contain TCP/IP, NetWare and AppleTalk initialization events. The logs can also be accessed remotely via CentreWare. The logs list events chronologically. The log is limited in length; when the log is full the printer stops recording data to the log. The logs are stored on the Hard Drive so only new data is stored each time the printers power is cycled. There is a Connection Setup Page, Configuration Page, and a network reset available for troubleshooting Network problems.
To print an Event Log or Runtime Log:

1. Enter normal Customer Mode. 2. From the main menu, select Troubleshooting and press OK. 3. Scroll and select Network Log Pages and press OK.
4-84
4. Highlight the appropriate menu item from the list and select OK. Note Phaser 8500/8550 printers use a diagnostic tool for network connections. It is available using the menu path Troubleshooting>Network Problems>Network >Diagnostics. To troubleshoot network problems, you can select the standard Network Log Pages or the new Network Diagnostics. The Network Diagnostics take about 60 seconds to test the network connection for basic communication problems such as collisions, wrong ethernet speeds, possible missing hubs when not using crossover cable, and inappropriate IP settings for the network type detected or server. 5. The page should now print. Note To print the Connection Setup Page or Configuration Page, select the Printer Setup Menu.
Obtaining Serial Back Channel Trace

In rare cases the printer may exit unusual behavior that is difficult to troubleshoot. In such cases, if feasible, it can be useful to obtain a Back Channel Trace from the printers on-board serial port. The Back Channel Trace, lists step-by-step what the printer is doing up to the point that an error occurs. The trace may offer clues to help troubleshoot the problem. You will need the following:

Computer with a serial port Null modem serial cable Serial cable adapter, part number 174-3493-00 (Same adapter used to run PCbased diagnostic on Phaser 340/360 and Phaser 840 printers.)
To obtain a trace: 1. Connect the serial cable to your PC. Serial port settings are 19.2 kbaud, 8 bits, no parity, 1 stop bit, and software control. 2. Turn off the printer. 3. Remove the rear panel to access the main board. 4. (8400 only) Connect the serial cable with adapter to the 5-pin connector (labeled SER0) located above the RAM DIMM connectors. Pin 1 is the top pin. The label THIS SIDE UP of the serial port adapter should face towards the main boards round back-up battery. (8500/8550 only) Connect the serial cable with adapter to the service only port located above the USB cable port. The label THIS SIDE UP on the serial adapter should face the rear of the printer.
4-85
5. Start up a terminal program, such as in windows HyperTerminal (usually located in Programs:Accessories:Communications:HyperTerminal). Ensure the serial port settings, usually COM1: is correct. 6. Turn on the printer. The trace should appear in the terminal dialog window. Examine the trace to troubleshoot the problem. If necessary, save the trace file to capture the text.
4-86
Print-Quality Troubleshooting
In this chapter...

Print-Quality Problems Overview Analyzing Service Test Prints
Section
Print-Quality Problems Overview

Print-quality defects can be attributed to printer components, consumables, media, internal software, external software applications, and environmental conditions. To successfully troubleshoot print-quality problems, as many variables as possible must be eliminated. The first step is to generate prints using printable pages embedded in the printer on paper from the approved media list. The paper should be from an unopened ream that has been acclimated to room temperature. See the approved media list from, "Xerox Supplies" on page 9-16 for media that has been tested and approved for use in this printer. If the print-quality defect is still present when printing on approved media from an unopened ream of paper, then media, software applications, and environmental conditions need to be researched. When analyzing a print-quality defect, first determine if the defect occurs:

in all colors in only one color if it is repeating or random
The visible surfaces of all rollers should be inspected for obvious defects.
Diagnosing Print-Quality Problems

The Troubleshooting Print-Quality Page provides a good overview of the most common print quality problems. To print the Troubleshooting Print-Quality Page, follow these steps: 1. From the Control Panel, scroll to Troubleshooting, then press OK. 2. Scroll to Print Quality Problems, then press OK. 3. Scroll to Troubleshooting Print Quality Page, then press OK. The Troubleshooting Print Quality Page includes instructions for printing the Eliminate Light Stripes test print. These instructions are also provided on the next page of this manual. The Eliminate Light Stripes test print indicates individual weak or missing jets or an obstruction in the imaging path that affects a vertical band down the entire page. Also, you may see color variation from jet to jet on the Eliminate Light Stripes test print. Some variation is normal, occasionally occurs, and usually self-corrects within a few printed pages. If a print-quality problem is not resolved with the information provided in the Diagnosing Print-Quality Problems section, see the specific problem in "Analyzing Service Test Prints" on page 5-33.
5-2
Random Light Stripes

Light Stripes Test
One or more color bars are missing on the test page. This is probably caused by a weak or clogged printhead jet.
Step 1
Questions and Actions

1. On the Control Panel, select the Eliminate Light Stripes function and follow the procedure on the printed pages. For Phaser 8400 printers, this step does not include Jet Substitution. Did this correct the problem? It may be necessary to repeat Step 1 up to 3 times if the stripes still appear.
Yes
Complete.
No
Go to Step 3.
2.
1.
NOTE: If there are discolored jets, print the solid fill test print in the color with the discolored jets. In the following example, the yellow stripe has discolored jets, therefore you would print the yellow solid fill. For instructions on printing solid fill test prints, see "Black, Red, Green, Blue, Cyan, Magenta, and Yellow Solid Fills" on page 5-40. Discolored jets usually clear after two or three prints, using the problem jets.
1. 2.
Clean the print engine exit path and wipe the paper release blade with a lint-free cloth. Did this correct the problem? Remove the drum maintenance kit and wipe the clear plastic wiper blade with a lint-free cloth or replace the maintenance kit. Did this correct the problem?
Complete.
Go to Step 4.
1.
Complete.
Go to Step 5.
2.
5-3
Step 5

1. (8400) Download the latest Jet Fix snippet from the Customer Support Site and follow the readme text instructions. You will: Select Advanced. You will be prompted to choose the color and number of the problem jet based on the Light Stripes Test page. After selections are made, the printer temporarily increases the drive voltage to the selected jet, prints several pages, and then performs the cleaning sequence. The Advanced cleaning process is similar to the process associated with downloading the Jet Fix snippet to Phaser 8400 printers. However, a snippet is not required for Phaser 8500/8550 printers because the feature is embedded in the printers firmware. For Phaser 8500/8550, if the problem persists, select the Jet Substitution Mode: 2. On the Control Panel, select Troubleshooting, and then press the OK button. 3. Select Print Quality Problems, and then press the OK button. 4. Select Eliminate Light Stripes, and then press the OK button. 5. Select Jet Substitution Mode, and then press the OK button. 6. Follow the Control Panel prompts to select the color and malfunctioning jet number indicated on the Light Stripes Test page. 7. Did this correct the problem?
Yes
Complete.
No
Go to Step 6.
1. Turn off the printer for at least 4 hours. 2. Turn on the printer and if necessary, repeat Step 1. 3. Did this correct the problem?
Complete.
Follow the instructions on the Printhead Troubleshooting Checklist.
5-4
Predominate Light Stripes

All four color bars are missing on the test page. A thin stripe with no colon is likely due to foreign debris scratching ink off the drum or the print. Note If there are a series of regularly spaced white lines approximately 6 mm (.25 in.) apart see White Stripes (Pinstripes) on page 30.
Step 1

1. 2. Clean the printers exit path, including wiping the paper release blade with a lint-free cloth. Did this correct the problem? Remove the drum maintenance kit and wipe the clear plastic wiper blade with a lint-free cloth. Did this correct the problem?
Yes
Complete.
No
Go to Step 2.
1.
Complete.
2.
If the problem persists, follow the steps for "Random Light Stripes" on page 5-3.
5-5
Smudges or Smears
Smudges or smears appear on the page. The probable cause is ink residue in the paper path. The residue can be found on the roller, on the paper guide ribs, or inside the paper preheater.
NOTE: To avoid future problems, if you are manually printing on duplex paper with preprinted solid ink images, you should select "2nd Side" as the paper type after cleaning the paper path.
Step 1

1. 2. Clean the printers exit path, including wiping the paper release blade with a lint-free cloth. Did this correct the problem? On the Control Panel, select Information --> Troubleshooting --> Print Quality Problems. Select Remove Print Smears, and then press the Enter button. The printer cleans the ink from the preheater and exit rollers. Reprint test pages. Do you still see smudges? Repeat Step 2 up to 3 times if the smears still appear. Verify supported media is being used. Open a fresh ream of supported paper and reprint the test page. Did this correct the problem? Remove the drum maintenance kit and wipe the clear plastic wiper blade with a lint-free cloth. Did this correct the problem? Manually clean visibly dirty feed rollers. Clean the paper release blade. Did this correct the problem? Verify the maintenance pivot plate is free from damage. Verify the cam rollers for the drum maintenance are working properly. Replace any defective parts. Did this correct the problem?
Yes
Complete.
No
Go to Step 2.
1.
Complete. Go to Step 3.
2.
3.
1. 2. 3. 4.
Complete.
Go to Step 4.
1.
Complete.
Go to Step 5.
2.
1. 2. 3.
Complete.
Go to Step 6.
1. 2. 3. 4.
Complete.
Replace the preheater.
5-6
Printing Too Light or Too Dark

1. Verify the paper type at the Control Panel matches the paper type in the driver and in the software application being used, especially if printing on transparency. Verify the paper type is a supported media type for this printer. Did this correct the problem? Change/adjust the print mode settings or the TekColor setting. Did this correct the problem? The ink may be discolored due to age or lack of use over an extended period of time. Insert new ink and print a solid fill test print. Run the test print until the affected color returns to normal. Did this correct the problem? If the problem is occurring for only one color, purge the ink up to 10 times to clear the ink or until discoloration is cleared. Did this correct the problem? Complete. Complete. Go to Step 4. Complete. Go to Step 3.
Yes
Complete.
No
Go to Step 2.
2. 3.
1. 2.
1. 2.
3.
1.
2.
Not Printing
The printer processes a sheet of paper, but no image is printed on it. Note Blank sheets accompanying multi-picks or chase pages following a jam are a part of normal operation.
1. Inspect the area around the printhead and drum and remove any media or bits of paper jammed between the printhead and drum. Did this correct the problem? Follow the instructions on the Printhead Troubleshooting Checklist. Did this correct the problem? Complete. Go to Step 3.
Yes
Complete.
No
Go to Step 2
2.
1. 2.
5-7
Step 3

1. 2. 3. Inspect and reseat the wave amp and data cables connecting to the printhead. Replace or repair any defective cables. Did this correct the problem?
Yes
Complete.
No
Replace in the following order: electronics module printhead
5-8
Color is Uneven or Color is Wrong

This may be due to incorrect colors in the ink loader, old ink in the printhead, color mixing at the faceplate, or drum thermal problems. Note Using non-Xerox ink may cause unpredictable color results.
s8500-034
Step 1

1. To remove discolored jets in the printhead, run the solid fill test print for the color displaying the discolored jets.
Yes
Complete.
No
Go to Step 2
NOTE: For instructions on printing solid fill test prints, see "Black, Red, Green, Blue, Cyan, Magenta, and Yellow Solid Fills" on page 5-40. 1. Purge the printhead up to three times. If some improvement is seen, the ink could be discolored due to a long period of time without use. Did this correct the problem? Clean the maintenance kit wiper blade or replace the maintenance kit. Did this correct the problem? Check the thermal regulation of the drum. Run the service diagnostics drum thermal check test, see "Temperature Status" on page 4-54. Are the drum thermal values out of the appropriate range? Go to Step 4. Go to Step 5. Complete. Go to Step 3.
2.
1. 2.
1. 2.
3.
5-9
Step 4 5

1. 1. 2. 3. Ensure the drum fan is correctly installed and operates correctly. Verify the drum temperature sensor is in contact with the drum. Clean or replace the drum temperature sensor. Did this correct the problem?
Yes
Go to Step 5. Complete.
No
Replace the drum fan. Replace in the following order: Drum heater relay board Drum assembly Electronics module
5-10
Streaks or Lines Down the Print

There are several possible causes of streaks running down the length of a print.
s8500-035
Step 1

1. Check for and remove any media, jammed paper, or debris found in the printers exit path. Did this correct the problem? Clean the maintenance kit wiper blade or replace the maintenance kit. Did this correct the problem? Check the exit area, exit frame, the preheater, maintenance kit, and the printhead (including the paper release blade) to see if there is anything touching the drum assembly. Reseat any printer component interfering or touching the drum assembly. Clean the paper release blade. Did this correct the problem?
Yes
Complete.
No
Go to Step 2.
2.
1. 2.
Complete.
Go to Step 3.
1.
Complete.
Go to Step 4.
2. 3. 4.
5-11
Step 4

1. If there are streaks on the front side only of a 2-sided print, the preheater may be scraping ink off the print. Look for ink shavings along the streaks on the printed paper. Clean the preheater using the Control Panel Remove Print Smears function. Did this correct the problem? Possible weak or missing jet. Print the weak/ missing jet test print from the Control Panel, see "Weak/Missing Jet" on page 5-33. Did this correct the problem? Possible discolored jet. Print the solid fill test print, see "Black, Red, Green, Blue, Cyan, Magenta, and Yellow Solid Fills" on page 5-40. Did this correct the problem? The X-axis drive is not functioning correctly. If the X-Axis Drive does not move the printhead smoothly and evenly during printing, vertical lines appear on the print. For information about X-Axis Drive problems, see "White Stripes (Pinstripes)" on page 5-30. 2. Did this correct the problem? Smears on a duplex print can be caused by the paper preheater operating at a temperature that is too high or debris is in the duplex roller or duplex paper path guides. Run the service diagnostics Duplex Path test to check the paper preheaters temperature. Is the operating temperature within the correct value range?
Yes
Complete.
No
Go to Step 5.
2. 3. 4.
1.
Complete.
Go to Step 6.
2.
1.
Complete.
Go to Step 7.
2.
1.
Complete.
Go to Step 8.
1.
Replace the preheater.
2.
3.
5-12
Scratches or Marks Parallel to the Long Axis of Printing, Particularly with Film
Usually caused by debris in the paper path. The scratch or mark may extend into non-printed areas or be more pronounced on the lower portion of the image.
s8500-036
Step 1

1. Check the exit area, the preheater, maintenance kit, and the printhead (including the paper release blade) to see if there is anything touching the drum assembly. Reseat any printer component interfering or touching the drum assembly. Clean the paper release blade. Did this correct the problem? Inspect the drum maintenance kit. If the defect is a thin line that is glossier than the surrounding area, it may be due to a defect on the maintenance kit wiper blade. Clean the wiper blade or replace the maintenance kit. Did this correct the problem?
Yes
Complete.
No
Go to Step 2.
2. 3. 4.
1.
Complete.
Go to Step 3.
2. 3.
5-13
Step 3

1. 2. Using transparency media, print from Tray 1 to see if the scratch appears. Is there a visible scratch?
Yes
Go to Step 5.
No
Go to Step 4.
NOTE: To determine where the scratch is originating, place a small drop of water on the scratch on the transparency. If the scratch disappears, the scratch is on that side. If the scratch does not disappear, follow these steps on the other side. This can help to determine where the problem is originating.
1.
If there is no visible scratch on the transparency the defect occurred during paper pick or early transport from Tray 2, 3, or 4. Change the paper pick guide, front door, or maintenance kit. Did this correct the problem?
Complete.
Go to Step 5.
2. 3.
A scratch or smear can be caused by debris build-up on the paper preheaters heating surface. Try the following: 1. 2. Run the cleaning procedure Remove Print Smears from the printers Control Panel. Did this correct the problem? Force a sheet of thick 65- to 80-lb. paper through the paper preheater to buff the paper preheater heating surfaces. With the leading and trailing ends of the sheet of paper extending from the entry and exit of the paper preheater, gently pull the sheet of paper back and forth several times and then remove the paper. Be careful of the paper-sensor flags. Did this correct the problem? Inspect all paper guides inside the printer for nicks, cuts, or debris.
Complete.
Go to Step 6.
1.
Complete.
Go to Step 7.
2.
3.
1.
Clean or replace any defective paper guide(s).
5-14
White Portion of Print is Colored

Color on a print where no color should be printed is often called a latent image. A latent image remains on the drum when it should have been transferred to its sheet of paper. An insufficient amount of oil on the drum, provided by a dirty, defective, or old maintenance kit may be the problem. Printing on 3-hole punch paper commonly causes this problem.
s8500-037
Step 1

1. Try printing using a smoother, higher quality paper, some recycled paper brands may be too rough. Watermarked or 3-hole punched paper may also have this problem. Did this correct the problem? Inspect and clean the maintenance kit wiper blade. If necessary replace the maintenance kit. Did this correct the problem? Clean the paper release blade, it may be contaminated with ink. Run the Remove Print Smears from the printers Control Panel. Did this correct the problem? Inspect for ink on the transfix roller. Run the Remove Print Smears from the printer Control Panel. Did this correct the problem?
Yes
Complete.
No
Go to Step 2.
2.
1. 2. 3.
Complete.
Go to Step 3.
1. 2. 3.
Complete.
Go to Step 4.
1. 2. 3.
Complete
Go to Step 5.
5-15
Step 5

1. Run service diagnostics to verify the system temperatures are within normal operating range. Inspect the drum thermistor, clean or replace if necessary. Did this correct the problem? Inspect the feed rollers. An accumulation of paper dust and oil can produce dark rectangular marks on transparency film. Run the Remove Print Smears from the printers Control Panel. Replace the rollers if necessary. Did this correct the problem?
Yes
Complete.
No
Go to Step 6.
2. 3.
1.
Complete.
2. 3. 4.
5-16
Fuzzy Text
Text appears indistinct and difficult to read. There are three typical reasons for fuzzy text, as called out in this illustration. 1.Top left image displays a Y-axis drum rotation problem. 2.Lower left image displays the wrong drum temperature problem. 3.Lower right image displays an Xaxis movement problem.
32424-081
Step 1

1. Try printing using a smoother, higher quality paper, some recycled paper brands may be too rough. Watermarked paper may also have this problem. Did this correct the problem? Try using a higher quality print mode. Did this correct the problem? This problem can occur after a printhead has been replaced. Verify the dot on the printhead roll block is positioned to match the label on the left frame. Adjust if necessary. Did this correct the problem? Run service diagnostics to check the temperature of the drum. Verify the drum termperature sensor is clean and properly positioned. Did this correct the problem? Use service diagnostics to run the Y-axis encoder test. Is the Y-axis encoder working properly?
Yes
Complete.
No
Go to Step 2.
2.
2 3
1. 2. 1.
Complete.
Go to Step 3.
Complete.
Go to Step 4.
2.
1. 2. 3.
Complete.
Go to Step 5.
1. 2.
Go to Step 6.
Clean the drum encoder disk or replace the drum assembly.
5-17
Step 6

1. 2. 3. Ensure the x-axis movement is not impeded. See "White Stripes (Pinstripes)" on page 5-30 for troubleshooting this problem. Did this correct the problem? Verify the printhead is tilted forward against the drum in the proper print position. Did this correct the problem?
Yes
Complete.
No
Go to Step 7.
1. 2.
Complete.
5-18
Poor Primary Color Fills

Primary fills appear banded and inconsistent.
s8500-039
Step 1

1. 2. 3. 4. Banded and inconsistent primary fills may indicate a missing, weak, or discolored jet. Print the Service Test Print 1: Weak/Missing Jet. If there are discolored jets, print the solid fill test print in the color with the discolored jets. Did this correct the problem? Use service diagnostics to verify the Y-axis encoder is operating normally. Is the Y-axis encoder working properly? If the bands are uniform, or in a corduroy pattern, use diagnostics to check the X-axis motion. Ensure the x-axis movement is not impeded. See "White Stripes (Pinstripes)" on page 5-30 for troubleshooting this problem. Did this correct the problem? Try the procedure listed on "Black, Red, Green, Blue, Cyan, Magenta, and Yellow Solid Fills" on page 5-40. Did this correct the problem?
Yes
Complete.
No
Go to Step 2.
1. 2.
Go to Step 3.
Clean the drum encoder disk or replace the drum assembly. Replace the Xaxis motor or electronics module.
1.
Go to Step 4.
2. 3. 4.
1.
Complete.
2.
5-19
Ghosting
The image from a previous print is on the current print.
s8500-040
Step 1

1. This problem can occur from prints being stacked in the output tray, causing the pressure of the stack and the heat of the printer to cause blocking which has the appearance of ghosting. Try printing the images again, without letting them stack in the output tray. Try different paper. Ink may have a problem adhering to smooth, impervious surfaces of some paper. Did this correct the problem? Run multiple prints; the first 2-sided print will have the worst ghosting. Some transfix roller ghosting is inherent to the printer but will improve with multiple prints. Does this correct the problem? Inspect and clean the maintenance kit wiper blade. If necessary, replace the maintenance kit. Did this correct the problem?
Yes
Complete.
No
Go to Step 2.
2. 3.
4.
1.
Complete.
Go to Step 3.
2.
1. 2. 3.
Complete.
Go to Step 4.
5-20
Step 4

1. 2. Run service diagnostics to verify the drum maintenance system is operating correctly. Inspect or replace the following parts, check for cracking: Drum maintenance pivot plate Drum maintenance cam shaft Did this correct the problem?

Yes
Complete.
No
Go to Step 5.
3.
1. 2. 3.
Run service diagnostics to check the temperature of the drum. Verify the drum termperature sensor is clean and properly installed. Did this correct the problem?
Complete.
Replace the drum temperature sensor.
5-21
Poor Small Text Resolution

Small characters appear heavy and plug up.
s8500-038
Step 1 2

1. 2. 1. 2. 3. Try using a higher quality print mode. Did this correct the problem? Run service diagnostics to check the temperature of the drum. Verify the drum temperature sensor is clean and properly positioned. Did this correct the problem? Verify the X-axis drive system is correctly assembled and lubricated, see "X-Axis Motor Assembly" on page 8-53 for more information. Did this correct the problem?
Yes
Complete.
No
Go to Step 2.
Complete.
Go to Step 3.
1.
Complete.
Replace the x-axis motor assembly.
2.
5-22
Vertical Lines Appear Wavy

Straight vertical lines appear to be wavy and ill-formed.
s8500-041
Step 1

1. 2. 3. 4. There may be too much oil on the drum. Inspect and clean the maintenance kit wiper blade. If necessary, replace the maintenance kit. Did this correct the problem? Check the motion of the X-axis and verify there is nothing interfering such as a poorly dressed cable or screw. Replace any defective parts. Did this correct the problem? Use service diagnostics to run the Y-axis encoder test. Is the Y-axis encoder functioning properly? Use service diagnostics to verify the drum maintenance cam roller and pivot plate are operating correctly. Did this correct the problem?
Yes
Complete.
No
Go to Step 2.
1.
Complete.
Go to Step 3.
2. 3.
1. 2.
Go to Step 4.
Clean the drum encoder disk or replace the drum assembly. Replace the pivot plate or drum maintenance cam roller if damaged.
1.
Complete.
2.
5-23
Oil Streaks on Print

Oil stains the edge of the print.
s8500-042
Step 1

1. 2. 3. 4. There may be too much oil on the drum. Inspect and clean the maintenance kit wiper blade. If necessary, replace the maintenance kit. Did this correct the problem? Ensure ground integrity for the drum maintenance unit is intact. Check the back of the drum maintenance unit to drum maintenance shaft to drum fan ground clip. Did this correct the problem? Run pages through the printer to clean the drum by using the Remove Print Smears routine from the printers Control Panel. Did this correct the problem? Clean the paper release blade and the exit guides. Did this correct the problem?
Yes
Complete.
No
Go to Step 2.
1. 2.
Complete.
Go to Step 3.
3.
1.
Complete.
Go to Step 4.
2.
1. 2.
Complete.
Go to Step 5.
5-24
Step 5

1. Use service diagnostics to verify the drum maintenance cam roller and pivot plate are operating correctly. Did this correct the problem?
Yes
Complete.
No
Replace the pivot plate or drum maintenance cam roller if damaged.
2.
5-25
Incomplete Image Transfer to Paper

All of the image does not transfer to the paper. Media that is not smooth enough or too light can cause this problem. This problem can also occur on watermarked paper.
s8500-043
Step 1

1. Verify the media is supported for this printer and/or try a higher quality or heavier media type. Did this correct the problem? Try using a higher quality print mode. Did this correct the problem? Poor drum oiling can cause the image transfer to be incomplete on one side of the page. Use service diagnostics to verify the drum maintenance cam roller and pivot plate are operating correctly. Replace any defective parts. Inspect for cracked pivot plate or cracked drum maintenance cams. Did this correct the problem? Inspect and clean the maintenance kit wiper blade. If necessary, replace the maintenance kit. Did this correct the problem?
Yes
Complete.
No
Go to Step 2.
2.
2 3
1. 2. 1.
Complete.
Go to Step 3.
1.
Complete.
Go to Step 5.
2.
1. 2. 3.
Complete.
Go to Step 6.
5-26
Step 6

1. Inspect the drum temperature sensor and check for contamination and improper positioning between the sensor and the drum surface. Clean and position the sensor as necessary Did this correct the problem? Is the incomplete image transfer on the left and right sides of the print, but fine through the center? This indicates incomplete transfix cam rotation. Check for a damaged transfix cam roller or a malfunction of the process drive, replace any defective parts. Did this correct the problem? Using service diagnostics, verify the paper preheater temperature is within normal operating range. Replace the paper preheater if necessary.
Yes
Complete.
No
Go to Step 7.
2. 3.
1.
Complete.
Go to Step 8.
2.
3.
1.
Complete.
2.
Replace the transfix load assembly and transfix load arm.
5-27
Ink Smears on First Printed Side of Duplex Print

Preheater temperature is too high.
s8500-044
Step 1 2

1. 2. 1. Clean or replace the paper release blade. Did this correct the problem? Inspect the duplex paper path for obstructions, contamination, debris, or damage. Clean or replace defective parts. Did this correct the problem? Run the Remove Print Smears routine from the printers Control Panel. Did this correct the problem? Use service diagnostics to check the paper preheater temperature. Is the preheater operating within normal range?
Yes
Complete.
No
Go to Step 2.
Complete.
Go to Step 3.
2. 3.
1. 2.
Complete.
Go to Step 4.
1. 2.

preheater electronics module
5-28
Repeating Print Defects on Print

The distance between each artifact of a repeating image defect reveals which imaging component is causing the defect. Transfix Roller defects show up as light spots in solid fill areas.
s8500-045
Step 1

1. 2. 3. 4. Repeating defects that occur every 11.6 cm (4.58 in.) are caused by the transfix roller. Clean the transfix roller. The defect does not move in the X-position. Replace if necessary. Did this correct the problem? A single repeating defect that has a different Y position on each page, but the same X position on each page is probably due to a defect on the drum. Clean the drum assembly. Did this correct the problem?
Yes
Complete.
No
Go to Step 2.
1.
Complete.
Replace the drum assembly.
2. 3.
5-29
White Stripes (Pinstripes)

This print-quality problem has a series of regularly spaced white stripes approximately 6 mm (.25 in.) apart. If the X-Axis Drive does not move the printhead smoothly and evenly during printing, vertical lines appear in the print.
s8500-046
Step 1

1. Print the service test print 13-19 Solid Fills, to reveal an X-axis problem. See "Primary Solid Fills 10x" on page 5-41 for more information. Are the pinstripes apparent on the test prints? Verify the X-axis motion is operating correctly and that poorly dressed cables, loose screws, or mechanical failures are not interfering. Remove any obstructions or redress cables. Did this correct the problem? Verify there are no wiring harnesses interfering with the horizontal movement of the printhead. Redress any faulty wiring. Repair or replace any defective part or interference with the printhead. Did this correct the problem?
Yes
Go to Step 2.
No
Complete. The problem is not with the print engine.
2.
1.
Complete.
Go to Step 3.
2. 3.
1.
Complete.
Replace the X-axis drive.
2. 3. 4.
5-30
Wrinkling
The print is usually damaged in a corner with solid fills. This problem is more often seen on short-grain media. Some wrinkling on envelopes flaps is an acceptable limitation of this printer. You may see wrinkling on the second side of a 2-sided print on the secondary colors. Wrinkling can also be caused if the preheater is too open on the duplex side of the print. On the papers packaging, an underline under the 11 (in 8.5in. x 11in.) indicates the paper is long-grain.
s8500-047
Step 1

1. 2. 3. 4. Verify the media is supported for this printer. Print from an unopened fresh ream of paper. Try a higher quality or heavier media type. Did this correct the problem? Increase the margin size of the image. Wrinkling generally occurs in solid fills near the prints edge. Did this correct the problem? Did the print wrinkle on the duplex side only? Inspect, clean or replace the maintenance kit. Did this correct the problem? Inspect the transfix components.
Yes
Complete.
No
Go to Step 2.
1.
Complete.
Go to Step 3.
2.
3 4
1. 1. 2.
Replace the paper-preheater Complete.
Go to step 4. Go to Step 5.
1.

transfix roller transfix cam transfix load arm transfix load module.
5-31
Image Is Offset or Cut-Off

1. Print an information page (internal page embedded in the printer). 2. Verify that the tray guides are adjusted correctly. 3. Ensure that the paper size in the driver and printer match the paper loaded in the tray. 4. Check the application for the correct image sizing and orientation.
Poor Ink Adhesion, Poor Image Durability

Follow these steps if the ink is flaking off the print after the print is complete. 1. If a specialty coated paper is being used (for example, glossy media), try a different paper. Xerox transparency film provides the best ink adhesion versus off-the-shelf transparency film. 2. Verify the paper preheater temperature using diagnostics. 3. The drum is too cold or too hot. Verify the drum temperature using diagnostics. Ensure that the drum temperature sensor is properly positioned and has no contamination between it and the drum surface. Image durability is almost always an issue with the paper being used. It is never an issue with the printers printhead.
5-32
Analyzing Service Test Prints

A variety of test prints are available in the Hidden Service Menu to aid in determining the quality of output from the printer and to assist in troubleshooting problems. This section shows how to select and analyze all test prints available to the Phaser 8400 printer. To access the Service Tools menu: From anywhere within the menu (not diagnostics), press and hold the Up Arrow button, and then press the OK button. You can also press and hold the Cancel button, and then press the OK button. To enter the Hidden Service Menu: from the Service Tools menu, press and hold the Up Arrow and Down Arrow buttons. Note Defects revealed by the prints may not occur in the course of ordinary printing. In servicing the printer, you should minimize the defects shown by the prints but not necessarily eliminate them.
Test Print Examples

Weak/Missing Jet
This print shows which jets are not outputting enough, if any, ink compared to its neighboring jets. Note that the yellow jets bands have a small amount of cyan ink added to them, which tints them green, to make them more visible. Look for: No interlacing is used in this print; expect light/dark variation between jets. Look for much lighter colored vertical bands in the horizontal bars. Weak jets in the yellow band are distinguished by a cyan tint. Causes: A jet may be partially clogged; perform printhead clean/purge cycles on the printhead to remove contaminants from the poorly-performing jet. If jet substitution mode is required, see "Jet Substitution Mode" on page 6-10. Test the purge system and the wiper blade performance. Turn the printer off for 4 to 6 hours (or overnight, if practical). Then perform a clean/purge cycle again. There may be a problem in the purge pump assembly or the wiper assembly may not be compliant. Verify that Xerox ink is being used. Follow the instructions on the Printhead Troubleshooting Checklist. NOTE: Include two prints of this test print with any returned printhead.
74 75 76 77 78 79 80
Weak jet
s8500-048
5-33
Test Print Examples (Continued)

X-Axis Motion (Drop Mass Evaluation)
(8400 only)
For X-Axis Motion problems, see "Analyzing Service Test Prints" on page 5-33 (solid fill prints). This print is used by Engineering and Manufacturing. The print must be printed on Xerox Photo Paper. Using a lower grade paper will result in inaccurate measurements.
This is a text print This is a text print This is a text print This is a text print This is a text print This is a text print
< current setpoint
s8500-049
Color Bands, RGBK Dither

The large, secondary colored areas in this print reveal banding and weak jets. Look for: Vertical bars or bands of much lighter color or a different hue running in-line in one or more of the solid fills. Causes: A weak jet can cause banding; see the Weak/Missing Jets test print (on page 5-33). Banding can also be caused by color-to-color misregistration. Use the diagnostics to ensure that the printhead and drum thermals are correct. Follow the instructions on the "On-site Printhead Troubleshooting Checklist (8400)" on page A-8
Banding
s8500-050
5-34

Reverse Text
The print indicates if the printhead is producing properly-sized drops of ink and that the drum temperature is not too high. NOTE: This print should be made with the printer covers closed and in place. The heat loss without the covers can hide the too-hot thermal problem. Also, print the test print in Enhanced print mode. Look for: Legibility in the lines of 6-point text; particularly in the primary colors. If the letters are closed or badly plugged with ink, the printhead is laying down too much ink. A goodquality print shows five vertical parallel lines of different thicknesses on the left and right side of the print. If the thinnest line is missing, the printhead is outputting too much ink or the drum temperature is too high. Causes: NOTE: Ensure that the printer is not in High Resolution/Photo or Standard print mode. Check the thermal regulation of the printhead and of the drum. Make sure that the drum temperature sensor is correctly mounted and in proper, even contact with the drum. If necessary, remove the sensor and check it for an accumulation of debris at its contact point. Replace the drum temperature sensor. Ensure the printhead drive voltage is set to the default 128.
10 point Times-Roman ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz1234567890
8 point Times-Roman ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz1234567890!@#$%^&*


1234567890


Thin line missing


s8500-051
5-35

Big Bands OHP
This print allows you to evaluate transparency printing. It prints two transparencies from Tray 1, one with primary color fills and one with secondary color fills and a band of 50% blue, as this is a popular background color for overhead transparencies. Look for: Scratching on the print. Uniformity of fill with no scratching. Evaluate the print on an overhead projector. Some print artifacts visible on the print do not show when projected. Likewise, some defects do not show until projected. Causes: Confirm that you are using the transparency that is supported for this printer. Clean or replace the paper release blade. For more information about scratches, see "Scratches or Marks Parallel to the Long Axis of Printing, Particularly with Film" on page 5-13.
s8500-052
5-36

Gray Fill, Dot Size Uniformity
This print is made up of a 66% black fill. It reveals variations in the ink-drop-spread caused by thermal variations, transfix roller pressure variations, or drum oiling variations. Look for: 1. Large area of differences in the density across the width of the page. (A slight variation is normal.) Look for a lighter vertical band, about 1/3 the width of the page, running the length of the page. Also, look for small, light spots, or irregular white lines, vertically aligned with each other, in the print every 125 mm (5.0 in.). 2. Also, look for ink on the top and bottom margin of the page, or ink on the back of the page. This pattern is sensitive to the density variations in the paper it is printed on. Use a high-quality grade of printer paper; otherwise, the print appears mottled. Causes: 1. Use the diagnostics to check the printhead and drum for correct thermal regulation. Ensure the drum fan is running properly. A vertical band, 1/3 of a page wide, running the length of the page, is caused by a stuck heating plate in the paper preheater. Run the Control Panel cleaning procedure Clean Print Smears, which raises the temperature of the paper preheater and may free the stuck heating plate. Additionally, you may manually force a thick sheet of paper (65 to 80 lb.) through the paper preheater to jar the plate free. Light spots that repeat every 11.63 cm (4.58 in.) down the length of the page are caused by a defective transfix roller. The roller has a soft spot that is not pushing the ink into the paper as well as the rest of the roller. If you observe variations in the glossiness of the print, replace the maintenance kit. 2. If there is ink on the top and bottom margin of the page or ink on the back of the page, it may be caused by the roller remaining down during the print. You may hear an unusual noise if the Transfix Roller stays down and rubs against the drum. Inspect the Drive Train and ensure that it self-homes between prints. The drive train is in its home position when the two 1.5 mm holes found on the clear plastic cover align axially with corresponding holes in the gear. Another way to verify that the drive train is in its home position is to verify that the two small leaf springs from the clear plastic cover are seated correctly in their corresponding gear detent slots. Inspect the perimeter of the cam lobes for surface defects and check to see that the angular orientations of the cams match. Inspect the transfix load arm return springs. Verify that the maintenance kit returns home between prints. Inspect the cam shaft surfaces for damage. If all of these items are working correctly, replace the process drive module.
Light band
Uneven fill Should see even fill left to right
s8500-05
Manuf. Five Duplex GSF

This print is used by Manufacturing and Engineering.
5-37

YMCKRGB Solid Fills
These seven prints show uniformity of fill. If colors are uneven or wrong, see "Color is Uneven or Color is Wrong" on page 5-9. Look for: 1. Even, uniform fills throughout each print. 2. Wrinkles or deformity of the paper itself caused by the print process show up in duplexed solid fill prints at Standard or Enhanced resolutions. To test for wrinkling, print the YMCKRGB prints in duplex mode at the Enhanced or High Resolution/Photo mode. Typically wrinkling appears in the secondary colors. See the blue and green solid fills in the illustration to the right. Causes: 1. Weak jets or uneven drum heating may cause uneven fills. 2. To solve wrinkling, try different print media. Replace the maintenance kit to correct streaking. Check the drum temperature sensor for debris build-up on the sensor. Check to see if the sensor is in improper contact with the drum. See the Reverse Text test print. As a last resort to fix wrinkling, replace the transfix roller, transfix load module, and transfix load arm.
s8500-054
Drum Seal
(8400 only)
This print is not supported for this printer.
Manuf. Paper Path

These prints are used by Manufacturing and Engineering.
5-38

Head-to-Drum Gap
(8400 only)
These prints indicate if the gap between the printhead and the drum is correct. Lines: The horizontal lines of the print are made up of long and short dashes. Inspect the first and last 1/2 in. (12 mm) of the black lines for the vertical distance between the short dashes and long dashes. A difference indicates the printhead gaps at each end of the printhead are not equal. Text: Examine each end of the band of text. Look for fuzziness or differences between the quality of the characters on the left and right ends of the print. A difference indicates the printhead gaps at each end of the printhead are not equal. The ends of this printers printhead rests on two spacers on the ends of the drum that hold the head-to-drum gap under much tighter control than in previous solid ink printers. There is no head-to-drum adjustment possible in this printer. If the gap is suspect, check that the printhead is correctly and completely installed.
EFGHIJKLMNOPQ EFGHIJKLMNOP FGHIJKLMNOPQ EFGHIJKLMNOPQ EFGHIJKLMNOP EFGHIJKLMNOP
s8500-055
Manuf X-Axis (Scanner)

(8400 only)
5-39

Black, Red, Green, Blue, Cyan, Magenta, and Yellow Solid Fills
This prints show uniformity of fill. Look for: 1. Even, uniform fills throughout the print. 2. There should be no wrinkling or deformity of the paper throughout the print. 3. Poor transfer on one side. 4. Repeating white stripes. Causes: 1. Weak jets or uneven drum heating may cause uneven fills. 2. To solve wrinkling, try different print media. Replace the maintenance kit to correct streaking. Check the drum-temperature sensor for debris build-up on the sensor or the sensor is not in proper contact with the drum. See the test print Reverse Text. 3. If there is poor transfer on one side, check to see if the transfix load arm assemblies are moving easily. Clean any contamination that may be interfering with the transfix arm assembly movement. If either of the transfix load arm assemblies are worn, replace the worn load arm assembly. 4. If there are repeating white stripes on the print, there may be a problem with the X-Axis motion, seeWhite Stripes (Pinstripes) on page 30.
s8500-056
OHP Color Bands

(8400 only) This print is used by Manufacturing and Engineering.
5-40

Primary Solid Fills 10x
This item enables you to print 10 cyan solid fill prints, 10 magenta solid fill prints, 10 yellow solid fill prints, or 10 black solid fill prints. These prints can be used to determine if the drum or transfix roller have a defect. Drum defects do not move in the X-position print-to-print; but it does move into the Y-position print-to-print. Drum defects do not repeat down the page. Transfix Roller defects do not move in the X-direction; but, these defects repeat every 4.58 in. (11.63 cm) down the length of the page. Many Transfix Roller defects will be most visible on duplex solid fills.
5-41

Manuf. Skew Margins
This print consists of an image used by manufacturing to gauge skew and margin on 2 sided prints. Skew To measure skew: the measurement between the edge of the paper and the magenta frame should be within tolerance along the entire length of the top of the paper. For example, the measurement on the top left side of the sheet should be the same as the measurement on the top right side of the sheet (within tolerance). To calculate skew: measure the margin at the leading edge of each corner, then take the difference between them. For example, if the margin at the right leading edge corner is 5.1 mm, and the margin at the left leading edge corner is 4.9 mm, then the skew would be (5.1 4.9) = 0.2 mm. The skew tolerance for the following media types are: All sizes except envelopes and custom sizes: 0.0 +/- 0.89 mm Envelopes: 0.0 +/- 1.04 mm Custom media: evaluate with the following formula: Skew Spec (mm) = 998.4*(width12.5)^(-1.02), where width is in millimeters. To measure margin, measure from the magenta frame to the edge of the paper at the midpoint on the top and left-edge margin (right side of paper, left side of printer) of the paper. The tolerance for margin is the margin +/- 2. See the Media Margin Specification in the Appendix. NOTE: The measurement for skew and margin for Side 1 and Side 2 may not match Check: The media must be supported for the tray. The side and rear guides must be adjusted to the size of the paper to ensure correct deskewing. If you have skew on simplex prints, in Tray 2, 3, or 4, check for a worn take away roller or pick roller; in Tray 1, check for a worn pick roller. This test print uses the tray selected in Paper Source on the Paper Handling Menu. If you have skew on duplex prints, check for a worn duplex roller an verify that the front door is completely closed and latched on both the left and right sides. If the lead-edge margins are outside of tolerance, check the preheater flag.
1 2 3
MM
8400 145
1 2 3 1
MM
MM
s8400-201
5-42

Manuf. Banding
(8400 only)
This print is used by Manufacturing.
Head Roll
(8400 only)
Head Height
(8400 only)
X Dot Position
(8400 only)
Y Dot Position
(8400 only)
Chase Pages
A blank piece of paper is used to remove contamination from the drum, transfix roller, and paper path.
Oil Bar Chase

Purge Efficiency
5-43

Cleaning Page
This page is automatically printed following a purge. It is used to flush the jet nozzles of any possible contamination or color mixed jets. It can also be printed on its own.
s8500-058 s8400-162
5-44
Adjustments and Calibrations

In this chapter...

Printer Component Homing Positions and Indicators Printer Calibrations Jet Substitution Mode
Section
Adjustments
Wiper Alignment Procedure
1. Remove the printer covers using the procedures that begin on page 8-4. 2. Remove the left head maintenance drive gear (see the following figure) by removing the e-clip from the drive shaft.
Left Idler Gear Left Drive Gear
s8500-059
6-2
3. At the same time, rotate the left and right idler gears until the wiper is all the way to the bottom and the gears cannot be rotated further. Rotating the left and right gears together ensures that the wiper stays parallel and does not pop out of the belts.
Wiper assembly at bottom of travel. Wiper not skewed.
Wiper skewed when lowering.
Rotate left and right idler gears to lower wiper.
s8500-060
4. Replace the left drive gear and the e-clip.
6-3
Printer Component Homing Positions and Indicators

After servicing the printer, manually set the following assemblies to their home position before powering on the printer. If the assemblies are not home, gears in the process drive assembly can grind or the printer can generate errors.

Printhead (tilted forward and disengaged from tilt gear) Tilt gear (disengaged from process drive train; arrows on left frame point to each other) Printhead wiper (bottom of travel) Process drive assembly (holes on transfix camshaft and drum maintenance camshaft line up with marks on frame, large gears within assembly line up with holes in assembly housing)
Wiper Assembly Positions

When the wiper is homed, the wiper should be moved all the way to the bottom of the printer. When the wiper is at the bottom, you can easily remove the waste tray. See the "Wiper Alignment Procedure" on page 6-2.
6-4
Homing the Head Tilt Gear

The Printhead Is Not in the Printer
If the printhead is not in the printer, move the tilt gear, located on the inside of the left frame, manually to its disengaged position.
Drum
Printhead
DM Cam Gear
Tilt gear (disengaged)
Tilt Gear
s8500-061
6-5
The Printhead Is in the Printer

1. Remove the maintenance kit. 2. Insert a flat blade screwdriver into the end of drum maintenance cam shaft and rotate clockwise one revolution. If the printhead is engaged, manually assist the movement of the printhead. Note The hole on the drum maintenance camshaft drive gear should be at the 6:00 position after the rotation.
Insert screwdriver and rotate clockwise. Drum maintenance camshaft gear

s8500-062
6-6
Note When the tilt gear is disengaged, the two arrows on the left side of the printer are pointing at each other.
Tilt Gear Disengaged
Tilt Gear Engaged

s8500-063
6-7
Homing the Process Gear Drive Train

Examine the process gear drive train for the following:

The holes is the process drive frame must align with the holes in the gear. The hole in the drum maintenance camshaft gear must align with the arrow on the frame. The hole in the transfix camshaft gear align with the hole on the frame.
6-8
Holes in process drive frame aligns with holes in gears
When installing or homing the Process Gear Train, ensure the pivot plate is fully engaged to the drum maintenance cams by pushing the Drum Maintenance Unit to the left.
Hole in gear aligns with arrow on frame
s8500-064
When correctly homed, slightly rotating the drum maintenance camshaft in either direction should result in a proportional movement of the Drum Maintenance Unit with no delays or lags.
6-9
Printer Calibrations
Wiper Alignment
See the Wiper Alignment Procedure on page 6-2.
Jet Substitution Mode

On Phaser 8400 printers, the Jet Substitution Mode provides a temporary solution for print-quality problems when weak or missing jets cannot be recovered. When Jet Substitution Mode is active, adjacent jets are used to print over the area covered by the problem jet to restore the print-quality. Jet Substitution Mode reduces the maximum imaging speed by 50% or more and has other limitations that affect printer performance. Jet Substitution Mode on Phaser 8500/8550 printers is in the Eliminate Light Stripes menu. Although it does not slow down the imaging speed as it does on Phaser 8400 printers, it still provides an end solution to eliminating light stripes.
Note Always refer to the infoSMART Knowledge Base to access the latest guidelines for using Jet Substitution Mode. Phaser 8500/8550 printers feature a Jet Substitution mode that is similar to Phaser 8400 printers, but with two important differences:
Phaser 8500/8550 Jet Substitution mode can provide an end solution instead of serving as a temporary fix (as for Phaser 8400 printers). Because Jet Substitution mode can provide an end solution, it is located in the Eliminate Light Stripes menu instead of requiring a hidden push button sequence, as is the case with Phaser 8400 printers. Most Phaser 8500/8550 users will not notice changes to print-quality or speed when using the Jet Substitution mode. It typically increases the imaging time by no more than one or two seconds per page compared to a 50% increase on Phaser 8400 printers.
The knowledge base provides new procedures for determining when to use Jet Substitution mode. Factors such as the use of the Billing Meters feature and multiple, adjacent problem jets can affect the recommended solution.
6-10
Enabling Jet Substitution Mode (8400)

To add Jet Substitution Mode to the Control Panel menu: 1. On the Control Panel, scroll to Troubleshooting, then press the OK button. 2. Scroll to Print Quality Problems, then press the OK button. 3. Press and hold the Up Arrow button, then press the Back button. The Jet Substitution Mode is now displayed on the Control Panel. To correct print-quality problems, refer to the Eliminate Light Stripes test page to determine which jets are weak or missing. 1. Select Jet Substitution Mode, then press the OK button. 2. Select Jet Select, then press the OK button. 3. Scroll to the color for the weak or missing jet, then press OK to select the color. 4. Use the Up Arrow and Down Arrow buttons to select the number of the weak or missing jet, then press OK to confirm the selection. 5. Select Save Change and Exit, and then press OK to complete the procedure. 6. After substituting a jet, print the Light Stripes Test page to verify the problem has been solved. At the bottom of the page, a Service Mode key summarizes the number of substituted jets for each color. Note The Configuration Page and Printer Status Pages also provide a list of jets in Service Mode.
Enabling Jet Substitution Mode (8500/8550)

To select Jet Substitution Mode for the Phaser 8500/8550: 1. On the control panel, select Troubleshooting, and then press the OK button. 2. Select Print Quality Problems, and then press the OK button. 3. Select Eliminate Light Stripes, and then press the OK button. 4. Select Jet Substitution Mode, and then press the OK button. 5. Follow the control panel prompts to select the color and malfunctioning jet number indicated on the Light Stripes Test page.
6-11
Disabling Jet Substitution Mode (8400)

After the printhead is replaced, disable Jet Substitution Mode to restore normal operation. Using the hidden Jet Substitution Mode Menu, select Jet Select. 1. On the Control Panel, select Troubleshooting, and then press the OK button. 2. Select Print Quality Problems, and then press the OK button. 3. Press and hold the Up Arrow button, and then press the Back button. 4. Select Turn Jet Substitution Mode Off, and then press the OK button. 5. Print the Eliminate Light Stripes test page to verify that Service Mode is disabled for all jets.
Disabling Jet Substitution Mode (8500/8550)

After the printhead is replaced, disable Jet Substitution Mode to restore normal operation. To deselect Jet Substitution Mode: 1. On the Control Panel, scroll to Troubleshooting, then press the OK button. 2. Select Print Quality Problems, and then press the OK button. 3. Select Eliminate Light Stripes, and then press the OK button. 4. Select Turn Jet Substitution Mode Off, and then press the OK button. 5. Print the Eliminate Light Stripes test page to verify that Service Mode is disabled for all jets.
Resetting NVRAM
Resetting NVRAM returns all the Image Processor Board NVRAM-stored parameters to their factory default values. The print counts and the Adobe firmware serial number are not affected by this reset. You can reset the PostScript NVRAM using the Service Tools Menu or the Service Diagnostics Menu.
6-12
Cleaning and Maintenance

In this chapter...

Maintenance Inspection Cleaning
Section
Service Cleaning Maintenance Procedure

Cleaning your printer may be necessary if the printer is having print-quality or paperfeeding problems. Some cleaning procedures, such as purging the jet nozzles are done automatically when necessary. Other procedures, such as scrubbing the paper-feed rollers with an alcohol-moistened, lint free wipe, must be done by customers, but only if the rollers are visibly dirty. Cleaning may be indicated by any of the following:

Light stripes or missing colors appear in prints. Ink smears or random streaks appear on the front or back of prints. Oily spots appear along the tops of prints. Mispicks or multiple picks occur at the media tray. Persistent paper jams inside the printer or at the media tray if the rollers are visibly dirty. Wiggly vertical stripes caused by too much oil created by a dirty maintenance kit blade. Most print-quality problems can be corrected by running the cleaning procedures on the printers Control Panel menu.
Cleaning
Supplies Required

90% pure isopropyl alcohol Foam swabs
Alcohol-moistened, lint-free wipes Clear packaging tape
Caution Do not use rubbing alcohol because it can contain water and oils that leave undesirable residue on the printer parts. Never use water to clean the printers internal components. Clean dust build-up on the exterior of the printer. Inspect the grills on the exterior of the printer for dust. Clean if necessary
7-2
Appropriate cleaning procedures, as listed in the following tables, should be performed when specific print-quality or paper transport problems occur. All cleaning procedures are detailed in the printers Phaser 8400 Reference Guide or the Phaser 8500/8550 Users Guide. Light Stripes or Missing Colors
Problem type
Missing or light-colored stripes on prints.
Solution
Select the automated procedure Eliminate Light Stripes from the Control Panel.
Ink Smears, Oil Spots, or Random Ink Streaks

Problem type
Ink smears on the front, back, or edges of a page.
Solution
Select the automated procedure Remove Print Smears from the Control Panel. Check the maintenance kit for ink and paper-dust build-up on the wiper blade. Select the automated procedure Remove Print Smears from the Control Panel.
Oil (drum fluid) on top edge of print.
Media Jams: Note Refer to the jam codes in "Jam Codes" on page 3-55.
Problem type
Paper-pick or jamming problems at the tray. Paper jamming problems at the front door. Paper jamming problems at the exit. Paper-pick or jamming problems at the Optional 525-Sheet Feeder, Tray 3, or Tray 4. Duplex path jam Double picks
Solution
Clean the pick roller. Follow the "Pick Roller Cleaning Method" on page 7-4. Clean the transport rollers.
Clean the exit rollers and paper release blade.
Clean the appropriate tray assembly feed roller.
Clean the preheat, duplex, and exit rollers. Clean the pick rollers and separator pad with alcohol. Clean pick pad with clear packaging tape using the procedure "Pick Roller Cleaning Method" on page 7-4.
7-3
Pick Roller Cleaning Method

Tray 1
Tray 1 pick roller can be cleaned with an alcohol moistened swab. 1. Open the front cover. 2. Rotate the roller and clean it with an alcohol-moistened swab. 3. Rotate the roller so that the flat side is facing down. 4. Close the front cover.
Trays 2-4
Use off-the-shelf clear packaging tape and follow the procedures listed below to clean the pick roller and pick pad for Trays 2-4. This cleaning method has been found to be extremely effective for removing debris. Isopropyl alcohol, while effective, tends to smear the debris, rather than remove it. 1. Remove the tray with the paper-picking or paper jamming problem (Tray 2, 3, or 4). 2. Peel off a strip of tape. Stretch the tape across the table with the sticky side up. Fasten it to the table at both ends. 3. Remove the roller. 4. Roll the roller across the tape to remove the debris from the roller. 5. Locate a clean section of the tape, rub it onto the surface of the pick pad for the paper tray, then remove it. 6. Replace the roller. 7. Reinsert the tray.
Drum Temperature Sensor

With a dry swab, clean any buildup around the drum temperature sensor. You can access the sensor through the opened exit cover. Also, make sure the sensor rides evenly on the drum surface. You can remove the sensor, if necessary, to clean under it.
7-4
Maintenance
Maintenance Kit
The printer uses the Maintenance Kit as part of its self-maintenance routine to coat the print drum with oil before each print. Maintenance Kit Life Standard/Startup Maintenance Kit Life
Any Coverage* P/N 108R00602 (8400 series) The Phaser 8500 only supports the standard kit. P/N 108R00675 (8500/8550) 10,000 cycles for black and white, 5500 cycles for color. (8400) 10,000 cycles regardless of colors used.
Extended Maintenance Kit Life

0 - 20% Coverage* 20 - 100% Coverage*
P/N 108R00603 (8400 series) P/N 108R00676 (8550 series) 30,000 20,000-30,000
*The image coverage is determined by counting the number of pixels imaged.
A Control Panel message indicates when the maintenance kit is low. Printing is still possible when the maintenance kit is low. When a Control Panel message indicates that the maintenance kit is empty, the maintenance kit must be replaced before continued printing is possible. Refer to the installation instructions included with the maintenance kit. Note The maintenance kit fluid, an oil, poses no known adverse health effects. See the Material Safety Data Sheet at www.xerox.com/office/msds.
Waste Tray
The waste tray collects ink that has been purged from the printers ink jets. A Control Panel message indicates when the waste tray is full. Refer to the printers Phaser 8400 Reference Guide or the Phaser 8500/8550 Users Guide for instructions on removing and emptying the waste tray. A Control Panel message displays when the waste tray needs to be emptied (usually after seven purges). Never reuse waste ink in the printer; it will damage the printhead.
7-5
Lubrication
The printer is lubricated during assembly at the factory and requires no periodic lubrication. Some parts require lubrication following replacement. These parts are identified in the replacement procedures. When lubricating during replacement, use the grease approved for all Phaser printers. The grease part number is 006-7997-00. Caution Plastic parts will deteriorate when unspecified grease and chemicals are used, such as WD-40 and Locktite Threadlocker. To avoid damage, use only the grease specified in the Lubrication section of the Service Manual.
Inspection
Rollers: Replace the rollers when you see any of the following defects:

Flat spots Out of roundness Cracked rubber Loss of traction (tackiness) causing pick or feed failures
Gears: Replace gears that show any signs of wear or breakage. Look for these problems:

Thinned gear teeth Bent or missing gear teeth; check especially where a metal gear drives a plastic gear. Fractured or cracked gears (Oil or incorrect grease on a plastic gear can cause the gear to crack.)
Belts: There are 3 rubber belts in the printer. Inspect the belts for wear. Look for these problems:

Loose rubber particles below the belts indicate a worn belt. Missing teeth in the belts Cracking or moderate fraying; a small amount of fraying is inevitable, so look for other signs of wear before replacing the belt.
7-6
Service Parts Disassembly

In this chapter...

Overview General Notes on Disassembly Covers Imaging Paper Path Motors, Gears, Solenoids, Clutches, and Fans Electronics
Section
Overview
This section contains the removal and replacement procedures for selected parts of the printer according to the Field Replaceable Units (Service Parts) Parts List. In general, replacement procedures are not given because re-installing a part is usually simply a reversal of the disassembly. Replacement procedures are included where this is not the case and special steps are required. Replacement notes are included when they can help ease or shorten the reassembly process.
Standard Orientation of the Printer

When needed the orientation of the printer is called out in the procedure for locating printer parts. Refer to the printer orientation graphic for locating the right, left, front and back sides of the printer.
Back Left
Right
Front
s8500-002
8-2
General Notes on Disassembly

Caution Follow the steps of all disassembly procedures in the order given to avoid damaging printer components. 1. Before servicing the printer, switch OFF the printer power, wait until the printer completely shuts down, and disconnect the power cord from the wall outlet. 2. Wear an electrostatic discharge wrist strap to help prevent damage to the sensitive electronics of the printer circuit boards. 3. Upon reassembly of printer components, be sure the components are all in their home positions, otherwise damage to the printer will occur. See Chapter 6 Adjustments, Home Position page 6-2 for information on the home positions.
Special Notes Regarding Screws Used in This Equipment.
Screws in plastic are torqued to 12 in. lbs., metal to 15 in lbs., unless otherwise specified. The screws for the printhead restraints should be torqued to 6 in. lbs. Do not over torque the screws threaded into plastic parts. Always use the correct type and size screw; coarse thread, brass-colored screws into plastic and fine thread, silver-colored screws into metal. Using the wrong screw can damage tapped holes. This applies to the yellow reverse-threaded screws on the drum assembly. Do not use excessive force to remove or install either a screw or a printer part. If using a power driver to install a screw into plastic, start the screw by hand. If you strip out threads in the plastic chassis, a silver-blue-tinted thread repair screw (included in the hardware kit) can be used to correct the problem. If you remove a silver-blue-tinted thread repair screw during disassembly, replace the screw the same location or additional damage to the printer will occur.
Warning Unplug the AC power cord from the wall outlet before removing any printer part.
Notations in the Disassembly Text
The notation (item X) points to a numbered callout in the illustration corresponding to a part or step being performed. The notation PLX.X.X indicates that this component is listed in the Service Parts List. Bold arrows in an illustration show direction of movement when removing or replacing a component.
8-3
Covers
6 3
7 2 5 Tab
Tab
1 8
Tab
9
s8500-068
1. Front Door, Tray 1 (MPT) 2. Control Panel Cover 3. Control Panel 4. Right Side Cover 5. Left Side Cover
6. Exit Cover 7. Ink Loader Assembly and Door 8. Interface Cover 9. Side Door
8-4
Front Door (Tray 1) Assembly

(PL 1.1) 1. Open the Front Door assembly (Tray 1) by pulling out on the handle to the right side of the door.
s8500-065
2. Remove the right and left stay retainers from the Front Door (MPT). 3. Open the plug cover and disconnect the plug from the right side of Front Door (Tray1/MPT). 4. Free the plug wiring from cable retainer on the right side of Front Door (MPT). 5. Carefully remove the Front Door (Tray 1/MPT) assembly (PL1.3), by releasing the left hinge pin (PL1.4) from the printer frame and sliding the assembly to the right to remove it.
Stay Retainer
1
2
Stay Retainer
s8500-066
Note Do not lose the hinge pins or stay retainers for the front door.
8-5
Control Panel Cover

(PL 1.5) 1. Open the Exit Cover.
Exit Cover
Control Panel Cover Control Panel
Open exit cover from Cleaning Kit

Front Door
s8500-067
2. Using either your fingers or a small flathead screwdriver, loosen the Control Panel Cover on the left side and then slide it forward and lift up to remove it from the printer.
Front (Control) Panel

(PL 1.7) 1. Remove the Control Panel Cover (as directed above). 2. Disconnect the two wiring harness connectors and one ribbon cable connector from the back of the Control Panel. 3. Remove the Control Panel (see Covers figure on page 8-4).
Right Side Cover

(PL 1.10) 1. Open the exit cover. 2. Remove the Control Panel Cover (as directed above). 3. Open the Front Door. 4. Remove the rear screw. 5. Pull forward on the latching tab located by the power plug (see Covers figure on page 8-4) to release it. 6. Release the front latching tab and pull out on the top to remove the Right Side Cover.
8-6
Left Side Cover

(PL 1.9) 1. Remove the Control Panel Cover. 2. Open the Exit Cover and Front Door. 3. Remove the rear screw. 4. Release the latching tabs (see Covers figure on page 8-4) and remove the Left Side Cover.
Exit Cover
(PL 1.7) 1. Remove the Right and Left Side Covers. 2. The exit cover (see Covers figure on page 8-4) will now just lift off the printer.
Replacement Note:
Note Lift the upper exit guide slightly, and engage the pins on the upper exit guide with the slots on the Exit Cover before inserting the cover hinge pins into the pivot points in the printer frame.
8-7
Ink Loader Assembly and Door

(PL 1.8) 1. Remove the Right and Left Side Covers (page 8-6) and the Exit Cover (page 8-7). 2. Lift the Ink Loader Assembly clear of the chassis and hold it in position against the rear of the chassis to allow access to the connectors. For Phaser 8400 printers, the Ink Loader disconnects from the printer frame. For Phaser 8500/ 8550 printers, the wiring harness that plugs into the right side frame disconnects directly from the Ink Loader. Note Hooks on the bottom of the Ink Loader Assembly allow it to hang on the rear of the printer chassis while the connectors are removed. 3. Disconnect the two Ink Loader harness connectors from the printer chassis and remove the Ink Loader, Assembly and Door as one unit.
8400
8500/8550
s8500-069
8-8
Replacement Note:
Note For the Phaser 8400, the gray cable from the side chassis must be routed between the Ink Loader and the printer side. The cable from the ink loader must be routed towards the left side (see inset). For the Phaser 8500/8550, the cable comes from the side of the chassis and plugs directly into the inkloader. After replacing the Phaser 8500/8550 ink loader, use the hidden Service menu to reset the ink stick count.
Imaging
Y-Axis Belt, Y-Axis Tension Spring, and Y-Axis Motor Assembly
(PL 2.4) (PL 2.14) (PL 4.4) 1. Remove the left side cover (see page 8-7). 2. Relieve tension on the belt by pulling the end of the spring arm toward the front of the printer using your fingers. 3. Slide the belt off the pulley.
Y-Axis Belt
Y-Axis Tension Spring
s8500-070
8-9
4. Using a spring hook or pliers, remove the Y-Axis tension spring from the chassis retainer and the spring arm. Brace the printer to keep it from moving during removal of the spring. Warning Safety glasses recommended for Step 4. Caution This is a strong spring that can cause damage if it slips during removal; use extreme caution when removing. 5. Move the wires out of the way. 6. Disconnect the motor wiring harness connector from the printer. 7. Remove four screws (three coarse thread and one fine thread) from the spring arm. The three screws securing the arm to the motor remain in place.
20 in-lbs.
Y-Axis Motor Assembly

s8500-071
8. If replacing the motor, remove 3 motor screws to separate the motor from the arm and remove the spring arm.
8-10
Replacement Notes:
Note Ensure the spring arm screws are in the right locations and that the arm floats freely. Also, torque the screws connecting the spring arm to the motor to 20 in.-lbs. Caution Ensure that the ground lug is replaced on the mounting screw (see figure above) during replacement.
8-11
Printhead Assembly, Right and Left Printhead Restraints

(PL 2.4) (PL 2.5 and 2.6) Videos are available with instructions for replacing the printhead assembly. Videos are located on the Phaser 8400/8500/8550 Product Training CD-ROM. Select Service and then select Printhead Procedures. Warning The printhead is hot when the printer is operating. Turn off power to the printer and allow the printhead to cool for 30 minutes before starting removal procedure. Caution Perform the steps in this procedure in the order given to prevent damage to the printer. 1. Remove the ink loader assembly and door (see page 8-8). Caution Place several sheets of paper between the faceplate of the printhead and the drum to protect the drum from damage. 2. On the right side of the printer, lift up on the Wiper Assembly Lock (#1 on the figure below) to unlock the Wiper Assembly gear train.
Wiper Assembly Lock Gear
Printhead Restraint Printhead Restraint Arm Printhead
Printhead Restraint Printhead Restraint Arm

s8500-073
8-12
3. Rotate the gears as shown by #2 above to lower the wiper all the way down. Caution To prevent damage to the ink jets, be careful not to place your fingers on the faceplate of the printhead. 4. While pulling back slightly on the printhead to keep it away from the drum surface, unlock (push down) the right and left printhead restraint arms, #3 above, then slowly allow the spring-loaded printhead to tilt forward. 5. On the left side of the printer, pull the X-Axis bias spring and hook out slightly and shift to the side (rotate down), see #1 and #2 of the following figure. Allow the spring hook to rest against the detentes in the printer frame.
Purge Pump Bias Spring Hook
1.
2.
s8500-074
6. Disconnect the air hose from the purge pump (see figure above).
8-13
7. Remove left and right printhead restraints. First remove the screw, then pull inward towards the printhead, then lift up and slightly toward the rear of the printer to remove (see figure below).
Printhead Restraint
When reassembling, torque to 6 in/lbs (1 N-m) Printhead Restraint
s8500-075
Note Adjust printhead position as required to remove the right restraint. 8. Remove the Roll Block on the left end of the printhead shaft. Caution The roll block may be hot if the printer was just shut down.
Printhead Shaft
Roll Block
s8500-076
8-14
9. Disconnect the heater harness plug and free the harness (see the following figure) from its restraint.
Finger Holes Cable Restraint Cradle Notch
Flex Cable
Flex Cable (8400 Only) Data Cable Heater Cable Heater Harness Plug EMI Tape (8500/8550)
Ground Strap (8500/8550 Only)

s8500-077
8-15
10. Lift the printhead out of its mounting position and place the shaft ends in the cradle notches near the top of the chassis frame (see the following figure).
Cradle Notches
s8500-078
11. Disconnect the data cable from the print head (see the figure above). 12. Disconnect the flex cable from the printhead (Phaser 8400 printers have two cables). Warning Do not pinch or tear the air hose while removing the printhead as this will damage the printer. 13. Lift the printhead free of the printer chassis.
Replacement Notes:
The following replacement steps are basically the reverse of the disassembly steps and provide important precautions. Caution To avoid damage observe the following order when reinstalling the printhead. 1. Ensure that the tilt gear is in the home position (see page 6-5). 2. Rest the printhead on the cradle notches provided (see the previous illustration) while reconnecting the cable and flex connector.
8-16
3. Insert the ribbon cable fully and squarely into the flex connector. Caution Ensure that the flex cable is inserted into the flex connector on the printhead fully and squarely. If the cable is not inserted incorrectly, it can short out the Wave Amp. 4. Connect the data cable connector and heater harness connector. Warning The printhead heater cable not only needs to be routed through the cable restraint, but also needs to be clear of the printhead to prevent interference which would result in errors 7009 and 4025 fault codes. Caution Before reinstalling the printhead, move the wiper all the way down. 5. Lower the printhead into its mounts. The printhead should be tilted forward in the print position. Caution Be sure to remove any sheets of paper that you placed between the faceplate of the printhead and the drum during disassembly. 6. Route the air hose through the frame and connect it to the purge pump. 7. Install the Roll Block on the left end of the printhead Shaft. The Roll Block must be oriented as shown on the paper label on the left side of the printer frame. 8. Install the left and right printhead restraints. Be sure to tighten the screws to 6 in. lb. to avoid stripping the chassis threads. Caution Ensure that the tilt spring on the left restraint is properly positioned in the notch on the back of the printhead and does not pinch the air hose. 9. Set the X-Axis bias hook and spring on the end of the left printhead shaft. Ensure that the point of the hook is centered in the shaft and the rest of the hook floats freely. 10. After completing the installation, print the Light Stripes Page and check for jets in service mode. If necessary, use the Control Panel to reset the jet substitution mode.
8-17
Head Tilt Solenoid

(Phaser 8500/8550 only) (PL 4.12) 1. Remove the left side cover (see page 8-7) and the right side cover (see page 8-6). 2. Remove the printhead (see page 8-12). 3. Lower the wiper blade to its lowest position. 4. From the chassis left side, disconnect the connector attached to the head tilt solenoid. 5. Remove the screw from the head tilt solenoid, then swing the unit out to the left until the solenoid is free from the chassis.
Head Tilt Solenoid

s8500-079
Note Be careful not to lose the restraining spring from the unit.
Replacement Notes:
Caution To ensure proper operation of the printhead, observe the following order when reinstalling the head tilt solenoid. 1. Insert the plastic end of head tilt solenoid into the chassis, swing to the right and replace the screw in the chassis. 2. Using a screwdriver from the right side of the chassis, turn the lower screw of the process drive clockwise until you hear the tilt head solenoid snap into place.
8-18
X-Axis Bias Spring

(PL2.19) 1. Remove the printhead (see page 8-12). Caution The spring is in close proximity to the drum. Be careful with the removal tools and the spring to ensure that you do not damage the drum. 2. Using your hands, a spring hook, or pliers, remove the X-Axis bias spring from inside the printer cavity.
X-Axis Bias Spring
s8500-080
Replacement Note:
Note Do not rotate the spring more than 1/4 turn.
8-19
Printhead Wiper
(PL 2.7) Videos are available with instructions for replacing the printhead assembly. Videos are located on the Phaser 8400/8500/8550 Product Training CD-ROM. Select Service and then select Replacement Videos). 1. Remove the printhead (see page 8-12). Caution Place several sheets of paper between the printhead and the drum to protect the drum from damage. 2. Using the gears, position the wiper blade all the way up. 3. On the left side of the printer remove the KL clip and gear as shown below.
KL-Clip
Large Drive Gear
Wiper Belt
Wiper Clip
s8500-081
8-20
4. Remove the left plastic clip from the wiper belt and slide the wiper off of the belt. Note For the early model Phaser 8500/8550 printer, insert a small flatblade screwdriver between the backside of the left wiper clip and the flat side of the belt (see lower inset of the previous illustration). Applying a small amount of pressure against the plastic wiper clip with the screwdriver, you can gently slide the wiper off the belts.
Replacement Note:
1. Position the wiper so both ends are all the way down following reassembly (see "Wiper Alignment Procedure" on page 6-2). 2. When reinstalling the belt into the wiper clip in the Phaser 8500/8550 printer, place the belt partly on the clip, and then press the center of the clip with a small needle-nose plier until the belt is secured in the clip.
Wiper Belt Wiper Clip
s8500-082
Later versions of Phaser 8500/8550 serial numbered WYN1xxxxx or WYP1xxxxx use the wider style wiper drive belt and wiper of the Phaser 8400. Refer to the Service Bulletin 701 for more information.
8-21
Media Release Blade Carriage Assembly and Transfix Roller

(PL 2.13) Videos are available with instructions for replacing the Transfix Roller. Videos are located on the Phaser 8400/8500/8550 Product Training CD-ROM. Select Service and then select Transfix Load Module Procedures). 1. Remove the Right Side Cover (see page 8-6). 2. Disconnect J250 from the I/O Board. 3. Remove the Control Panel cover. 4. Remove two screws securing the I/O Board to the chassis, slide the board towards the rear, and move the board out of the way. 5. Loosen the screw securing the Transfix Roller Shaft Restraint and remove the restraint. Caution Hold the Transfix Roller and the Media Release Blade with one hand during removal to prevent the Transfix Roller from falling and damaging the printer. Also, do not use the transfix roller shaft restraint as a lever to pry the shaft. Doing so can bend the restraint. 6. Use the end of the Transfix Roller Shaft Restraint to pull the shaft out and remove the shaft from the printer (see figure on the next page). 7. Remove the Media Release Blade and Transfix Roller.
s8500-083
8-22
Paper Preheater and Deskew Assembly

(PL 2.17) 1. Open the Front Door. 2. Remove the Lower Duplex Guide (see page 8-41). 3. Remove the Inner Simplex Guide (see page 8-41). 4. Unplug the AC and sensor flag connectors from the bottom of the Preheater. Note Release the lock on the back of the AC connector.
AC Connector
Sensor Flag Connector
s8500-084
5. Slide the latches in and forward to latch in their slots as shown by (1) and (2) in the following figure.
8-23
6. Slide the Preheater off the shelves and out of the printer as shown by (3). Note Phaser 8500/8550 preheater is more difficult to slide out than the Phaser 8400 preheater because there is less clearance with the Preheater Lift solenoid.
Latches
1 1
2
3
s8500-085
Replacement Note:
Note The fingers on the Inner Simplex Guide, go over the segmented roller. First snap the left retainer into place, then the right.
8-24
Duplex Roller
(PL 3.10) 1. Open the Front Door. 2. Remove the upper and lower duplex guides (see page 8-41). 3. Remove the Duplex Roller by removing the left KL-clip on the shaft and sliding the left side bearing down the shaft toward the right (1). Then slide the shaft toward the left (2) to free the right end of the shaft. Finally, pull the shaft out towards the right side of the printer (3).
KL-Clip 1 3
2 Bearing
s8500-086
8-25
Transfix Load Module

(PL 3.9) Videos are available with instructions for replacing the Transfix Load Module assembly. Videos are located on the Phaser 8400/8500/8550 Product Training CD-ROM. Select Service, and then select Transfix Load Module Procedures. 1. Remove the Front Door (MPT) assembly (see page 8-4). 2. Remove the Ink Loader Assembly and Door (see page 8-8). 3. Remove the Paper Preheater (see page 8-23). Note You dont need to remove the preheater if the transfix ground springs are put on after the load module is installed. 4. Remove the Media Drive Gearbox (see page 8-48). Note Step 4 is not required if you are only removing the Duplex Roller. 5. Remove four screws, disconnect two connectors, and remove the Exit Module (see page 8-40). 6. Remove the upper and lower duplex guides (see page 8-41). 7. Remove the Duplex Roller by removing the left KL-clip on the shaft and sliding the left side bearing down the shaft toward the right (1) (see preceding figure). Then slide the shaft toward the left (2) to free the right end of the shaft. Finally, pull the shaft out towards the right side of the printer (3).
8-26
8. Insert a T-20 Torxbit through the slotted hole in the Transfix Load Module, engage the hole on the back of the module, and gently lever the modules spring cam toward the center of the printer to release/unhook the spring hooks from the Transfix Load Arms. Slowly relax the lever to return the spring cam to the relaxed position. Caution Ensure that you lever the spring cam towards the center. Applying the pressure in the wrong direction can damage the Transfix Load Module. Also, placing too much force in the leverage action could destroy the cam.
s8500-087
8-27
9. Remove the clevis pins (1) securing the Transfix Load Arms (2) to the chassis, and remove the Transfix Load Arms and Transfix Roller.
Clevis Pin
Transfix Load Arm
Add Grease
s8500-088
10. Remove the Transfix Camshaft (see page 8-31)
8-28
11. Remove the grounding springs from the Transfix Load Module.
Grounding Springs
s8500-089
12. Remove two screws securing each end of the Transfix Load Module to the chassis.
s8500-090
8-29
13. Remove the Transfix Load Module by rotating the bottom in and pulling it forward. Note The Transfix Load Module is a very tight fit, remove carefully.
s8500-092
Replacement Notes:
Note Place a small amount of Rheolube 768 grease (P/N 00679900) in the groove on the end of each Transfix Load Arm (see figure at Step 9) before reattaching the spring hooks. Note After installing the Exit Module, perform the Wiper Alignment (see page 6-2). The printer may report error code 7,009.4x if the wiper assembly is misaligned.
8-30
Transfix Camshaft Assembly

(PL 3.8) 1. Perform Steps 1 through 7 (remove Transfix Load Arms) of the Transfix Load Module removal procedure (see page 8-26). 2. Remove the Process Drive Gearbox assembly (see page 8-51). 3. Slide the shaft to the right (1) and make sure the bearing slides over to the gear, move the shaft down and slightly to the right (2) and then up and to the left (3) to remove it from the printer chassis cavity.
Transfix Camshaft 1 3
s8500-093
8-31
Drum Maintenance Camshaft Assembly

(PL 2.11) 1. Remove both the Drum Maintenance Pivot Plate Assembly (see page 8-33). 2. Remove the Process Drive Gearbox assembly (see page 8-51). 3. Slide the shaft to the right, free the bushing, and remove the shaft to the right. 4. Carefully pry the bushing out of the right ground plane. 5. Rotate the left end of the shaft slightly toward the rear of the printer, lift the shaft through the slot, and pull it out to the right through the large hole.
Drum Maintenance Camshaft Bushing
s8500-094
8-32
Drum Maintenance Pivot Plate Assembly

(PL 2.10) 1. Remove the Drum Maintenance Kit Assembly. 2. Remove both the Right and Left Side Covers (see page 8-6). 3. Remove the grounding clip on the right end of the Pivot Plate Shaft. 4. Remove the KL-clip on the right end of the Pivot Plate Shaft. 5. Remove the Pivot Plate Shaft. 6. Disconnect the connector from the I/O Board (black/white). 7. Feed the cable into the printer while sliding the Drum Maintenance Pivot Plate out the drum maintenance drawer cavity.
Metal Plate 1 2 3 KL Clip
Grease Points Grounding Clip
Metal Plate
s8500-095
Replacement Note:
Note Lightly grease the metal plates on which the cams ride, using a small quantity of Rheolube 768 grease (P/N 00679900). Also fill the pocket under the shaft ground with grease.
8-33
Drum Assembly
(PL 2.8) Videos are available with instructions for replacing the Drum Assembly. Videos are located on the Phaser 8400/8500/8550 Product Training CD-ROM. Select Service and then select Replacement Videos). 1. Remove the Front Door Assembly as described on page 8-4. 2. Remove Ink Loader Assembly, right and left side covers, and exit cover as described on page 8-8. 3. Remove the lower inner duplex guide as described on page 8-41. 4. Ensure that the printhead is in park position (tilted back) and the Wiper Assembly is in the home position (all the way down). 5. Insert a T-20 Torxbit through the right slotted hole in the Transfix Load Module, engage the hole on the back of the module, and lever the modules spring cam toward the center of the printer to release/unhook the spring hooks from the Transfix Load Arms. Slowly relax the lever to return the spring cam to the relaxed position. (See the figure on page 8-27.) Repeat for the other side. Note Ensure that you lever the spring cam towards the center. Applying the pressure in the wrong direction can damage the Transfix Load Module. 6. From the right side of the printer, remove 3 screws from the Drum Fan Assembly and allow the fan to hang free. 7. Relieve tension on the belt by pulling the end of the spring arm toward the front of the printer using your fingers. (See the figure on page 8-9.) 8. Slide the belt off the pulley. Note Refer to the illustration on the next page to locate the cables and connectors listed in the remaining instructions. 9. Unplug the Drum Heater Cable from the Relay Board and free the cable from the retaining hook. 10. Unplug the Drum Encoder Cable connector from the Power Control Left Cable and free the cable from the retaining hook. 11. Unplug the Drum Thermistor Cable connector from the I/O Board.
8-34
12. Remove the Exit Module assembly (see page 8-40).
Exit Module Assembly J850 Media Release Blade Assembly Drum Thermistor Transfix Load Arm Cable Connector to I/O Board
Drum Heater Cable 110 Connector (J250) to Control Panel Cable (Not Shown)
Drum Encoder Cable Drum Heater Relay Board Power Control Left Cable
s8500-091
Caution The Drum Thermal Sensor Cable is routed through the Exit Module. Use care during removal to avoid damaging the sensor. 13. Remove the clevis pins securing the Transfix Load Arms to the chassis and remove the Transfix Load Arms and the Media Release Blade Carriage Assembly. (See the figure on page 8-28.) 14. Remove 3 left-handed screws (8500/8550) and washers from the right side of the Drum Assembly. Note that one of the screws has no washer. The 8400 uses 3 right-handed screws. 15. Remove 3 screws and washers from the left side of the Drum Assembly.
8-35
16. Remove the Drum Assembly from the chassis by lifting it straight up as shown in the following figure. Note You will need to temporarily remove 3 screws of the media drive motor (PL 4.8) and pull the motor out of the way before you can lift the drum and pulley from the chassis.
Yellow Left-Hand Threaded Screws
No Washer
s8500-096
Caution Never rest the drum on its pulley. Let the pulley hang over the edge of a surface and place the drum on its feet.
Replacement Notes:
1. Gently seat the Drum Assembly into the chassis. Caution The Drum Thermal Sensor Cable is routed through the Exit Module. Use care when reinstalling to avoid damaging the sensor. Note To help seat the drum properly, the following steps 2-6 provide an explicit order of placement for installing the screws to secure the drum assembly to the chassis.
8-36
2. Align the screw holes in the left and right sides of the drum assembly to the holes in the chassis sides. 3. Install one silver screw at the rear position of the left-side of the chassis to hold the left side of the drum assembly and torque the screw to 25 in.-lbs. 4. Install the remaining two silver screws into the bottom and front chassis locations to the left side of the drum assembly. 5. Install one yellow reverse-threaded screw at the rear position of the right-side chassis to hold the right side of the drum assembly and torque to 25 in.-lbs. 6. Install the remaining two yellow reverse-threaded screws into the bottom location (without a washer) and the front location (with a washer) on the right side of the drum assembly. 7. Spread apart the chassis handles near the left and right labyrinth seals to ensure the bearing is properly sealed. 8. Align the clevis on the Transfix Load Arms with the holes in the mounting ears on the Drum. The Transfix Load Arms point in the opposite direction from the Drum Thermistor. Ensure that the cam followers on the Transfix Load Arms are under the Transfix Cams. 9. Insert the clevis pins through the clevis and the mounting ears on the drum (pins are inserted from the outside). Ensure that the o-rings are mounted on the inside end of each clevis pin. 10. Align the Exit Module to the chassis and route the Drum Thermistor cable through the opening in the Exit Module that the other cables pass through. Seat the Exit Module on the two front locating pins and then on the rear locating pins. 11. Insert and torque the four screws securing the Exit Module Assembly to 15 in.-lbs. 12. Apply a small quantity of Rheolube 768 grease (P/N 00679900) to the spring hooks groove of the Transfix Load Arms. Note Ensure that you lever the spring cam towards the center. Applying the pressure in the wrong direction can damage the Transfix Load Module (see the figure on page 8-27). 13. Insert a T-20 Torxbit through the right side slotted hole in the Transfix Load Module, engage the hole on the back of the module, and lever the modules spring cam toward the center of the printer while connecting the spring hooks to the Transfix Load Arms. Repeat for the other side. 14. Pull the lower end of the Y-Axis spring arm toward the front of the printer and install the Y-Axis belt first on the motor pulley and then on the drum pulley. (It is not necessary to align the belt on the drum pulley.) Ensure that the grooves of the belt align in the grooves of the motor pulley and that the cross-ribs are away from the pulleys. 15. Reposition the Media Drive Motor, insert the 3 screws, and torque the screws to 12 in.-lbs. 16. Connect the Media Drive Motor Fan and Media Drive Motor cables. Bend the cable retainer as required to hold the fan cable.
8-37
17. Connect the Drum Heater Cable to the Relay Board. 18. Connect the Drum Encoder Cable to the Power Control Left Cable. 19. Connect the Drum Thermal Sensor Cable to the I/O Board. Caution The Drum Thermal Sensor Cable is routed through the Exit Module. Use care when reinstalling to avoid damaging the sensor. 20. Connect the Exit Module Cable to the I/O Board. 21. Ensure that the Drum Heater Cable and Drum Encoder Cable are dressed correctly and secured by the retainer hook at the Process Gear Assembly. 22. Reinstall the Drum Fan Assembly and secure it with 3 screws. Torque the top screw into the Labyrinth Seal to 20 in.-lbs. and the other two screws into the chassis to 12 in.-lbs. 23. Pass the Media Release Blade Solenoid cable through the right side of the chassis and seat the Lower Inner Duplex Guide on the four mounting pins on the chassis. 24. Install the Ink Loader Assembly (see page 8-8). 25. Reinstall all covers and doors.
8-38
Purge Pressure Pump

(PL 2.7) 1. Remove the left side cover (see "Left Side Cover" on page 8-7). 2. Disconnect the air hose from the Purge Pressure Pump. 3. Disconnect the wiring harness from the Purge Pressure Pump. 4. Remove three screws and remove the Purge Pressure Pump.
s8500-097
8-39
Paper Path
Exit Module Assembly
(PL 3.15) 1. Remove the Exit Cover and both side covers (see page 8-7). 2. Remove the three screws securing the media drive motor, and let the motor hang. 3. Disconnect three connectors: two on the right (I/O Board J680 and J870) and one on the left. Caution The Drum thermal and sensor cable (J870) passes through the Exit Module. Do not damage this cable during removal. The cable must be re-routed through the Exit Module during installation. 4. Remove the four screws holding the Exit Module Assembly to the printer chassis and remove the Exit Module Assembly. Note You may need to remove the paper path motor to access the screw.
s8500-132
Replacement Note:
After installing the Exit Module, perform the Wiper Alignment (see page 6-2). The printer may report error code 7,009.4x if the wiper assembly is misaligned.
8-40
Paper Guides
Inner Simplex Guide
(PL 3.1) 1. Open the printer Front Door to access the guide. 2. Using a small flatblade screwdriver, pry inward on one retainer to remove it from the mounting post then remove the other retainer. 3. Slide the guide down and forward to remove.
Replacement Note:
Note The fingers on the Inner Simplex Guide, go over the segmented roller. First snap the left retainer into place, then the right.
Lower Inner Duplex Guide

(PL 3.2) 1. Open the Front Door of the printer. 2. Pull out on the tabs at the bottom of the guide and let the guide swing free. 3. Pry inward (toward the center of the printer) on the right upper retainer until it is free of the mounting boss and remove the guide.
Lower Exit-Guide Assembly with Strip Flag

(PL 3.3) 1. Open Exit Door. 2. Lift upward on the center of the guide, then flex the left retainer inward to remove it. 3. Remove the right retainer and remove the guide.
Outer Duplex Paper Guide With Sensors (Safety Interlocks)

(PL 3.4) 1. Remove the Control Panel (see page 8-6). 2. Remove 4 screws and remove the guide.
8-41
Upper Duplex Guide with Solenoid

(PL 3.5) 1. Remove the Right Side Cover (see page 8-6). 2. Remove the Outer Duplex Paper Guide as specified in the preceding paragraph. 3. Disconnect the solenoid connector from the I/O board and extract the harness from the right side frame. 4. Remove the Upper Duplex Guide from the printer.
Outer Duplex Paper Guide Lower Inner Duplex Guide
Inner Simplex Guide
Lower Exit Guide Assembly
s8500-098
8-42
Solenoid Lever
Upper Duplex Guide
Hole for Solenoid Lever
s8500-099
Replacement Notes:
Note Route the solenoid harness through the right side frame when replacing the Upper Duplex Guide. Note Verify that the solenoid lever engages the hole in the Paper Release Guide.
8-43
Take Away Roller

(PL 3.7) 1. Remove the left and right side covers from the printer (see page 8-7). 2. Remove the Media Drive Gearbox (see page 8-48). 3. Remove the Lower Simplex Guide (see page 8-41). 4. Remove the KL-clip from the right end of the shaft. 5. Remove the KL-clip and bushing from the left end of the shaft. 6. Move the Take Away Roller shaft to the left side of the printer to release it from the right side frame, rotate the shaft forward, and remove it to the right. Note Pressure from the idler rollers makes it difficult to move the Take Away Roller shaft to the right during removal.
Take Away Roller KL-Clip Bushing
s8500-100
8-44
Pick Assembly
(PL 3.10) 1. Remove Tray 2 from the printer. 2. Reach into the tray cavity and release the orange colored catch holding the Pick Roller in place. The catch is located on the ceiling of the tray cavity about 1/4 of the way across the unit from the right side and about 12.5 cm (5 inches) back. When you pull forward on the catch, the roller will swing down.
s8500-101
s8500-102
3. Pull down to remove the roller. Note Replace the Retard Roller (see following figure) at the same time you replace the Pick Assembly.
Replacement Note:
Note Insert the replacement with the metal shaft at the top and toward the left, the grey rollers should be facing you. Position the roller back about5 cm (2 inches) in the tray cavity. Push the pick assembly up into the chassis and snap it into place. Then, rotate the Pick Assembly up and back to latch.
8-45
1
2
1
s8500-103
8-46
Media Tray Lift Motor

(PL 4.6) 1. Remove the Electronics Module (see page 8-55). 2. Remove Tray 2. 3. Disconnect the wiring harness from the Media Tray Lift Motor. 4. From the rear of the printer, inside the cavity, remove the push nut (this is a press fit). 5. Remove the gear from the shaft. 6. Remove the two screws holding the Media Tray Lift Motor to the printer frame. 7. Remove the Media Tray Lift Motor from the outside of the printer.
Lift Motor Gear
Push Nut
s8500-104
Replacement Note:
Note Ensure that the two tabs of the bushing are seated in the chassis. Position the push nut so the fingers on the inside of the nut are pointed up toward the end of the shaft. Place a box wrench or socket wrench of the same size as the outer ring of the push nut over the nut and press firmly to seat the nut on the shaft.
8-47
Motors, Gears, Solenoids, Clutches, and Fans

Media Drive Gearbox with Two Clutches and Solenoid
(PL 4.8) Videos are available with instructions for replacing the Media Drive Gearbox. Videos are located on the Phaser 8400/8500/8550 Product Training CD-ROM. Select Service and then select Media Drive Procedures). 1. Remove the Left side (page 8-7) and Exit cover (page 8-7). 2. Disconnect the fan, media path motor, deskew clutch, pick clutch, and Tray 1 pick solenoid wiring harnesses. 3. Remove the six screws securing the Media Drive Gearbox. 4. Remove the Media Drive Gearbox.
Media Drive Gearbox
Duplex Roller Shaft
Pick Clutch Loosen Only (Do Not Remove) Pick Roller Shaft
s8500-105
8-48
Replacement Note:
Note To replace the Media Drive Gearbox, first remove the paper tray. Rotate the Pick Roller Shaft until the clutch seats. Then work upwards, rotating the Take Away rollers and the Duplex Roller until all shafts seat properly. Ensure that the Media Drive Gearbox is correctly positioned on the side frame. Also, ensure that all rollers can rotate freely.

(PL 4.10) 1. Remove the left side cover from the printer (see page 8-7). 2. Disconnect the solenoid cable. 3. Remove one screw from the solenoid, and remove the solenoid from the Media Drive Gearbox.
s8500-106
8-49
Preheater Lift Solenoid

(8500/8550 only) (PL 4.13) 1. Open (do not remove) the Front Door (MPT) assembly (see page 8-4). 2. Remove the Control Panel and cover (see page 8-6). 3. Remove four screws, disconnect two connectors, and remove the Exit Module (see page 8-40). 4. Remove the outer and upper duplex guides (see page 8-41). The pre-heater lift solenoid is now visible on the top of the transfix load module. 5. Disconnect the three-wire cable that attaches the solenoid to the media-box motor. 6. Remove the single screw holding the solenoid to the transfix load module and lift out.
s8500-134
8-50
Process Drive Motor and Gearbox

(PL 4.9) Videos are available with instructions for replacing the Process Drive Motor and Gearbox. Videos are located on the Phaser 8400/8500/8550 Product Training CD-ROM. Select Service and then select Process Drive Procedures). 1. Remove the right side cover (see page 8-6). 2. Disconnect the drum heater wiring harness from the Relay Board to get it out of the way and free other wiring harnesses from the gearbox cable restraint. 3. If you will be installing new or re-installing this gearbox, pin the gears in position to ensure correct alignment on replacement (see the figure and following text).
Process Drive Motor and Gearbox
Holes in process drive frame aligns with holes in gears Hole in gear aligns with arrow on frame
s8500-107
8-51
Examine the process gear drive train for the following:

The holes is the process drive frame must align with the holes in the gear. The hole in the drum maintenance camshaft gear must align with the arrow on the frame. Caution The hole in the transfix camshaft gear align with the hole on the frame. Replacement gear boxes come with two pins to hold the gears in position. Use either the pins that come with replacement gear boxes, or a paper clip, bent into a U shape to hold the gears in their proper position during removal and replacement.
1. Remove three screws and remove the Process Drive Motor and Gearbox. 2. Disconnect the wiring harness from the Process Drive Motor.
Replacement Notes:
Caution If the Process Gearbox is not re-installed with the gears in the correctly aligned and pinned positions, the printer will not function correctly and could be damaged. Refer to the "Homing the Process Gear Drive Train" on
page 6-8.
Caution Be careful of the wiring harness to the Process Drive Motor and other nearby wiring. If the wires are pinched during reinstallation damage to the electronics module will occur. Ensure that the harness is routed via the cutout in the gearbox frame (see figure on page 8-51). Caution Before installing the Process Gearbox, use a slotted screwdriver to rotate the DM Camshaft 360 clockwise to ensure that the head tilt system is in the home position. Caution Seat the Process Drive Motor and Gearbox and seat all three screws before torquing the screws to final tightness. Torquing the screws individually before seating all components, can put undue strain on the mounting bosses. Caution When reinstalling the gearbox, the hole in the bottom mating gear should be aligned with the arrow embossed on the ground plane. The hole in the upper mating gear should be aligned with the adjacent hole in the frame (see figure on preceding page). Remove pins from the new gearbox after installation. Note Ensure that the drum heater harness, Y-Axis encoder harness, and the drum fan harness are replaced in the cable restraint on the gearbox.
8-52
X-Axis Motor Assembly

(PL 4.5) 1. Remove the Right Side Cover from the printer (see page 8-6). 2. Disconnect the wiring harness. 3. Remove four screws securing the motor to the chassis and remove the motor.
X-Axis Motor
Side Rail
s8500-108
Replacement Note:
Note When reinstalling the X-Axis motor, ensure that the fork, extending out from the side of the cone nut on the motor shaft, is engaged with the side rail.
8-53
Head Tilt Compound Gear

(PL 4.7) 1. Remove the printhead Assembly (see page 8-12). 2. At the left side of the Printer, remove the KL-clip as shown in the figure below. 3. Remove the waste tray frame, without disconnecting the sensor wiring harness. 4. Reach in to the waste tray cavity and remove the Head Tilt Compound Gear.
Remove KL-Clip
Head Tilt Compound Gear
s8500-109
Replacement Notes:
Note On reassembly, the leaf spring on the back side of the chassis must be behind the gear to engage. Note On reassembly, lubricate the curved (cam) surfaces of the gear using a small quantity of Rheolube 768 grease (P/N 00679900).
8-54
Electronics
Electronics Module
(PL 5.1) Videos are available with instructions for replacing the Electronics Module. Videos are located on the Phaser 8400/8500/8550 Product Training CD-ROM. Select Service and then select Replacement Videos). Caution Touch the back of the Electronics Module before starting this procedure to discharge any electrostatic charge present on the case. Also, do not completely remove EMI tape, if added to a connector. 1. Disconnect the power cord and all cables to the Electronics Module. On the 8500/8550 you need to peel back the EMI tape from the printhead data cable. 2. Remove the Ink Loader Assembly and Door (see page 8-8). 3. Remove five screws from the back of the Electronics Module and two screws from inside the printer chassis. 4. Remove the Electronics Module.
EMI Tape (8500/8550)
s8500-110
Replacement Note:
Note When replacing the electronics module, transfer the Configuration Card, NVRAM, SODIMM RAM, and hard drive (if installed) to the new module.
8-55
Wave Amp Board

(PL 5.3) 1. Remove Electronics module (see page 8-55). Note Do not fully remove EMI tape, if included with any connector. 2. Remove printhead (see page 8-12). 3. Remove three screws (see illustration below). Caution Route the ribbon cables carefully through the slots. 4. Remove the Wave Amp Board through the back of the printer.
s8500-111
Replacement Note:
Caution Ensure that the ribbon cables are fully and squarely inserted into the flex connector on the Wave Amp and printhead. If the cables are inserted incorrectly, they can damage the Wave Amp Board. Route the ribbon cables carefully through the slots. Ensure that the T-shaped strain relief on the cable is nearest the Wave Amp on installation.
8-56
I/O Board
(PL 5.4) 1. Remove the right side cover (see page 8-6). 2. Disconnect the wires to the I/O Board. 3. Remove the two screws attaching the I/O Board to the printer. 4. Remove the I/O Board.
I/O Board Ground Tab
s8500-112
Replacement Note:
Note Ensure the corner of the board is behind the ground tab on reassembly.
8-57
Drum Heater Relay Board

(PL 5.5) Warning This is an AC board, shut off power to the printer and disconnect the power cord before starting this procedure. 1. Remove the right side cover (see page 8-6). 2. Disconnect the three wires to the Drum Heater Relay Board. 3. Remove the screw securing the Drum Heater Relay Board to the printer. 4. Remove the Drum Heater Relay Board.
Drum Heater Relay Board

s8500-113
Replacement Note:
Warning Ensure that no wires are routed behind the Drum Heater Relay Board during reinstallation. Some of these wires carry AC line voltage and a short could result in AC being shorted to accessible locations.
8-58
NVRAM Replacement
(PL 5.8) 1. Remove the back cover from the Electronics Module. Caution Some semiconductor components, such as the NVRAM chip, are vulnerable to damage by Electrostatic Discharge (ESD). Review the "Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Precautions" on page 1-v before continuing with this procedure. Note Observe the orientation of the NVRAM chip before removing it and use this as a guide for proper replacement. 2. Remove the old NVRAM chip from its socket in the Electronics Module.
NVRAM Chip
s8500-114
3. Insert the new NVRAM chip into the socket. Ensure that the notch on the chip is on the left side. 4. Download the snippet titled setsn.ps from infoSMART. 5. Edit the snippet to include the printer serial number, using a text editor. 6. Download the edited file to the printer using an FTP program.
8-59
DIMM Replacement
(PL 5.7) 1. Remove the back cover from the Electronics Module. 2. Remove the two finger screws of the Electronics Module and swing the door down to the full open position. Caution Some semiconductor components, such as the DIMM chips, are vulnerable to damage by Electrostatic Discharge (ESD). Review the "Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Precautions" on page 1-v before continuing with this procedure. Note Observe the orientation of the DIMM (Dual-in-Line Memory Module) chips before removing them and use this as a guide for proper replacement. Notice that the DIMM boards are inverted to each other. 3. Pull the connector release tabs away from the DIMMs to release (see illustration). The Phaser 8400 includes a clip that secures the Dimms in place. For the 8500/8550 DIMMs, the top DIMM swings down and the bottom DIMM swings up in the removal position, while they clip in place in the flat position. 4. Remove the old DIMM chips from their sockets in the Electronics Module.
8400
8500/8500
s8500-115
5. Insert the new DIMM chips into the sockets. 6. Swing the DIMM chips to their secure position against the electronics module and snap them into their respective connectors.
8-60
Hard Drive Replacement

(PL 5.2) 1. Remove the back cover from the Electronics Module. Caution Some semiconductor components, such as the NVRAM chip, are vulnerable to damage by Electrostatic Discharge (ESD). Review the Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Precautions on page v before continuing with this procedure. 2. Disconnect the two connectors from inside the Electronics Module. 3. Pull out and replace the entire unit, including chassis holder, hard drive, and board.
2
3
1
3 3
s8500-116
4. Reattach the two connectors to the new hard drive unit. 5. Close the new unit with the hand screws.
8-61
Parts Lists
In this chapter...

Serial Number Format Using the Parts List Xerox Supplies
Section
Serial Number Format

Changes to Xerox products are made to accommodate improved components as they become available. It is important when ordering parts to include the following information:

Component's part number Product type or model number Serial number of the printer
Serial numbering. Particular fields in the serial number indicate the modification level of the printer, the date of its manufacture and the sequence number of the printer produced on that day.
The serial number is coded as follows:

The text S/N followed by the serial number in the barcode. The barcode does not include a field identifier. The nine digit serial number is based on the following format: PPPRSSSSS.
PPP = Three digit alphanumeric product code

Product
8400 8400 8500 8550 8550
Model
B, BD, N, DP, DX DPF N, DN DP, CT, DX DPF
Product Code
RPC TMV WYN WYP L91
R - Single digit numeric revision digit. To be rolled when a major product change occurs. Initiated with a change request. SSSSS - Five digit numeric serial number.
Serial Number Example:

RPC453072: 4 = Revision level 53072 = Serial number
9-2
Using the Parts List

1. No.: The callout number from the exploded part diagram. 2. Part Number: The material part number used to order specific parts. 3. Qty: This number represents the parts per printer, not the number of parts supplied in the actual part order. 4. Name/Description: Details the name of the part to be ordered and the number of parts supplied per order. 5. Parts identified throughout this manual are referenced PL#.#.#. For example, PL3.1.10 means the part is item 10 of Parts List 3.1. 6. A black triangle preceding a number followed by a parenthetical statement in an illustrated parts list means the item is a parent assembly, made up of the individual parts called out in parentheses. 7. The notation with X~Y following a part name indicates an assembly that is made up of components X through Y. For example, 1 (with 2~4) means part 1 consists of part 2, part 3, and part 4. 8. An asterisk (*) following a part name indicates the page contains a note about this part. 9. The notation (NS) next to a part indicates that particular part is not spared, but contained in a kit or major assembly. 10. The notation J1<>J2 and P2 is attached to a wire harness. It indicates that connector Jack 1 is attached to one end of the wire harness and connector J2 is attached to the other end that is plugged into P2. Note Only parts showing part numbers are available for support. Parts not showing part numbers are available on the parent assembly. Legend:
Identifier
C E KL S
Meaning
C-ring E-ring KL-clip Screw
Parts Lists
9-3
Covers
6 7
5 8
9 13
12
2 4 3 4 10 1 14 11
s8500-117
9-4
Parts List 1.0 Covers

No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Name/Description
Front Door (MPT) Assembly Front Door Stay Retainer Clip Front Door Stay with Spring Hinge Pins, Front Door Control Panel Cover Control Panel with Bezel Exit Cover Assembly Exit Cover with Badge Ink Loader Door (part of PL 2.1) Left Side Cover Right Side Cover Assembly with Doors Drum Maintenance Door (Side) I/O Access Door Waste Tray Cover Waste Tray
Qty Part Number

1 2 2 2 1 1 1 200467880 (8400) 802K93580 (8500/8550) 131714380 386740780 131713880 200467380 (8400) 802E93850 (8500/8550) 657012880 (8400) 802K93650 (8500/8550) 200469380 (8400) 802K93590 (8500) 802K88420 (8550) 200469880 (8400) 133K25031 (8500/8550) 200467680 (8400) 802K93660 (8500/8550) 200467580 (8400) 802K93570 (8500/8550) 200469480 (8400) 802E93870 (8500/8550) 200468480 (8400) 802E93860 (8500/8550) 200466780 109R00736
8 9 10 11 12 13 14
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Parts Lists
9-5
Imaging
3 5
19 6 20 7 12 8 21
18
13 14 15 16 17 11 9
10 18
9-6
Parts List 2.0 Imaging

No. 1 Name/Description
Ink Loader Assembly and Door
Qty
1
Part Number
200469880 (8400) 133K25031 (8500/8550) 133K25660 (Metered PagePack 8550) 650430300 (8400) 046K00510 (8500/8550) 105115080 (8400) 020K14790 (8500/8550) 214498780 (8400) 023E30670 (8500/8550) 367053480 (8400, 8500/8550) 214501280 (8400, 8500/8550) no narrow belt, use wide wiper&belt 604K31120 343167280 343167180 384187480 (8400) 008K02160 (8500/8550) 401100380 (8400) 020K14800 (8500/8550) 386735280 (8400) 041K06500 (8500/8550) 401102780 (8400) 022E32290 (8500/8550) 214499680 386739380 (8400) 137E14030 (8500/8550) 367053181 119641980 (8400) 126K23150 (8500/8550) 401101280 (8400) 059K50010 (8500/8550) 214503280 214503180 214503080
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Printhead Assembly Drum Assembly, includes Encoder Belt, Y-Axis Drum Printhead Wiper (for wide-style belts) Belt, Wiper Drive (wide-style) Purge Pressure Pump Left Printhead Restraint Right Printhead Restraint Transfix Camshaft Assembly Drum Maintenance Camshaft Assembly Stripper Carriage Assembly Transfix Roller Y-Axis Tension Spring Transfix Load Arm Module Assembly Drum Maintenance Pivot Plate Assembly Preheater and Deskew Assembly Transfix Arm Assembly X-Axis Bias Spring Hook X-Axis Roll Adjuster Spring Printhead X-Axis Bias Spring
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Parts Lists
9-7
Paper Path
4 13
5 8 7 2 1 3 6
10 11
12
s8500-119
9-8
Parts List 3.0 Paper Path

No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 Name/Description
Inner Simplex Guide Lower Inner Duplex Guide Lower Exit Guide Assembly with Strip Flag Outer Duplex Paper Guide with Sensors (Safety Interlocks) Upper Duplex Paper Guide with Solenoid Exit Roller Take Away Roller Duplex Roller Separator Pad Kit Pick Assembly and Retard Roller Kit Main Tray (Tray 2) 525-Sheet Feeder and Tray Exit Module Assembly
Qty
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Part Number
351111480 (8400) 032E29480 (8500/8550) 038K16870 038K16880 351113680 351113280 (8400) 032E29490 (8500/8550) 401091980 401094780 401091880 650429300 (8400) 604K31140 (8500/8550) 650429200 (8400) 604K31130 (8500/8550) 650433200 (8400) 050E23080 (8500/8550) 650433100 441223980 (8400) 133K25020 (8500/8550)
Parts Lists
9-9
Motors, Gears, Solenoids, Clutches, and Fans

8 4 5 9 10 3 6 7*
11
12
1 14 13
s8500-120
9-10
Parts List 4.0 Motors, Gears, Solenoids, Clutches, and Fans

Pre-heater Lift Solenoid Motor, Y-Axis Drive Pick Solenoid, Tray 1 Head Tilt Solenoid Gearbox, Media Drive with 2 Clutches, Solenoid Tray Lift Motor Kit and Gear (plus item 10) Paper Path Cooling fan
Qty
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Part Number
121K44430 (8500/8550) 147101780 119640880 121K44480 (8500/8550) 401098480 (8400) 807E16050 (8500/8550) 650429500 119650580 (8400) No longer orderable (refer to service bulletin 655). 119642680 (8400) 133K25010 (8500/8550) 401097880 650429500 401096180 650429400 119641780 (8400) 127E15090 (8500/8550) 401100080 (8400) 127K53240 (8500/8550)
8 9 10 11 12 13 14
Electronics Module System Fan Compound Gear, Head Tilt Tray Lift Motor Kit and Gear (plus item 6) Electric Clutch, Wiper X-Axis Motor Assembly Drum Cooling Fan Gearbox and Motor, Process Drive
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Parts Lists
9-11
Circuit Boards
6 7 5 3 1 2 4 8
9 10 11 12 13 18 17 15 16
s8500-121
14
9-12
Parts List 5.0 Circuit Boards and Cables

Cable, Y-Axis Motor Ground Wiring Harness, Left Side Power Control Cable, Wave Amp Signal Wave Amp Assembly Electronics Module (no RAM, NVRAM, or Configuration Card) Cable, Printhead Interface Hard Drive Assembly Hard Drive with Japanese Fonts
Qty
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Part Number
117E28740 174449480 (8400) 117E28720 (8500/8550) 174446580 (8400) 117E28680 (8500/8550) 671522380 (8400) 960K21180 (8500/8550) 119649580 (8400) 137E14020 (8500/8550) 174448580 097S03172 (8400) 121K44411 (8500/8550) 097S03173 (8400) 121K44420 (8500/8550) 156483700 (8400) 156466300 (8400) 856000200 (8500) 856000300 (8500/8550) 856000400 (8550) 156476800 650431200 (8400) 650431300 (8400) 650431400 (8400) 650431500 (8400) 650431600 (8400) 069E00360 (8500) 069E00370 (8500) 069E00380 (8550) 174448680 (8400) 117E28670 (8500/8550) 174446680 671529100 (8400) 960K22330 (8550/8550) 174451180 (8400) 117E28730 (8500/8550) 174447480 174448180 650431700 174447880
128 MB SDRAM 256 MB SDRAM 128 MB SDRAM 256 MB SDRAM 512 MB SDRAM 8-pin NVRAM Configuration Card-B, Prog. Configuration Card-BD, Prog. Configuration Card-N, Prog. Configuration Card-DP, Prog. Configuration Card-DX, Prog. Configuration Card-N, Prog. Configuration Card-DN, Prog. Configuration Card-DP, DT and DX, prog. Cable, Flex, Wave Amp Drive Cable, Right Side Power Control I/O Board Cable, Combined Right (Ink Loader Data, Preheater AC) Cable, I/O Board Data Cable, Right Umbilical Drum Heater Relay Board Cable, Front Door
9 10
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
Parts Lists
9-13
Sensors and Flags (Actuators)

3 6 1 4
5 2 7
s8500-122
9-14
Parts List 6.0 Sensors and Flags (Actuators)

No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Name/Description
Drum Temperature Sensor Assembly Optical Sensor (Generic Snap-In) Safety Interlock Switch (Mech) Exit Module Sensor Assembly Paper Present Flag Exit Flag Sensor Assembly, Paper Tray Waste Tray Sensor
Qty
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Part Number
119643080 119640580 119645580 119648180 386731280 386732680 441223780 119648780
Parts Lists
9-15
Xerox Supplies
Kits
Description
Mechanical Kit (Hardware)

Part Number
604K31780
Nut Plate - 2 ea. 6 mm press nut - 2 ea. #8 SAE washer - 5 ea. Thumbscrews - 2 ea. M4 x 12 delta pt/ hexhead - 5 ea. M4 x 32, partial thread flanged hex - 5 ea. M4 x 32, partial thread flanged hex, left-hand thread, yellow - 5 ea. M4 x 12, taptite flanged - 5 ea. ASMO clip, lift motor - 2 ea. E-ring, bent M6 5 mm - 5 ea. Bushing 6 mm - 2 ea. Cable Restraint - 2 ea. Left-hand drum screw (yellow - 2 ea.) Frame Replace Screw (red blue tint - 5 ea.) 065062800 (8400) 659K22810 (8500/8550) 016184500
Repackaging Kit
Cleaning Kit
Power Cords
Description
Cable Assembly, 3,18 AWG, 115 V, 98, 0 L Cable Power EURO 220 V, 99 L Cable Power U.K. 240 V, 96 L Cable Power AUST 240 V, 96 L Cable Assembly SWISS 220/240 V, 50 Hz Cable Assembly PWR. DANISH, 250 V Cable Assy PWR, CHINESE Cable Power, 240 V, ARGENTINA
Part Number
161006600 161006609 161006610 161006611 161015400 161024000 161030400 161030700
9-16
Upgrade Kits and Options

Description
Hard Drive Upgrade Kit
Part Number
097S03172 (8400) 121K44410 (8500/8550) 097S03173 (8400) 121K44420 (8500/8550)
Hard Drive Upgrade with Japanese Fonts
Memory (8400) 128 MB, 16M x 64, PC133; Memory DIMM 256 MB, 32M x 64, PC133; Memory DIMM Memory (8500) 128 MB, SDRAM 256 MB, SDRAM Memory (8550) 256 MB, SDRAM 512 MB, SDRAM 525-Sheet Feeder with Tray (8400/8500/ 8550)
ZMD128 ZMD256
097S03380 097S03381
097S03381 097S03382 097S03174
Recommended Tools
Description
Torque Screwdriver T20 Screwdriver Tip Mechanical Parts Kit Flashlight Grease 006799700
Part Number
003082700 003086600 650429700
Consumables and Routine Maintenance Items

Description
Standard-Capacity Maintenance Kit
Part Number
108R00602 (8400 series) 108R00675 (8500 series) 108R00603 (8400 series) 108R00676 (8550 only)
Extended-Capacity Maintenance Kit
Parts Lists
9-17
Consumables and Routine Maintenance Items

Description
Genuine Xerox Solid Ink Black (3 sticks)
Part Number
108R00604 (8400 series) 108R00668 (8500 series) 108R00706 (8550 Metered PagePack - 6 sticks) 108R00605 (8400 series) 108R00669 (8500 series) 108R00707 (8550 Metered PagePack - 6 sticks) 108R00606 (8400 series) 108R00670 (8500 series) 108R00708 (8550 Metered PagePack - 6 sticks) 108R00607 (8400 series) 108R00671 (8500 series) 108R00709 (8550 Metered PagePack - 6 sticks) 108R00608 (8400 series) 108R00672 (8500 series) 108R00612 (8400 series) 108R00687 (8500/8550 series) 108R00688 (8500/8550 series) 108R00689 (8500/8550 series) 108R00690 (8500/8550 series)
Genuine Xerox Solid Ink Cyan (3 sticks)
Genuine Xerox Solid Ink Magenta (3 sticks)
Genuine Xerox Solid Ink Yellow (3 sticks)
Genuine Xerox Solid Ink Black (6 sticks)
Rainbow Pack (1 stick) Genuine Xerox Solid Ink Cyan (1 stick) Genuine Xerox Solid Ink Magenta (1 stick) Genuine Xerox Solid Ink Yellow (1 stick) Genuine Xerox Solid Ink Black (1 stick)
Software and Documentation

Description
Setup Guide (poster) Quick Reference Guide World Kit Printer Installer and Utilities CD-ROM User Documentation CD-ROM Software and Documentation CD-ROM 8400/8500/8550 Service Manual
8400
001153600 71086500 061449300 063344900 063345000 N/A
8500/8550
001167300 0011167400 650K24290 N/A N/A 063347500
721P58550 (8400/8500/8550)
9-18
Phaser Color Printing Media

Description
Phaser Premium Color Printing Paper, 24 lb. Letter, 500 Sheets Phaser Premium Color Printing Paper, 24 lb. A4, 500 Sheets Phaser Premium Cover Paper, Letter, 100 Sheets Phaser Premium Cover Paper, A4, 100 Sheets Phaser Professional Solid Ink Transparency, Letter, 50 Sheets Phaser Professional Solid Ink Transparency, A4, 50 Sheets Phaser Professional Solid Ink Business Cards, Letter,10/sheet, 25 sheets Phaser Professional Solid Ink Business Cards, A4,10/sheet, 25 Sheets Phaser Color Printing Labels, Letter, 30/ Sheet, 100 Sheets Phaser Color Printing Labels, Letter, 6/ Sheet, 100 Sheets Phaser Color Printing Labels, A4, 14/Sheet, 100 Sheets Phaser Color Printing Labels, A4, 8/Sheet, 100 Sheets Phaser Premium Postcards, Letter, 4/Sheet, 100 Sheets Phaser Premium Postcards, A4, 4/Sheet, 100 Sheets Phaser Trifold Brochures, Letter, 150 Sheets Phaser Trifold Brochures, A4, 150 Sheets Phaser Weatherproof Paper, Letter, 150 Sheets Phaser Weatherproof Paper, A4,150 Sheets
Part Number
016136800
016136900
016182300
016182400
103R01039
103R01040
103R01041
103R01042
016181200
016181300
016181400
016181500
103R01016
103R01017
103R01018
103R01019 103R01020
103R01021
Parts Lists
9-19
Phaser Color Printing Media (Continued)

Description
Supplies Startup Kit, Standard Size Media Supplies Startup Kit, Metric Size Media
Part Number
097S03180 097S03181
9-20
Wiring Diagrams
In this chapter...

Main Wiring Diagram Right-Side Wiring Diagram Left-Side Wiring Diagram Inside Front Wiring Diagram Inside Top Wiring Diagram Inside Top - Printhead Wiring Diagram
Section
10
Main Wiring Diagram

Mode Switch 10/100T Parallel
Printhead Driver ECB
USB
JET0 +/JET1 +/JET2 +/CLK +/ADCTX +/J180 ADCRX +/+/-12 V regulated +3.3 V Gnd (9) Spares (Vss & Vpp) Vss J210 (8400 Only) 30 Vpp J240 30
Electronics Module J200

26
J600
J400
JR810
J930 IDE J860

80
40 connector
J130
Main Processor ECB
J580
Hard Drive J390 ECB

2.5 Hard Drive
14 Printhead tilt solenoid Main tray elevator plate motor Main tray pick clutch 14 MPT solenoid Deskew clutch 8, HCF connector 8 3 3 3 2 + J380 J980 11 J400 3 2 M. path motor fan (early 8400 only) Preheater Lift Solenoid ((8500/8550) Drum temp thermistor HCF_RD HCF_TD HCF_CLK +50 V +3.3 V Gnd (3) 2 Strip solenoid 2 DMU life (i Button) Strip sense opto Exit/bin full sense opto 3 3 2 8
2 2
Purge pump
J630 (8400 Only)
J670
Wave Amp ECB

VssD VppD J800 Gnd sense wave amp enable +/-50 V +/-12 V unregulated Gnd (6)
Main Fan
2
34
Media path motor with encoder
Tray 3 HCF Paper height opto Pick sense opto Paper out sense opto Pick clutch Transport motor
2 3
Main ECB
J120
Media Tray sense ECB
J1
Width sense (3) switch Length sense (2) switch
generates: J160 24 V PWM J820 10
Heat maintenance clutch
Elevator plate motor
2 8 Tray 4 HCF
Media Tray sense ECB

Width sense (3) switch Length sense (2) switch
J1
s8500-123
10-2
Main Wiring Diagram (Continued)

Printhead LINE 110/220 AC Resv. heaters (2) AC Jetstack heaters (2) Auxilary Connectors Drum Heater Series/parallel heater 35 35 Red White 3 J3 4 J4AC 4 2 2 2 J2 2 J1 Paper preheater Black J0720 2 J0660 J860 5 3 2 2
J620 4
J480 4
30 connector
Power Control J820 ECB

+/-50 V +/-12 V unreg +3.3 V generates J400 +/- 12 V reg. (Right Side) +5 V 16
JDC1
X- axis motor Drum fan
Power Supply ECB

AC generates: +/-50 V +/-15 V unreg +3.3 V J1AC 5
3 J3AC 7 J2AC
14
J790
Y axis pos encoder ECB
Relay ECB
34
J390 (Left Side) Printer ambient temperature
Process motor with encoder
J280
Y- axis motor
J800 (Right Side) Serial Data Bus 14 2 2 2 J870 J250 J840 J910 10
Inkload ECB
J1 Heaters (4) Ink out opto Ink low opto Door open opto Thermistor (4)
J2
Pre-heat ECB J0670

Deskew entry sense opto
Preheat temp therm
Preheat sense opto
I/O ECB
J860 J400 +50 V +3.3 V J110 J220 10 3 3 10
3 3
Main tray paper height opto Main tray paper opto Waste tray opto Process home (optional)
Control Panel ECB J190

generates: +5 V J110 LCD Display J600 10
Top door sense switch Front door sense switch
J680
J600
J610
MPT ECB
Width sense var. resistor Media present sense opto NOTE: Thermal fuse for drum is located on Pre-heated ECB
NOTE: The numbers shown at the circuit board perimeters are for the actual connectors. Some have extra n.c. pins added to prevent misplugging errors.
I/O color coding Black = input Magenta = output Red = temp

s8500-124
Wiring Diagrams
10-3
Right-Side Wiring Diagram

The arrows indicate which connectors you should look at for the Pest codes. The Pest codes are displayed on the Control Panel.
Wiring Harness Pass-Through J250 37020.4x Strip Solenoid J910 13387.4 J400 Drum Heater J110 Waste Tray Ground Clip
J680 13067.4x
37016.4x HM Clutch Wiring Harness Pass-Through J870 13067.4x
J600 Add Paper Tray
J860 Maintenance Kit Missing J840 Dead Power
J610 No Handfeed 37006.4x Drum Heater (Pre-heater) Drum AC is routed thru pre-heater prior to relay board and drum 5002.42
Ground Clip
37014.4x Drum Fan
s8500-125
10-4
Right-Side Wiring Diagram (Continued)

Routes to Top of Channel 13387.4x
J4AC 37006.4x
J800 Dead Power
J400 37027.4x Signal Cable Ribbon Cable (Routed in (Routed on Bottom of Channel) Middle of Channel)
37027.4x X-Motor
s8500-126
Wiring Diagrams
10-5
Left-Side Wiring Diagram

37023.4x Purge Valve
37022.4x Purge Motor
J280 37032.4x Y-Motor J790 37062.4x Head VSS
J390 37034.4x MP Motor
37021.4x MT Elevator 37013.4x Electric Fan Channel (Connected to Ground Strap)

s8500-127
10-6
Left-Side Wiring Diagram (Continued)

37034.3x MP Motor 37015.4x MP Fan (8400 Only) 370xx.4x Preheater Lift Solenoid (8500/8550 Only)
37017.4x Deskew Clutch
Ground Clip 37018.4x Pick Clutch 37019.4x Pick Solenoid

s8500-128
Wiring Diagrams
10-7
Inside Front Wiring Diagram

37036.4x Process Motor 37008.4x Preheat Power (AC Connector)
Load Paper Paper Jam (Open Front Cover) J860 13131.41 Sensor Flag
s8500-129
10-8
Inside Top Wiring Diagram

8400
37010.4x Ink 1 Heater J2AC 37002.4x JSL Heater J1AC 37009.4x (Ink Load Power) J130 34062.4x (Data Cable)
8500/8550
37010.4x Ink 1 Heater
J2AC 37002.4x JSL Heater
J1AC 37009.4x (Ink Load Power) J130 34062.4x (Data Cable) s8500-130
Wiring Diagrams
10-9
Inside Top - Printhead Wiring Diagram

Cable Restraint Out of Ink
J180 32064.4x
(8400 Only) J140 37063.4x Head VPP
Heater Cable
s8500-131
10-10
Appendix
Contents...

Menu Map (8400) Menu Map (8500/8550) Paper Weight Equivalence Table On-site Printhead Troubleshooting Checklist (8400)
Appendix
Menu Map (8400)
Main Menu:
READY TO PRINT.
Front Panel Buttons: Cancel Back
Information Walk-UpTM Features Printer Setup Troubleshooting Shut Down
Up Arrow OK Information Down Arrow
= prints an information page. Model Printer Name Print Server* IP Address* Serial # Menu Map Printer Identification Information Pages Sample Pages Supplies Info Maintenance Kit Life Total Print Count Graphics Demonstration Office Demonstration 2-Sided Demonstration** Print Mode Demonstration Activation Date Help Guide Configuration Page Paper Tips Page Connection Setup Page Moving Guide Startup Page Usage Profile PostScript Font List PCL Font List
Information
Walk-UpTM Features*
Secure Print Jobs***** Proof Print Jobs***** Saved Print Jobs***** Walk-Up PrintingTM Select for Installation
CMYK Sampler Pages RGB Sampler Pages
TCP/IP Setup
TCP/IP DHCP/BOOTP AutoIP TCP/IP Address TCP/IP Network Mask TCP/IP Gateway Port 9100 LPR IPP SLP SSDP CentreWare IS NetWare IPX Frame Type
Printer Setup
Configuration Page Connection Setup Connection Setup Page Network Setup* Parallel Setup USB Setup Reset Connection Setup
NetWare Setup Ethernet Speed EtherTalk
Parallel Port Wait Timeout Page Description Language Job Pipelining*
USB Port Wait Timeout
Requires: * Network Configuration ** Duplex Configuration *** Optional Lower Tray(s) **** Hard Drive ***** 8400DX only with stored jobs present
Page Description Language Job Pipelining*
Page 1 of 2
A-2
Paper Source 2-Sided Printing** Tray 1 Setup Tray 2 Paper Type Tray 3 Paper Type*** PostScript Error Info Print-Quality Mode TekColor Correction Image Smoothing Reset PostScript Setup Font Number Pitch Point Size Symbol Set Orientation Form Length Line Termination Draft Mode Reset PCL Setup PCL Setup Front Panel Setup Printer Controls Startup Page Power Saver Timeout Date and Time Intelligent Ready Metric Defaults Reset Printer Controls Front Panel Language Front Panel Brightness Front Panel Contrast Accessible Front Panel Reset Front Panel Setup
Printer Setup (continued)

Paper Handling Setup PostScript Setup
Tray 4 Paper Type*** Load Paper Timeout Cleaning Page Source Reset Paper Handling Setup
Troubleshooting
Help Guide Paper Jams Print Quality Problems Network Log Pages* Service Tools Printer Status Page Engine Error History Jam History Diagnostics History Enter Diagnostic Mode Service Usage Profile Email Service Report* Reset NVRAM NetWare Start Log NetWare Runtime Log TCP/IP Start Log TCP/IP Runtime Log AppleTalk Start Log AppleTalk Runtime Log Paper Tips Page Online Jam Prevention Guide Paper Path Test Troubleshooting Print Quality Page Eliminate Light Stripes Remove Print Smears
Shutdown
Power Saver (Recommended) Restart Printer Power Down To minimize ink usage, leave the printer on.
Requires: * Network Configuration ** Duplex Configuration *** Optional Lower Tray(s) **** 8400DX only with stored jobs present
Page 2 of 2
Service Manual
A-3
Menu Map (8500/8550)
Main Menu:
READY TO PRINT.
Front Panel Buttons: Cancel Back
Information Walk-UpTM Features Printer Setup Troubleshooting Shut Down
Up Arrow OK Information Down Arrow
= prints an information page. Model Printer Name Print Server* IP Address* Serial # Menu Map Printer Identification Information Pages Sample Pages Supplies Info Maintenance Kit Life Total Print Count Graphics Demonstration Office Demonstration 2-Sided Demonstration** Print Mode Demonstration Activation Date Help Guide Configuration Page Paper Tips Page Connection Setup Page Moving Guide Startup Page Usage Profile PostScript Font List PCL Font List
Information
Walk-UpTM Features*
Secure Print Jobs***** Proof Print Jobs***** Saved Print Jobs***** Walk-Up PrintingTM Select for Installation
CMYK Sampler Pages RGB Sampler Pages
TCP/IP Setup
TCP/IP DHCP/BOOTP AutoIP TCP/IP Address TCP/IP Network Mask TCP/IP Gateway Port 9100 LPR IPP SLP SSDP CentreWare IS NetWare IPX Frame Type
Printer Setup
Configuration Page Connection Setup Connection Setup Page Network Setup* Parallel Setup USB Setup Reset Connection Setup
NetWare Setup Ethernet Speed EtherTalk
Parallel Port Wait Timeout Page Description Language Job Pipelining*
USB Port Wait Timeout
Requires: * Network Configuration ** Duplex Configuration *** Optional Lower Tray(s) **** Hard Drive ***** 8400DX only with stored jobs present
Page Description Language Job Pipelining*
Page 1 of 2
A-4
Paper Source 2-Sided Printing** Tray 1 Setup Tray 2 Paper Type Tray 3 Paper Type*** PostScript Error Info Print-Quality Mode TekColor Correction Image Smoothing Reset PostScript Setup Font Number Pitch Point Size Symbol Set Orientation Form Length Line Termination Draft Mode Reset PCL Setup PCL Setup Front Panel Setup Printer Controls Startup Page Power Saver Timeout Date and Time Intelligent Ready Metric Defaults Reset Printer Controls Front Panel Language Front Panel Brightness Front Panel Contrast Accessible Front Panel Reset Front Panel Setup
Printer Setup (continued)

Paper Handling Setup PostScript Setup
Tray 4 Paper Type*** Load Paper Timeout Cleaning Page Source Reset Paper Handling Setup
Troubleshooting
Help Guide Paper Jams Print Quality Problems Network Log Pages* Service Tools Printer Status Page Engine Error History Jam History Diagnostics History Enter Diagnostic Mode Service Usage Profile Email Service Report* Reset NVRAM NetWare Start Log NetWare Runtime Log TCP/IP Start Log TCP/IP Runtime Log AppleTalk Start Log AppleTalk Runtime Log Paper Tips Page Online Jam Prevention Guide Paper Path Test Troubleshooting Print Quality Page Eliminate Light Stripes Remove Print Smears
Shutdown
Power Saver (Recommended) Restart Printer Power Down To minimize ink usage, leave the printer on.
Requires: * Network Configuration ** Duplex Configuration *** Optional Lower Tray(s) **** 8400DX only with stored jobs present
Page 2 of 2
Service Manual
A-5
Media Margin Specification Table
Media Size
Legal Folio A4 A Executive B5 JIS B5 ISO #10 Envelope Choukei 3 Gou C5 Envelope DL Envelope Statement A5 Choukei 4 Gou Monarch Envelope A7 Lee Envelope #6 3/4 Envelope A6 #5-1/2 Baronial 3 x 5 Card 6 x 9 Envelope Custom
Width (mm)
215.9 215.9 210 215.9 187.15 182 176 104.775 120 162 110 139.7 148 90 98.425 133.35 92.075 105 111.125 76.2 152.4 76.2 215.9
Length (mm)
355.6 330.2 297 279.4 266.7 257 250 241.3 235 229 220 215.9 210 205 190.5 184.2 165.1 148 146 127 228.6 127 355.6
Side Margins (mm)

5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 12.5 (8400) 5 mm (8500)
Top/ Bottom Margin (mm)

5 5 5 5 5 5 5 15 15 20 20 5 5 15 15 15 15 5 15 5 20 12.5
Image Width (mm)

205.9 205.9 200 205.9 174.15 172 166 94.775 105 157 100 129.7 138 80 88.425 123.35 82.075 95 101.125 66.2 142.4 51.2 190.9
Image Length (mm)

345.6 320.2 287 256.7 256.7 247 240 211.3 205 189 180 205.9 200 175 160.5 154.2 135.1 138 112.9 117 188.6 102 330.6
A-6
Paper Weight Equivalence Table

US Postcard Thickness (mm) US Bond Weight (lb.) 16 17 20 21 24 27 28 29 32 36 0.18 39 40 0.20 43 45 0.23 47 51 53 54 58 65 US Text Book Weight (lb.) 41 43 50b 54 60b 68 70b 74 80b 90 100 101 110 115 119 128 134 137 146 165 US Cover Weight (lb.) 22 24 28 30 33 37 39 41 44 50 55 55 60 63 65 70 74 75 80 90 US Bristol Weight (lb.) 27 29 34 36 41 45 49 50 55 62 67 68 74 77 80 86 90 93 98 111 US Index Weight (lb.) 33 35 42 44 50 55 58 61 67 75 82 83 90 94 97 105 110 113 120 135 US Tag Weight (lb.) 37 39 46 49 55 61 65 68 74 83 91 92 100 104 108 117 122 125 133 150 Metric Weight (g/m2) 60 64 75 80 90 100 105 110 120 135 148 150 163 170 176 190 199 203 216 244
Service Manual
A-7
On-site Printhead Troubleshooting Checklist (8400)
PRINTHEAD TROUBLESHOOTING CHECKLIST

Phaser 8400/WorkCentre C2424 Version 2
IMPORTANT! This checklist outlines proper printhead troubleshooting procedures. All Xerox service employees and any other service personnel on any job involving a printhead replacement should perform it.
Service person name

Service Company Phone Number Date of printhead replacement Printer serial number Printhead serial number OUT Request ID number
Troubleshooting Summary Follow the checklist below and fill in spaces as they apply as you complete the troubleshooting procedures.
Check List Items to Complete Do you suspect or have evidence of use of generic ink? Value or Result YES NO
Circle one
What to look for
Step 1
1a. Did the customer state that they have used generic ink in this printhead? YES NO 1b. Did you observe generic sticks or related packaging at the site? YES NO 1c. Are there generic ink sticks in the ink loader? YES NO 1d. Does the service history indicate possible use of generic ink? YES NO Indicate brands and lot codes of generic ink if used: ______________________________________________ If you answered YES to any of the above, be sure to document the use of non-Xerox ink in the Comments section of this document. Xerox U.S. personnel and Service Delivery Partners please record non-Xerox ink use in the FIST system as well as in this document.
Xerox
Phaser 8400/WorkCentre C2424 Printhead Checklist
075-0882-02
Page 1
A-8
Step 2
Print the Service Usage Profile. It is located in the front panel menu Troubleshooting Service Tools.
If Line 631 Printhead ID lists a date, record the date (month day year) here: If Line 636 IDU lists any values, record the numbers here:
Printhead ID: 00-09: _______________ 10-29: _______________ 30-99 _______________ 100+: _______________ IDU: 00-09: 10-29: 30-99 100+: _____________ _____________ _____________ ______________
Step 3
Does the printer display an error code indicating a problem with the printhead?
YES NO
Circle one
Xerox U.S. personnel please record these dates in the FIST system as well as in this document If YES please write down the error code. _______________ 3a. If error code 13,264.4x is present in the Fault History replace the electronics module (continue to 3b). 3b. If a printhead thermistor open or shorted error code 13,195.45, 13,197.47, 13,259.46, 13, 261.48, 13,323.47, 13.325.49 is displayed or a PEST error code 37,002.47, 37,003.48, 37,004.40, or 37,005.41, perform the following steps: 3c. Inspect and reseat the printhead interface cable (gray ribbon cable) and retest. 3d. Replace the electronics module and retest. 3e. Replace the printhead. If NO, replace the printhead. The repair is complete!
Ink visible in reservoirs
Step 4
Visually inspect the ink reservoirs. Do they all contain ink? No ink in a reservoir, accompanied by many missing jets before and after a purge cycle, indicates that an ink-level sensor has failed.
YES NO
Circle one
Step 5
Has the printer had a printhead replaced before for a (non-NXI related) weak or missing jet problem?
If YES, replace the wiper assembly. Proceed to Step 9. YES NO

Circle one
The new wiper assembly may take 6 purges to before achieving optimal performance. Ensure the wiper assembly is correctly aligned with the printhead. If the missing jet(s) recovers, the repair is complete.
Xerox
075-0882-02
Page 2
Service Manual
A-9
Step 6
Is the Wiper Assembly correctly aligned? Print Service Test Print 1: Weak and Missing Jets. Is severe color mixing apparent? Visually check the printhead faceplate. Is the faceplate contaminated?
YES NO
Circle one
Is the wiper assembly out of alignment (not parallel with the printhead faceplate)? If YES, perform the wiper alignment procedure as described in the Phaser 8400 Color Printer Service Guide. Is there color mixing from one row to the next row for the same jet? Note: Some color mixing is normal following a purge. It usually clears after one or two prints. If YES, replace the wiper assembly. Repeat Step 6.
Step 7
YES NO
Circle one
Step 8
YES NO
Circle one
Are there streaks, smudges, or a scum of wax in the jet area (outlined in red) of the printhead?
If YES, replace the wiper assembly. Repeat the checklist starting at Step 6.
Step 9
Step 10
Visually check the Wiper Assembly blade. Is it OK? Check the purge performance of the purge system.
Is there any damage or separation on the wiper blade? If YES, replace the wiper assembly.
YES NO
Circle one
Check the purge pump performance. 10a. Empty the waste tray. 10b. Select Eliminate Light Stripes from the printer front panel and run one cleaning cycle. 10c. Remove the waste tray and examine how much ink was purged. A single purge should resemble the illustration.
Is the purge mass noticeably less than what is pictured? If YES, inspect the purge hoses for kinks, splits or tears.
Xerox
075-0882-02
Page 3
A-10
Step 11
Print Service Test 1: Weak and Missing Jets. Are there weak or missing jet(s)?
YES NO
Circle one
If NO go to Step 12. If YES, do the following: Check the exit area of the paper path for debris that could be scraping ink off the drum and may mimic a weak or missing jet. Select Eliminate Light Stripes from the printer front panel up to 3 times as needed to recover a weak or missing jet. Perform the JetFix technique by downloading the appropriate snippet (such as 8400_jetfix_c.ps for a missing cyan jet) to the printer. The snippets are available on the Customer Support Resources website in the Phaser 8400 web pages. Refer to Service Bulletin 640. If the jet is still missing, replace the printhead. The repair is complete! If YES, print 10 solid fill pages of cyan. If the bands vary in intensity and/or location over the 10 prints, the customer is experiencing stagnant ink discoloration. Continue to print solid fills of the offending color until the output is uniform. It may take as many as 60 solid fill pages to refresh all of the ink in the printhead reservoir. The repair is now complete! If No, the repair is complete!
Step 12
Is the customer experiencing vertical bands (not light stripes) in solid color areas?
YES NO
Circle one
Comments: (Xerox U.S. personnel please add all comments into FIST) ____________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________ A completed checklist and sample prints must be returned with each printhead. Xerox reserves the right to refuse reimbursement to service personnel who do not enclose a completed troubleshooting checklist and a sample print with each returned printhead.
Please return the following items with the defective printhead: Two prints of Service Print 1 This Printhead Troubleshooting Checklist (filled out) Inventory control Green Tag (filled out) Sample prints that clearly show the observed print quality defect (not applicable for printheads replace because of an error code)
Service Print 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88
74 75 76 77 78 79 80
Weak jet
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88
9923-114
Xerox
075-0882-02
Page 4
Service Manual
A-11
GENERIC INK FAILURE CHECKLIST

PERFORM THIS CHECKLIST ONLY IF YOU SUSPECT NON-XEROX INK IS BEING USED.
Step Print Test Print 1 (Weak/Missing Jets). CAREFULLY examine it. Does Test Print 1 show at least one color with 8 or more 1 weak/missing jets? Step Run 10 solid fills in the suspected color from the front panel. Does the number of weak and missing jets noticeable increase with solid 2 fills. Step Does the printhead reservoir of the affected color have a large visible pool of ink obscuring the surface of the filter element? 3 If YES Go to Step 3 If YES Go to Step 3 If YES Go to B If NO Go to Step 2 If NO Go to B If NO Go to A
Ink not visible. Filter viewable. Ink passing easily thru filter.
Visible pool of ink obscuring filter. Ink not readily passing thru filter.
Generic Ink Failure.

Inform the customer that service will only be provided with a credit card or purchase order. The Xerox warranty/Service Agreement DOES NOT cover repair cost of the printhead when it has been damaged by non-Xerox ink and the repair cost is the responsibility of the customer. Provide the customer with the Diagnosis Form and Onsite Failure notification letters. Once payment has been authorized or assured, replace the printhead and included ink per normal procedures. Check the Non-Xerox/Tektronix Ink box on the Green tag. Enclose all sample prints (including two prints of Service Print 1), ink samples, waste ink, and this checklist with the printhead. Xerox Personnel Please provide full documentation in FIST.
Does not fully meet field criteria. Suspected generic ink failure.
Inform the customer that although the Field Generic Ink Failure Test Criteria was not satisfied, engineering will further evaluate the printhead upon its return to the factory. It will be subjected to complete analysis at that time and, if found to be damaged by generic ink, the customer will be billed. Provide the customer with the Customer Alert #8 March 2005 letter. If there are weak or missing jets replace the printhead and included ink per normal procedures. Check Non-Xerox/Tektronix Ink box on the Green tag. Enclose all sample prints (including two prints of Service Print 1), ink samples, waste ink, and this checklist with the printhead. Xerox Personnel Please provide full documentation in FIST.
IN EITHER CASE PLEASE NOTE ADDITIONAL GENERIC INK INFORMATION Was generic ink or related packaging observed? YES NO Was generic ink present in the ink loader? YES NO IMPORTANT Note the brand and lot code of the generic ink, if available
Xerox Phaser 8400/WorkCentre C2424 Printhead Checklist 075-0882-02 Page 5
A-12
On-site Printhead Troubleshooting Checklist (8500/ 8550)
PRINTHEAD TROUBLESHOOTING CHECKLIST

Phaser 8500/8550 Version 1.0
IMPORTANT! This checklist outlines proper printhead troubleshooting procedures. All Xerox service employees and any other service personnel on any job involving a printhead replacement should perform it.
Service person name

Service Company Phone Number Date of printhead replacement Printer serial number Printhead serial number OUT Request ID number
Troubleshooting Summary Follow the checklist below and fill in spaces as they apply as you complete the troubleshooting procedures.
Check List Items to Complete Do you suspect or have evidence of use of generic ink? Value or Result YES NO
Circle one
What to look for
Step 1
1a. Did the customer state that they have used generic ink in this printhead? YES NO 1b. Did you observe generic sticks or related packaging at the site? YES NO 1c. Are there generic ink sticks in the ink loader? YES NO 1d. Does the service history indicate possible use of generic ink? YES NO Indicate brands and lot codes of generic ink if used: ______________________________________________ If you answered YES to any of the above, be sure to document the use of non-Xerox ink in the Comments section of this document. Xerox U.S. personnel and Service Delivery Partners please record non-Xerox ink use in the FIST system as well as in this document.
Xerox
Phaser 8500/8550 Printhead Checklist
0750984-00
Page 1
Service Manual
A-13
Step 2
Print the Service Usage Profile. It is located in the front panel menu Troubleshooting Service Tools.
If Line 631 Printhead ID lists a date, record the date (month day year) here: If Line 636 IDU lists any values, record the numbers here:
Printhead ID: 00-09: _______________ 10-29: _______________ 30-99 _______________ 100+: _______________ IDU: 00-09: 10-29: 30-99 100+: _____________ _____________ _____________ ______________
Step 3
Does the printer display an error code indicating a problem with the printhead?
YES NO
Circle one
Xerox U.S. personnel please record these dates in the FIST system as well as in this document If YES please write down the error code. _______________ 3a. If error code 13,264.4x is present in the Fault History replace the electronics module (continue to 3b). 3b. If a printhead thermistor open or shorted error code 13,195.45, 13,197.47, 13,259.46, 13, 261.48, 13,323.47, 13.325.49 is displayed or a PEST error code 37,002.47, 37,003.48, 37,004.40, or 37,005.41, perform the following steps: 3c. Inspect and reseat the printhead interface cable (gray ribbon cable) and retest. 3d. Replace the printhead. The repair is complete! If NO, replace the printhead. The repair is complete!
Visually inspect the ink reservoirs. Do they all contain ink? No ink in a reservoir indicates that an ink-level sensor has failed.
YES NO
Circle one
Ink visible in reservoirs
Step 5
Has the printer had a printhead replaced before for a (non-NXI related) weak or missing jet problem?
If YES, replace the wiper assembly. Proceed to Step 9. YES NO

Circle one
The new wiper assembly may take 6 purges to before achieving optimal performance. Ensure the wiper assembly is correctly aligned with the printhead. If the missing jet(s) recovers, the repair is complete.
Xerox
0750984-00
Page 2
A-14
Step 6
Is the Cap/Wipe/ Purge assembly correctly aligned? Print Service Test Print 2: Weak and Missing Jets. Is severe color mixing apparent? Visually check the printhead faceplate. Is the faceplate contaminated?
YES NO
Circle one
Is the wiper assembly out of alignment (not parallel with the printhead faceplate)? If YES, perform the wiper alignment procedure as described in the Phaser 8400/8500/8550 Color Printer Service Guide. Is there color mixing from one row to the next row for the same jet? Note: Some color mixing is normal following a purge. It usually clears after one or two prints. If YES, replace the wiper assembly. Repeat Step 6.
Step 7
YES NO
Circle one
Step 8
YES NO
Circle one
Are there streaks, smudges, or a scum of wax in the jet area (outlined in red) of the printhead?
Step 9a
Step 9b
Visually check the Wiper Assembly blade. Is it OK? Check the purge performance of the purge system.
If YES, replace the wiper assembly. Repeat the checklist stating at Step 6. Is there any damage or separation on the wiper blade? If YES, replace the wiper assembly.
YES NO
Circle one
Check the purge pump performance. 9a. Empty the waste tray. 9b. Select Eliminate Light Stripes - Basic from the printer front panel and run one cleaning cycle. 9c. Remove the waste tray and examine how much ink was purged. A single purge should resemble the illustration.
Is the purge mass noticeably less than what is pictured? If YES, inspect the purge hoses for pinches, splits, or tears.
Xerox
0750984-00
Page 3
Service Manual
A-15
Step 11
Print Service Test 2: Weak and Missing Jets. Are there weak or missing jet(s)?
YES NO
Circle one
If NO go to Step 12. If YES, do the following: Check the exit area of the paper path for debris that could be scraping ink off the drum and may mimic a weak or missing jet. Select Eliminate Light Stripes - Basic from the printer front panel up to 3 times as needed to recover a weak or missing jet. Select Eliminate Light Stripes - Advanced from the printer front panel up to 2 times as needed to recover a weak or missing jet. Select Jet Substitution to substitute a working jet for the missing jet. However, if any of the following criteria is met, you should replace the printhead instead. If the customer uses the billing meters features. If three missing jets of the same color are adjacent (for example cyan jets 79, 80, and 81). By the customer runs mainly in Fast Color or Standard mode (as revealed on the Usage Profile page). The repair is complete! If YES, print 10 solid fill pages of cyan. If the bands vary in intensity and/or location over the 10 prints, the customer is experiencing stagnant ink discoloration. Continue to print solid fills of the offending color until the output is uniform. It may take as many as 60 solid fill pages to refresh all of the ink in the printhead reservoir. The repair is now complete! If No, the repair is complete!
Step 12
Is the customer experiencing vertical bands (not light stripes) in solid color areas?
YES NO
Circle one
Comments: (Xerox U.S. personnel please add all comments into FIST) ____________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________
A completed checklist and sample prints must be returned with each printhead. Xerox reserves the right to refuse reimbursement to service personnel who do not enclose a completed troubleshooting checklist and a sample print with each returned printhead.
Please return the following items with the defective printhead: Service Print 1 (not necessary for error code-based failures (not applicable for printheads replace because of an error code) This Printhead Troubleshooting Checklist (filled out) Inventory control Green Tag (filled out) Sample prints that clearly show the observed print quality defect (not applicable for printheads replace because of an error code)
Service Print 1
Xerox
0750984-00
Page 4
A-16
Index
ink loader, 8-9 media drive motor, 8-37 525-sheet feeder, parts list, 9-9 pick solenoid, 8-49 8-pin NVRAM, parts list, 9-13 power cord parts list, 9-16 printhead data, 5-8 printhead power, 3-18 A ribbon connector, 8-6 AC power, 2-20 serial modem, 4-85 adjust x-axis scale, service menu, 4-3 USB, 4-84 wave amp, 3-45 cabling, parts list, 9-13 B calibration faults, 3-36, 3-39 back button, 1-5 calibrations, printer, 6-10 basic positions, printhead, 2-10 camshaft assembly, 2-4 basic printhead cleaning cycle, 2-33 cancel button, 1-5 belts chase page, 2-34, 4-3, 4-64 drive, single reduction, 2-17 check menu tables, 4-12 drum, 2-17 check activators menu, 4-13 parts for wiper drive, 9-7 deskew clutch, 4-13 parts for y-axis, 9-7 drum heater relay, 4-15 printer, 7-6 head maintenance clutch, 4-13 removing from drum assembly, 8-34 purge vent solenoid, 4-15 wiper alignment, 6-3 strip solenoid, 4-14 y-axis disassembly, 8-9 tray 1 pick solenoid, 4-13 y-axis slip test, 3-65, 4-45 tray 2, tray 3, tray 4, pick clutch, y-axis tension, 3-16 4-14 y-axis tension test, 4-45 check drive menu, 4-35 BIST Error Codes, 3-3 drum maintenance drive, 4-39 paper path drive, 4-36 C tilt drive, 4-40 transfix drive slow and transfix cables drive fast, 4-38 circuit board and cables part list, 9-13 tray 2, tray 3, tray 4, lift plate crossover, 4-82 drive, 4-41 drum encoder, 8-34 wiper drive, 4-35 drum heater, 8-34 x-axis drive, 4-37 drum thermister, 8-34 check drum menu, 4-42 exit module, 8-38 drum maintenance contact, 4-47 I/O and electronic, 3-28 stripper contact, 4-46 IDE hard drive, 2-19
Numerics
Service Manual
Index 1
y-axis belt slip, 4-45 y-axis belt tension, 4-45 y-axis drive, 4-44 y-axis encoder, 4-42 y-axis geometry, 4-43 check misc menu, 4-53 drum maint/transfix home, 4-58 paper path status, 4-53 purge pump, 4-55 temperature status, 4-54 voltages, 4-56 wiper alignment, 4-57 check motors menu, 4-48 media path motor, 4-50 process motor, 4-49 tray 2, tray 3, tray 4, lift motor, 4-51 tray 3 and tray 4 pick/feed motor, 4-51 x-axis motor, 4-48 y-axis motor, 4-48 check paper path menu, 4-20 duplex paper drive power, 4-31 duplex paper lead edge times, 4-32 duplex paper sensor bounce times, 4-34 duplex paper trail edge times, 4-33 paper drive power, 4-25 paper lead edge times, 4-26 paper sensor bounce times, 4-30 paper trail edge times, 4-28 tray 1 pick shaft, 4-22 tray 2, tray 3, and tray 4 pick shaft, 4-24 wiper shaft, 4-20 check shafts menu, 4-17 deskew shaft, 4-17 cleaning ink smears, 7-3 light stripes or missing colors, 7-3 media jams, 7-3 cleaning cycle, 2-33 cleaning page, 2-14, 2-33, 5-44 cleaning procedures, 7-2
Clear ISC Fault, 4-11 clevis pins, 8-28, 8-35, 8-37 closed-loop servo motor, 2-17 communication ports, 2-19, 4-82 configuration card 8400 series, 1-3 8500 series, 1-4 theory, 2-19 view, 1-8 configuration, control panel, 1-5 consumables, 9-17 diagram, 1-9 life counters, 1-9 control panel LED indicators, 1-5 menu map, 1-6 covers control panel, 8-6 exit, 8-7 front door assembly, 8-5 left side, 8-7 right side, 8-6
D
DC power, 2-21 deskew clutch, 4-17 deskew clutch test, 4-13 deskew clutch, disconnecting, 8-48 deskew process, 2-26 deskew rollers, 2-27 diagnostic firmware, 3-36 diagnostic history, 3-2 diagnostic test functions, 3-2 diagnostics process motor, 3-19 tilt axis, 3-19 transfix drive, 3-19 x-axis, 3-18 y-axis encoder, 3-16 diagnostics menu, hidden service, 3-9 diagnostics, service, 4-4 DIMM, 1-8 disassembly notes, 8-3 disassembly procedures control panel cover, 8-6
Index 2
covers, 8-6 DIMM chips, 8-60 drum heater relay, 8-58 drum maintenance assembly, 8-32 duplex roller, 8-23 electronics module, 8-55 exit module assembly, 8-40 front door assembly, 8-5 hard drive, 8-61 head tilt compound gear, 8-54 head tilt solenoid, 8-18 I/O board, 8-57 ink loader assembly, 8-8 media drive gearbox, 8-48 media release blade and roller, 8-22 NVRAM, 8-59 paper guides, 8-41 pick assembly, 8-45 pick solenoid, 8-49 preheater and deskew assembly, 8-23 preheater lift solenoid, 8-50 printhead assembly, 8-12, 8-20 processor drive motor, 8-51 purge pressure pump, 8-39 takeaway roller, 8-44 wave amp board, 8-56 x-axis bias spring, 8-19 x-axis motor assembly, 8-53 y-axis motor assembly, 8-9 dot size variations, 5-37 drop mass evaluation, 5-34 drum assembly, 2-3, 2-16 drum assembly, parts, 9-7 drum cleaning, 2-34 drum heater, 2-16 drum maintenance, 2-24 camshaft, 6-8, 8-52 camshaft assembly parts, 9-7 definition, 2-3 door part number, 9-5 pivot plate, 8-32 pivot plate part, 9-7 removing pivot plate, 8-33 theory, 2-13 drum maintenance system, 2-3 drum operation
assembly and transfix system, 2-16 drum cleaning, 2-34 drum preparation, 2-24 maintenance system, 2-13 purge system, 2-14 relation to printhead, 2-10 drum preparation, 2-24 duplex printing, 2-30 duplex roller disassembly, 8-25 parts, 9-9
E
electrical troubleshooting, 4-65 electronics module, 2-19 BIST errors, 3-3 DIMM replacement, 8-60 failures, 4-71 I/O board faults, 3-11 interface faults, 3-27 location, 1-8 NVRAM replacement, 8-59 overview, 2-3 parts list, 9-13 POST errors, 3-4 replacement, 8-55 theory of operation, 2-19 electronics subsystem, 2-3 eliminate light stripes, 2-33, 5-2 eliminate light stripes, service menu, 4-2 energy guidelines, 4-3 envelopes, printing on, 1-13 environmental specifications, 1-11 error codes 525-sheet feeder faults, 3-10 code version, 3-36 electronics module, 3-27 I/O board program, 3-11 I/O circuit board, 3-11 ink loader, 3-26 IPC program, 3-12 mechanical initialization, 3-37 printhead calibration, 3-36 process control system, 3-13 process motor gearbox, 3-19
Service Manual
Index 3
thermal faults, 3-29 wiper/media path, 3-24 x-axis fault, 3-18 y-axis sub-system, 3-16 ethernet address, configuration card, 2-19 exit module all-series parts, 9-9 assembly parts, 9-9 sensor assembly parts, 9-15 exit rollers, 2-5, 2-27, 2-30 exit rollers, parts, 9-9 exiting, 2-27
H
hard drive, 1-8 parts list (all series), 9-13 POST error, 3-8 replacement note, 8-55 replacement procedure, 8-61 support, 2-19 upgrade kit parts, 9-17 head tilt gear, homing, 6-5 heater harness, 8-15 heaters, ink reservoir, 2-8 hidden service menu, 4-5 home position, 6-4
F
fan drum, 2-16 drum cooling parts, 9-11 drum diagnostics, 5-37 drum disassembly, 8-34 electronics module parts, 9-11 media path motor, 4-8 paper path parts, 9-11 temperature error, 3-29 fan, electronics, 3-29 fans menu, check menu, 4-6 fault codes, 3-9 fault history, hidden service menu, 4-2 field replaceable units, 8-2 front door assembly, stay, and retainer, 9-5 hinge pin parts, 9-5 removal, 8-5 tray 1 assembly, 8-5 function menu, service diagnostics, 4-10 functional specification, 1-11 fuzzy text, 5-17
I
I/O board, faults, 3-11 imaging components, disassembly, 8-9 incomplete image, 5-26 indicators, LED, 1-5 ink jet damage, 8-13 ink loader faults, 3-26 function, 2-3 theory, 2-6 ink loader, disassembly, 8-8 ink smears, 5-28 ink-out sensor, 2-6 input/output Ports, 2-19
J
jam code tables, 3-56 jam codes, 3-55 jet nozzles, 2-7 jet stack, 2-8 jet substitution, 2-24, 6-10
G
ghosting, 5-20 ground connection integrity, 4-77 ground connection warning, 1-ii ground integrity, 4-77 grounding, 4-77 guidelines, energy, 4-3
L
lift motor, 4-9, 4-51 lift motor, disassembly, 8-47 lower inner duplex guide parts list, 9-9 removal, 8-41 lubrication, 7-6
Index 4
M
main board electronics module, 2-19 main board memory, 2-19 main subsystems, 2-2 maintenance kit, 7-5 maintenance kit, eprom chip, 2-13 mechanical initialization, 4-60, 4-62 media drive assembly parts, 9-11 function, 2-3 gearbox removal, 8-48 theory, 2-5 media path drive, 2-3 media path faults, 3-37 miscellaneous error codes, 3-36
N
NVRAM, 1-8, 2-19 NVRAM, reset, 6-12
O
oil streaks, 5-24 oiling cycle, 2-34 outer duplex guide illustration, 8-42 paper path part, 9-9 removal, 8-41
P
paper color media, 9-19 jam, 2-34 main tray, 9-9 media specifications, 1-12 pick process, 2-25 preheater, 2-16 present flag, 9-15 printing process, 2-16 transfix and print speeds, 2-31 transfixing and editing, 2-27 transport system, 2-3, 2-5
paper path check menu, 4-20 drive problems, 4-36 exit module assembly, 8-40 ink residue, 5-6 jams, 3-37 motor jam codes, 3-64 parts list, 9-9 problems, 3-24 scratches or marks, 5-13 status, 4-53 temperature problems, 5-28 theory, 2-26, 2-34 paper pick errors, 4-79 theory, 2-25 parts list, usage, 9-2 personality parameters, 2-19, 2-20, 2-35 PEST Error Codes, 3-8 PEST error reporting, 3-8 PEST tests, 3-8 Phaser features 8400 series, 1-3 8500 series, 1-4 physical dimensions, 1-10 pick roller cleaning, 7-4 disassembly, 8-45 feeder faults, 3-10 jam codes, 3-73 media skews, 4-81 parts assembly, 9-9 skew margins, 5-42 theory, 2-5 pivot plate, 2-13 poor primary colors, 5-19 POST error codes, 3-5 POST error reporting, 3-4 POST tests, 4-2 power control board, 2-20 power supply, 2-20 power supply operation, 4-75 power supply, verifying, 4-75 power-up sequence, 4-59 predominate light stripes, 5-5 preheat exit sensor, 2-27
Service Manual
Index 5
preheater cleaning, 2-33, 2-34 disassembly, 8-23 errors, 3-31 function, 2-16 fuses, 2-20 ink smears, 5-28 jams, 4-80 lift solenoid disassembly, 8-50 parts, 9-7 smudges or smears, 5-6 temperature, 4-54 test, 3-31 thermister, 3-31 transfixing, 2-27 print position, 2-11 print process, 2-23 print quality problems menu, 2-34 print speeds, 2-31 print-eject jams, troubleshooting, 4-80 printer clearances, 1-10 printer orientation, 8-2 printer part locator, 1-7 printer view rear, 1-8 right side with interfaces, 1-7 printer, inspecting, 7-6 printhead, 2-3 printhead maintenance cycle, 2-14 printhead movement, 2-10 printhead overview, 2-3 printhead restraints, disassembly, 8-12 printhead theory, 2-7 printhead tilt, 2-10 printhead, disassembly, 8-12 print-quality defects, 5-2 process control faults, 3-13 process drive, 2-18 assembly train, 6-4 definition, 2-3 error faults, 3-19 homing, 6-8, 8-52 parts list, 9-11 relation to drum, 2-13
relation to printhead, 2-11 relation to transfix system, 2-18 theory, 2-4 process gear drive train, homing, 6-8 purge pump, 8-13 purge system, 2-3, 2-14 purging, 2-33
R
random light stripes, 5-3 regulatory information Canada, 1-iii Europe, 1-iii United States, 1-iii remove print smears, 2-34 retard roller, 2-26 roll block, 8-14 routine maintenance items, 1-9
S
scratches, 5-13 self maintenance functions, 2-33 self-maintenance cycles, 2-33 sensors, 2-22 service diagnostics, 4-4 service menu, hidden, 4-2 silicone oil, 2-13 six-jet interlace, 2-24 smudges or smears, 5-6 specifications electrical, 1-11 environmental, 1-11 functional, 1-11 media and tray, 1-12 physical dimensions, 1-10 specifications, printer, 1-10 status indicator LED, 1-5 streaks, 5-11 supplies, Xerox, 9-16
Index 6
T
test prints, 5-33 tilt cam, 2-10, 2-11 tilt gear, 2-12 transfix roller, 2-16, 2-18, 2-27 transfix speeds, 2-31 transfix system, 2-3, 2-16 transfixing, 2-27 troubleshooting, jam codes, 3-57
U
uneven color, 5-9
W
waste ink, 2-14 waste tray, 7-5 wavy vertical lines, 5-23 wiper alignment procedure, 6-2 wiper assembly lock, 8-12 wiper faults, 3-24 wiping, 2-33 wiring inside front, 10-8 inside top, 10-9 left-side, 10-6 main wiring, 10-2 printhead, 10-10 right-side, 10-4 wrinkling, 5-31
X
x-axis bias spring hook, 8-13 x-axis faults, 3-18, 3-19 x-axis system, 2-9
Y
y-axis belt, disassembly, 8-9 y-axis faults, 3-16
Service Manual
Index 7

Phaser 8500 8550 Service Manual Ver3

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Phaser 8500 8550 Service Manual Ver3

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Phaser 8500 8550 Service Manual Ver3

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Phaser 8400/8500/8550 Color Printer

User Safety Summary

Protective ground (earth) terminal:

Use caution. Refer to the manual(s) for information:

Service Safety Summary

Phaser 8400/8500/8550 Color Printer

United States (FCC Regulations)

European Union (Declaration of Conformity)

Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC as amended

Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive 89/336/EEC as amended

Radio & Telecommunications Terminal Equipment Directive 1999/5/EC as amended

Phaser 8400/8500/8550 Color Printer

Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Precautions

2-30 2-31 2-33 2-33 2-34 2-34 2-34 2-35

3 Error Messages and Codes

Phaser 8400/8500/8550 Color Printer

6 Adjustments and Calibrations

7 Cleaning and Maintenance

8 Service Parts Disassembly

Phaser 8400/8500/8550 Color Printer

9-10 9-12 9-14 9-16

Phaser 8400/8500/8550 Color Printer

Printer Introduction and Overview

Phaser 8400/8500/8550 Color Printer

Phaser 8500/8550 Series Printer Configurations Phaser Features

Phaser 8400/8500/8550 Color Printer

Control Panel Configuration

Green = Ready to Print

Flashing Amber = Warning

Control Panel Feature Descriptions

Walk-Up Features Information Paper Tray Setup Printer Setup Troubleshooting

Up Arrow button Scrolls upward through the menus.

Control Panel Shortcuts

Service (Internal) Diagnostics

FTTR (Fast Time To Ready)

Phaser 8400/8500/8550 Color Printer

Parts of the Printer

Right Side View with Printer Interfaces

1. Hard drive (optional)

2. Memory (RAM) DIMM 1 and DIMM 2

Phaser 8400/8500/8550 Color Printer

Routine Maintenance Items and Consumables

Routine Maintenance Items

*Consumable capacity is based on 5% coverage per color on plain A4 paper.

Note: All dimensions in inches

Phaser 8400/8500/8550 Color Printer

Operating Modes and Resolutions

Media and Tray Specifications

Paper Weight/Media Type

Phaser 8400/8500/8550 Color Printer

Paper Weight/Media Type

Main Printer Subsystems

Printer Subsystem Overview

Phaser 8400/8500/8550 Color Printer

Swing gear Imaging Transfix Transfix Camshaft

Phaser 8400/8500/8550 Color Printer

Media Path Drive

Motor Media path drive

Ink Loader Door

Ink Melt Units